Skip to main content

Full text of "A Commentary on the Mass by the Nestorian George, Bishop of Mosul and Arbel"

See other formats


A  COMMENTARY  on  the  mass 

by  THE  NESTOR1  AN  QE0R6E, 
BISHOP  OF  MOSUL  AND  ARBEL 


-v5 

. 

,  „  %  v>‘  V  •  \  '  * 

o 

Translated  by  Dom  R.H.  Connolly 


Edited  by  Fr.  Robert  Matheus 


€x  Uibns 

iu'ti)  Jtlarbutbo  Uibrarp 


t?  ^Lis 


The  Malphono  George  Anton  Kiraz  Collection 


Anyone  who  asks  for  this  volume,  to 
read,  collate,  or  copy  trom  it,  and  who 
appropriates  it  to  himself  or  herself,  or 
cuts  anything  out  of  it,  should  realize 
that  (s)he  will  have  to  give  answer  before 
God’s  awesome  tribunal  as  it  (s)he  had 
robbed  a  sanctuary.  1  ,et  such  a  person  be 
held  anathema  and  receive  no  forgiveness 
until  the  book  is  returned.  So  be  it. 
Amen!  And  anyone  who  removes  these 
anathemas,  digitally  or  otherwise,  shall 
himself  receive  them  in  double. 


A  COMMENTARY  ON  THE  MASS 


(which  has  been  attributed  to,  but  it  is  not  really) 

BY  THE  NESTORIAN 

GEORGE, 

BISHOP  OF  MOSUL  AND  ARBEL 

(10TH  CENTURY) 

Translated  from  the  Syriac  by  R.H.  Connolly 

(1909) 

Edited  by  F.  Robert  Matheus 


No  243 
OIRSI 

Department  of  Publications  of  Paurastya  Vidyapitham 
Pontifical  Oriental  Institute  of  Religious  Studies 
Vadavathoor,  Kottayam,  India 


Title:  A  Commentary  on  the  Mass  (which  has  been  attributed  to,  but 
it  is  not  really)  by  the  Nestorian  George,  Bishop  of  Mosul  and 
Arbel  (10th  century) 


Translator:  R.H.  Connolly,  O.S.B. 


Editor:  Fr.  Robert  Matheus 


©  Copyright  by  the  editor 


Published  by:  OIRSI,  Paurastya  Vidyapitham, 
Vadavathoor,  Kottayam,  India 


First  published:  2000 


Printed  at:  Nanjil  Offset  Printers, 

Nagercoil,  India.  Ph.  (04652)  33853 


ISBN:  81-86063-80-3 


Acknowledgment 

I  am  happy  to  present  to  the  public  this  non  published  trans¬ 
lation  by  Dom  Connolly  of  the  “ Expositio  Officiorum ”  of  the  anony¬ 
mous  author,  attributed  to  George  of  Arbela  (10th  C.),  a  work, 
very  detailed,  but  in  a  mystagogical  style.  As  the  Most  Rever¬ 
end  Abbot,  Richard  Yeo,  of  his  abbey,  has  already  said  in  his 
preface,  this  translation,  originally  made  in  1909,  was  only  in¬ 
tended  as  a  tool  for  his  Latin  translation.  So,  we  cannot  con¬ 
sider  it  as  a  completed  work.  Nevertheless,  Dom  Connolly  was 
an  eminent  scholar  not  only  in  the  Syriac  language,  but  in  the 
whole  patrimonium  of  the  Syriac  churches.  Therefore,  his  trans¬ 
lation  will  be  a  very  useful  help  for  those  interested  in  the  Eu¬ 
charistic  celebration  of  the  East  Syrian  tradition. 

I  thank  the  Most  Reverend  Abbot  Richard  Yeo  for  his  per¬ 
mission  to  publish  this  manuscript;  I  thank  also  Dom  Daniel  Rees 
for  his  kindness  to  have  photocopied  the  whole  manuscript  and 
sent  it  to  me.  I  thank  my  bishop,  Mar  George  Alencherry  for  his 
help,  in  spite  of  his  busy  time  schedule,  and  for  the  encourage¬ 
ment  he  gave  me. 

I  must,  finally,  explain  some  modifications  I  have  made  to 
the  original  manuscript: 

1.  Since  the  pagesetting  of  this  book  is  different,  I  have  not 
kept  the  original  references  of  the  translator  to  the  pages  in  his 
own  manuscript. 

2. 1  have  not  reproduced  the  plan  of  two  Armenian  churches 
and  the  accompanying  letter  (in  French)  sent  by  abbe  Chabot 
to  Dom  Connolly. 

3,  I  have  kept  the  original  division  of  the  manuscript:  the 
commentary  of  Tract  4  on  the  Qurbana  (Mass)  is  preceded  by 
some  texts,  as  explained  in  the  preparatory  remarks. 

4.  In  a  few  places  the  manuscript  was  unreadable.  I  have 
indicated  these  passages  by:  ...? 

Thuckalay,  4  August  2000  The  editor 


m 


Foreword 


Dom  Hugh  Connolly  (1873-1948),  a  Benedictine  monk  of 
Downside  Abbey  in  England  and  a  eminent  Syriac  scholar,  made 
what  he  described  as  a  “rough  English  translation”  of  this  work 
as  a  preliminary  aid  to  translating  it  into  Latin.  He  never  intended 
the  English  translation  to  be  published,  and  appears  not  to  have 
been  pleased  when  the  Librarian  placed  his  translation  in  the 
monastery  library  at  Downside. 

The  Syriac  text  and  Latin  translation  appeared  under  the 
title  “Expositio  Officiorum  Ecclesiasticorum”  in  Corpus  Scriptorum 
Christianorum  Orientalium,  Scriptores  Syri  (Rome  1913),  XCI- 
XCII.  It  is  clearly  desirable  that  the  work  be  more  accessible, 
and  Downside  Abbey  is  therefore  happy  to  agree  to  the  publi¬ 
cation  of  Dom  Connolly’s  “rough  translation”.  However,  we  also 
feel  it  only  fair  to  remind  the  reader  that  the  translator  would 
almost  certainly  have  wished  to  revise  the  English  text  before 
publication. 


Richard  Yeo  OSB 

Abbot  of  Downside  Abbey 
Stratton  on  the  Fosse, 
Bath,  U.K. 


19  August  2000 


Table  of  Contents 


Acknowledgment 

■  ■  • 

in 

Foreword 

iv 

Table  of  Contents 

V 

PREPARATORY  REMARKS 

1 

1.  Tract  2.  Chapter  2 

...  2 

Symbolism  of  the  Parts  of  the  Church. 

...  6 

2.  Tract  2.  Chapter  6 

...  9 

3.  Passages  of  Liturgical  Interest 

...  17 

Tract  4.  Chap. 21 

...  .  17 

•  Tract  2.  Chap. 6 

...  18 

4.  George  of  Arbel’s  church 

...  21 

Symbolism 

...  24 

TRACT  4 

...  26 

Chapter  1 

...  26 

Chapter  2 

...  29 

Chapter  3 

...  32 

Chapter  4 

...  37 

Chapter  5 

...  40 

Chapter  6 

...  44 

•• 

Chapter  7 

....  46 

Chapter  8 

...  49 

Chapter  9 

4 

...  53 

Chapter  10 

'  ,..  54 

'  Chapter  1 1 

• ...  58 

v 


60 


Chapter  12 
Chapter  13 
Chapter  14 
Chapter  15 
Chapter  16 
Chapter  17 
Chapter  18 
Chapter  19 
Chapter  20 
Chapter  21 
Chapter  22 
Chapter  23 
Chapter  24 
Chapter  25 
Chapter  26 
Chapter  27 
Chapter  28 
Chapter  29 
Chapter  30 
Index 


...  61 
68 
...  71 

...  73 

...  77 

...  78 

...  83 

85 
...  91 

...  94 

96 

...  100 
...  110 
...  129 
...  137 
...  141 
...  142 
...  144 
...  147 


vi 


Preparatory  Remarks 


The  translation  is  from  the  photographs  (sent  by  Fr.  J.-B.  Chabot, 
l  ne  of  the  editors  of  the  Corpus  Scriptorum  Orientalium  to  R.H. 
Connolly)  taken  from  a  copy  of  a  manuscript  in  the  library  of  Alkosh 
j  ear  Mosul. 

The  following  pages  contain  a  translation  of  George  of  Arbel’s  fourth 
ract  or  Discourse  [Syr.  Memra]  on  the  Ecclesiastical  Offices ,  which 
ieals  with  the  liturgy,  or  “Mysteries”.  Prefixed  to  this  are: 

1 .  A  translation  of  chapter  2  of  Tract  2,  in  which  the  writer  gives  a 
lescription  of  his  church,  and  explains  the  symbolism  of  its  different 

,0 

oarts. 

2.  A  translation  of  Tract  2,  chapter  6  (with  a  few  omissions  of  un- 
mportant  matter)  on  the  different  orders  of  clergy. 

3.  Some  passages  of  special  liturgical  interest. 

4.  A  summary  of  the  information  he  gives  as  to  the  arrangement  of 
lis  church,  with  a  tentative  plan. 

5.  A  short  key  to  his  symbolism  in  connection  with  the  Mysteries. 

The  pages  of  these  introductory  sections  are  numbered  from  1  to  25 
in  the  original  Connolly  had  numbered  them  in  Roman  numbers). 

NB.  (1)  Words  within  brackets  are  not  represented  in  the  Syriac 
text. 

(2)  Those  in  round  brackets  are  (for  the  most  part)  inserted  merely 
to  eke  out  the  meaning  in  English,  or  to  accommodate  the  English  idiom 
to  that  meaning  of  the  Syriac. 

(3)  Those  in  square  brackets  are  for  the  most  part  explanatory  notes 
which  might  as  well  have  been  at  the  foot  of  the  page;  but  here  and  there 
a  word  seems  to  have  fallen  out  of  the  Syriac  text  itself,  or  to  has  been 
omitted  by  the  scribe;  in  these  cases  the  word  is  supplied  in  square  brack¬ 
ets:  these  can  easily  be  distinguished  from  mere  notes. 

(4)  All  parentheses  marked  by  dashes:  - . -  are  represented  in 

the  Synac  text. 


1 


(1)  TRACT  2.  CHAPTER  2 

Why  do  we  divide  the  church  into  apse  [Koy%r|] nave  [lit.  “temple” 
-  haikla]  and  the  place  of  the  women?  and  why  did  Isho’ Yabh  command 
that  the  baptistery  should  be  on  the  south  side? 

Some  say  that  that  house  which  was  in  Jerusalem,  that  is,  the  tent  of 
testimony,  was  so  arranged,  and  part  of  it  was  called  the  Holy  of  Holies, 
part  the  tent  of  (fol.52v°)  testimony,  part  the  house  before  the  tent.  Moreo¬ 
ver,  its  doors  also  (they  say)  opened  on  the  South  towards  Jordan.  And 
they  shew  (proof)  by  this  (fact),  that  they  (the  Israelites)  crossed  Jordan 
and  settled  in  the  land  of  promise,  and  on  this  account  they  [=  the  Isra¬ 
elites]  opened  the  doors  of  the  house  towards  Jordan,  that  is,  on  the 
South  side  of  Jerusalem. 

But  others  say  that  this  [=  having  the  door  on  the  South]  is  not  a 
matter  of  necessity,  and  that  it  does  not  matter  how  the  doors  happen  to 
open  or  the  baptistery  to  stand.  And  they  adduce  in  proof  churches  that 
are  thus  (differently)  arranged  and  are  not  found  fault  with.  But  blessed 
Isho’Yabh  prescribed  such  things  as  should  signify  some  mystery,  not 
insisting  that  it  should  be  so  done  of  necessity  (as  he  prescribed).  Even 
as  he  said  concerning  the  furniture  of  the  church:  that  at  midday  the 
presbyters  and  deacons  and  subdeacons  [should  go  to  the  church  and 
clean  the  lamps] 1 :  whereas  it  is  a  matter  of  no  importance  even  if  they  go 
in  the  morning  or  before  daylight:  so  has  he  spoken  now  also. 

The  ancients2  indeed  say  that  formerly3  the  parts  of  the  church 
were  not  thus  orderly  divided  up,  but  that  even  the  women  used  to  enter 
the  apse,  and  there  receive  the  Sacrament.  And  this  especially  was  done 
in  the  land  of  the  Romania4  (sic).  But  when  blessed  Nestorius  was  elected 
to  Byzantium,  by  his  godly  zeal  he  studied  the  mysteries  which  the  church 
administers;  and  when  he  had  seen  what  they  were,  he  arranged  the 
church  according  to  the  mysteries  which  she  administers.  And  since  our 
Lord  performed  His  dispensation  in  the  locality  of  Jerusalem,  when  He 

'So  in  Tract  2,  chap.  5. 

2Or  “old  men”. . 

3Lit.  “before  now”. 

rc_*_iiz>acm 


2 


t  ame  down  from  heaven  and  put  on  our  manhood;  and  again  descended 
rom  Jerusalem  to  heaven;  he  so  arranged  the  church  also.  The  Holy  ol 
lolies  [=  sanctuary]  he  set  in  place  of  heaven;  the  Kaiaarpcopa  in  place 
»f  Paradise,  which  is  high  even  unto  the  ether;  (but)  which,  while  in 
leight  it  stands  (on  a  level)  with  heaven,  is  within  the  boundary  of  earth, 
^o  the  KaxacrcpcDfia  also  while  it  has  (an  equal)  height  with  the  apse,  is 
:>ound  (fol.53r°)  to  the  nave;  and  there  is  a  door  shut  between  it  and  the 
upse,  which  is  heaven.  It  shares  with  heaven  by  its  height;  it  cleaves  to 
-arth  in  its  essence  [ouaux].  As  far  as  this  KaxaaTpco|ia  the  readers 
iscend,  and  represent  the  lowest  church  of  the  angels,  who  are  messen¬ 
gers  to  men. 

But  the  nave  is  the  whole  earth.  The  bema,  which  is  in  the  midst  of 
he  nave,  is  the  locality  of  Jerusalem,  which  is  in  the  middle  of  the  world. 
But  the  altar  which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  bema  takes  the  place  of  Golgotha, 
rhe  bishop’s  throne  is  in  place  of  the  high  priest,  the  son  of  Aaron.  The 
onest  used  to  sit  before  this  sanctuary,  which  was  [lit.  “is”]  overagainst 
all  Jerusalem,  and  overagainst  the  East.  The  place  of  the  readers  is  on 
the  right  hand  and  on  the  left:  in  the  one  are  read  the  prophets,  and  in  the 
other  the  Apostle  or  the  Gospel;  in  the  one  stands  the  deacon  who  fills 
the  place  of  the  Levite  - 1  mean  on  the  inferior  [=  left] .  That  the  places  of 
the  prophets  and  the  Apostle  are  equal  is  forasmuch  as  the  apostles  and 
the  prophets  were  teaching  Israel  concerning  the  light  of  the  manifesta¬ 
tion  of  our  Lord.  But  the  apostles  are  superior  in  honour  to  the  prophets, 
since  the  prophets  saw  our  Lord  (only)  by  a  mystery,  but  the  apostles 
face  to  face.  Thus  Paul  also  teaches:  “For  God  set  in  His  church  first 
apostles,  and  after  them  prophets”  [1  Co.  12:28].  Wherefore  the  greater 
honour  is  accorded  to  the  place  of  the  apostles  [sc.  (probably)  it  stands 
on  the  right]. 

Again,  the  straight  way  that  leads  from  the  bema  to  the  apse  -  I 
mean  the  gangway5  -  is  the  way  of  truth,  by  which  everyone  who  walks 
(therein)  enters  heaven.  For  whoever  wishes  to  enter  heaven,  -  let  him 
come  to  the  beginning  of  this  way,  that  is  into  Jerusalem.  Let  him  be¬ 
lieve  in  the  Scriptures  and  the  dispensation  of  Christ,  which  was  in 
Jerusalem,  let  him  accept  His  commandments  and  His  laws,  and  lo,  he 


3 


has  guides  who  will  lead  him  from  earth  to  heaven,  even  the  deacons 
who,  like  angels  (fol.53v°)  go  forth  and  receive  those  who  are  worthy  to 
inherit  life.  And  in  the  same  gangway  are  set  doors,  opening  in  three 
places  from  apse  to  bema;  that  is  to  say,  before  the  apse,  and  in  the 
middle,  and  before  the  bema:  doors  which  are  opened  before  everyone 
who  wishes  to  enter  into  this  holy  way,  the  beginning  of  which  is  Jerusa¬ 
lem.  And  from  Jerusalem  (he  goes)  to  Paradise  [=  mxaaxpcopa],  from 
Paradise  to  heaven.6 

But  the  nave  is  all  the  earth.  The  place  of  the  men  is  the  region  of 
Eden  and  the  East;  the  place  of  the  women  is  the  region  of  the  West.  And 
as  the  East  and  the  region  of  the  earth  which  is  in  that  direction  [lit.: 
“which  is  before  it”]  is  the  more  excellent,  consider  the  place  of  the  men 
as  the  habitation  of  the  1 0  generations  before  the  flood.  Consider  the 
place  of  the  women  as  the  place  into  which  Canaan  was  cast  when  he 
sinned  against  his  father.  But  since  the  door  of  heaven  is  closed  before 
those  who  would  enter7 ,  whether  they  be  of  the  house  of  Shem  or  of  the 
house  of  Canaan,  it  is  nor  right  for  those  to  boast  whose  place  signifies 
the  earth  before  the  flood.  Because  those  (who  were  before  the  flood) 
were  not  virtuous,  they  were  drowned  in  the  flood.  Neither  let  the  priests 
boast,  who  are  in  Jerusalem,  for  to  them  the  light  was  a  stumbling  block 
and  they  were  darkened  from  (receiving)  the  light  of  our  Lord  by  their 
works.  Neither  let  the  deacons  boast,  who  stand  like  the  angels  in  heaven, 
because  Satan’s  exalted  place  did  not  profit  him  when  he  sinned,  but  he 
was  cast  into  the  nether  parts  of  the  earth.  Abraham,  who  was  elected 
unto  sanctification  performed  service  before  Canaan8 ,  and  the  West  had 
authority  over  the  East. 

And  so  let  every  one  in  his  place  strive  after  virtue,  that  he  may 
receive  what  he  looks  for:  I  mean,  that  the  deacons  when  they  observe 
their  place  with  knowledge  shall  be  with  the  angels;  the  priests  when 

6The  three  doors  were  no  doubt  (1)  opening  on  to  the  Kaxaoxpcofia  from  the 
apse  -  see  p.  3  above;  (2)  one  at  the  bottom  of  the  steps  of  the  Kaxaoxpoopa; 
(3)  one  at  the  bottom  of  the  steps  leading  up  to  the  bema. 

He  means  this  to  apply  to  the  laity,  as  is  shown  by  what  follows. 

8Sc.  in  Egypt. 


4 


they  fulfil  their  canons  shall  be  with  Christ;  the  faithful,  observing  what 
is  fitting  shall  be  with  Henoch;  and  the  women  observing  the  command¬ 
ments  (fol.54r°)  shall  be  with  Mary,  who  dwelt  in  Nazareth,  a  place 
inferior  to  any  (part)  of  Jerusalem  [lit.  “to  all  Jerusalem’’],  (and)  in 
which  it  was  thought  there  was  nothing  good.  But  even  Ruth  the 
Moabitess  shewed  more  virtue  than  Rachel  who  was  of  the  true  seed. 
The  one  acted  treacherously  against  her  father  and  against  God:  against 
her  father  by  stealing  the  images  that  he  used  to  worship:  against  God 
by  playing  the  harlot  in  His  worship9 .  Against  her  husband  also  she 
dealt  treacherously;  for  he  loved  her,  but  she  deceived  him  and  did  not 
make  know  to  him  her  theft. 

But  Ruth  observed  everything  seemly:  she  fulfilled  her  widowhood; 
she  honoured  her  mother-in  law,  she  left  her  father’s  house  for  the  sake 
of  (her)  loving  fidelity,  she  hearkened  to  her  mother-in  law,  she  was 
united  in  chaste  wedlock.  All  these  things  God  has  set  down  [in  the 
Scripture]  that  those  members  which  have  a  more  honourable  place  in 
the  body  should  not  boast. 

But  again  (as  to)  the  doors  of  the  nave  and  the  place  of  the  baptis¬ 
tery,  it  is  seemly  that  they  should  be  so  arranged10 .  As  soon  as  we  desire 
to  become  heirs  of  heaven,  let  us  take  part  in  those  present  things  which 
signify  the  resurrection  and  the  enjoyment  (of  heaven);  and  let  us  know 
the  dispensation  of  our  Lord  and  the  pleasantness  of  His  mysteries.  And 
when  we  seek  these  things,  we  have  need  of  a  door  whereby  to  enter  to 
them:  which  (door)  is  baptism.  Let  us  begin  with  baptism  and  then  let  us 
enter  to  the  Mysteries.  When  we  come  to  enter  rightly  [or  “directly’’] 1 1 
into  the  church  we  enter  from  the  South  side;  and  thus  we  rightly  or 
[“directly”]  receive  baptism  and  enter  to  the  Mysteries,  which  are  in 
Jerusalem,  the  which  will  lead  us  to  Paradise,  which  is  the  Kaxaorpcopa; 
and  from  Paradise  we  shall  enter  heaven. 


9Sc.  by  having  the  idols  for  the  purpose  of  worshipping  them. 

,0Sc.  in  the  south  part  of  the  church. 

1 1  lit.  “straight”,  in  a  straight  line. 


5 


This  appears  to  be  the  reason  why  this  blessed  man  [Isho’Yabh] 
prescribed  these  things.  But  if  any  adopt  this  (view),  that  Jordan  is  so 
situated  with  regard  to  Jerusalem  [sc.  on  the  South]12 :  let  those  who 
know  the  locality  of  Jerusalem  speak  (concerning  this  matter):  for  my 
part  I  will  cry  out  with  Habakkuk:  “I  have  not  seen  Jerusalem,  neither 
do  I  know  Jordan”.13 

Note.  In  Tract  2,  ch.9  George  tells  us  that  they  worshipped  towards 
the  East:  so  that  the  apse  was  probably  in  the  East  of  the  church. 

Symbolism  of  the  Parts  of  the  Church. 

The  following  is  from  Thomas  of  Marga’s  Book  of  Governors.  Bk.5, 
ch.15,  ed.  Budge  II,  p.541ff.  (trans.),  I,  p.306  fol..  (Syr.  text). 

“Now  there  was  in  the  Monastery  of  the  holy  Abba  Simon  of  Shenna, 
an  old  man  whose  name  was  Mari.  This  man  related  to  me  concerning 
the  holy  man  [sc.  Narsai  bishop  of  Shinna],  that  in  as  much  as  the  blessed 
man  was  endowed  with  the  knowledge  [of  God]  and  his  mind  was  con¬ 
tinually  carried  away  towards  God,  he  was  unable  to  keep  himself  from 
this  holy  contemplation;  and  as  in  [the  case  of]  many  [other]  things  he 
was  prevented  from  going  down  to  the  service  of  the  holy  mysteries  or 
the  first  days  of  the  weeks,  it  was  thought  by  the  believers  that  he  acted 
thus  by  reason  of  the  weight  of  his  old  age. 

And  it  came  to  pass  one  certain  first  day  of  the  week,  when  he  was 
forced  by  the  elect  of  God,  Rabban  Shubhhal-Maran,  the  head  of  our 
monastery,  to  be  with  him  in  the  pulpit  for  the  performing  of  the  service 
of  the  church,  that  Mar  Shubhhal-Maran  saw  that  he  was  occupied  in 
meditating  upon  this  subject  and  in  doing  so  he  saw  that  he  became 
unconscious  of  every  feeling  and  movement,  so  much  that  he  was  ut¬ 
terly  unmindful  of  the  necessary  acts  which  the  service  of  psalmody 
required,  to  sit  down  for  the  keryane  [=  lections],  and  to  lead  off  in  the 
exordia  [Syr.  Shurraye ],  and  he  saw  that  his  eyes  were  closed  and  that 
he  did  not  know  where  he  was. 

[His  superior  asks  for  an  explanation]. 


12cf.  p.  A. 

13See  Dn.  14:34. . 


6 


And  the  holy  man  Narsai  having  required  the  head  of  the  monastery 
to  keep  this  matter  secret  until  his  death,  answered  and  said  him, 
‘Every  time  I  am  in  the  church  during  the  service  of  the  Mysteries 
[=  Mass],  my  mind  is  lifted  up  above  the  sight  of  these  things  which 
are  done  during  the  service,  and  above  the  church  and  its  congrega¬ 
tion,  to  the  things  which  are  in  heaven;  and  these  things  which  are 
before  my  eyes  are  explained  [mystically]  by  the  things  which  are 
secret  and  hidden  from  every  man.  The  church  which  is  depicted 
before  me  [represents]  that  of  Jerusalem  which  is  upon  earth,  the 
platform  [ffripa]  which  is  in  it  represents]  Zion;  the  altar  which  is  m 
it  represents  the  ark  of  the  Old  Covenant;  the  cross  which  is  upon  it, 
and  the  Book  of  the  Gospels  [represent]  the  New  Covenant,  and 
then  the  throne  of  Christ  at  the  time  of  His  dispensation  here,  and 
the  connection  which  both  covenants  possess,  each  with  the  other; 
the  body  of  priests  which  are  in  it  [represents]  the  company  of  the 
apostles;  and  the  path  [ k* A, [leading]  from  the  platform  [pr||ia] 
to  the  cupola  [kotx'H  =  apse]  above  the  platform  [=]  the  narrow  path 
which  goeth  up  to  heaven.  The  three  steps  which  are  before  the 
platform  [symbolize]  the  third  heaven  whither  the  blessed  Paul  was 
taken  up.  The  kestroma  [=KocxocGxpco|Lia]  the  place  [which  extends] 
from  this  [earth]  to  the  firmament;  the  screen  =  piaKTT|; 

“latticed  which  is  over  the  door  of  the  chancel  fK07xt|],  and  the 
veils  [wele]  which  are  upon  it  indicate  to  me  a  type  of  the  firma¬ 
ment.  The  chancel  [symbolizes]  the  place  which  is  above  the  heav¬ 
ens;  the  naosu  [vaoq]  [symbolizes]  the  heaven  of  heavens  and  the 
Divine  shechinah;  and  the  veils  which  are  upon  it  [indicate]  that  the 

i  * 

Godhead  is  hidden  even  from  the  angels.  The  altar  [represents]  the 
throne  of  the  Deity; 

[he  goes  on  to  symbolize  on  the  ministers] 


,4Budge  says  in  note:  “Here  2jz><u  [=  naos]  seems  to  —  Kipcopiov  (see  Du 
Cange,  Glossarium ,  col.  653),  called  also  [=  “Paradise”],  the  coffer 

or  chest  in  which  the  eucharistic  elements  were  placed;  it  was  also  veiled. 
See  Payne  Smith,  Thes.  col.  3240.  The  2j&oi  must  have  been  a  central  part  of 
the  “nave”  (!)  scarcely  “Apse”. 


7 


The  priests  [represent]  the  angels,  the  three  congregations  [lit. 
“churches”  as  in  George  of  Arbel]  which  are  in  heaven  divided  into 
nine  companies.  The  Cherubim,  Seraphim  and  Thronus  [which  form] 
the  first  congregation  represent  to  me  patriarchs,  metropolitans  and 
bishops;  the  second  congregation  [which  consists]  of  Powers,  Lords 
and  Rulers  [represent]  priests,  deacons  and  solitaries  [=  monks]; 
and  the  third  congregation  [which  consists]  of  Principalities,  Arch¬ 
angels  and  Angels  [represents]  subdeacons,  readers  and  believing 
laymen.15  The  lights  which  are  in  the  church  fill  the  place  of  Divine 
splendour  and  the  knowledge  Divine  in  all  things  by  which  all  the 
companies  of  spiritual  beings  sparkle  and  shine.  The  censer  which 
hath  been  transmitted  by  the  priests,  from  hand  to  hand,  in  order, 
from  the  priests  of  the  early  [period]  to  those  of  the  middle  [period], 
and  from  the  priests  of  the  middle  period  to  those  of  these  last  times 
[represents]  the  doctrine  of  the  things  which  are  about  to  come  to 
pass,  and  of  the  things  which  must  needs  be,  and  which  the  Divine 
dispensation  demandeth,  and  which  the  angels  receive  by  teaching 
from  one  another ...  The  gathering  of  us  all  in  the  church  [signifies] 
the  universal  assembling  which  [shall  take  place]  before  the  face  of 
our  Lord  in  the  celestial  heights.  Our  choirs  which  face  each  other, 
and  the  service  which  is  sung  by  two  choirs  represent  those  which 
cry  each  to  each,  and  say  ‘Holy,  holy,  holy  is  the  Lord  the  mighty 
One  ’ ,  etc .  (Budge’s  trans . ) . 

Budge  in  his  ed.  of  Thomas  of  Marga  II,  p.544  (trans.)  quotes  the 
following  from  Assemani  B.O.  Ill,  1,  p.355,  col.2  cap. 8: 


^-Acnn  r^av^o  j\  n.  .to  V 

:  r^Axcua'iAn  ^cum  Vv  V v. 

r^\  Ao -^l\,  — * ctd  n^jL^cn:  r^AvAAvA 

r<_ion_.x^Sr^o  r<ljr>Vvo^x>o  r<loi'-u»o  n 

r^Ajjrt  rrf >  rrlxilxjaa  r<2^a^c\iaa 
r^Am_^nSo  r<l_.o*\xia  vC.  \qa.>.  ^omo  rrf  \V  ^t 


For  a  discussion  of  the  proper  functions  of  the  different  orders  of 

angels  he  refers  to  his  edition  of  Solomon  of  Al-Basra’s  Book  of  the 
Bee ,  pp.9-11. 


This  distribution  is  definitely  rejected  by  George  of  Arbel:  who  makes  the 
3  churches  of  angels  represent  deacons,  subdeacons  and  readers. 


8 


.2)  TRACT  2.  CHAPTER  6 

What  each  one  of  the  orders  in  the  church  represents,  from  the  pa¬ 
narch  unto  the  readers  and  even  the  baptized;  and  why  they  are  thus 
anged  one  after  another.  God-inspired  men  have  said  many  things  con- 
eming  the  orders  which  are  in  the  church.  Some  (say)  that  they  repre- 
ent  the  nine  orders  of  angels,  placing  together  in  the  lowest  church16 
he  readers  and  subdeacons  and  deacons;  (in)  the  middle  church  the 
presbyters  and  periodeutae  and  chorepiscopi;  (in)  the  highest  church  the 
bishops  and  metropolitans  and  catholici.  But  since  they  have  not  found 
n  the  (ecclesiastical)  grades  any  besides  these,  they  have  passed  over 
rhe  patriarchs  in  silence... 

Therefore,  brother,  the  degrees  which  are  in  use  in  the  church,  as 
he  reason  and  holy  Gospel  teach  us,  are  those  orders  which  our  Lord  in 
^is  dispensation  has  exercised;  sc.  when  He  was  baptized  until  when, 
yy  sending  the  Spirit  upon  the  apostles,  He  completed  His  dispensation. 
He  became  a  baptized  when  He  was  baptized  by  John;  and  we  are  bap- 
:ized  and  are  reborn  from  water  and  Spirit  in  His  resemblance.  He  was 
made  a  lector  when  He  took  the  book  in  the  synagogue  and  read:  The 
Spirit  of  the  Lord  is  upon  Me,  etc.  (Lk.4:18).  He  became  a  subdeacon 
when  He  made  a  whip  from  cords  and* *  drove  out  all  those  who  were 
buying  in  the  temple  and  selling.  He  became  a  deacon  when  He  girded  a 
cloth  upon  His  loins  and  cast  water  into  a  basin  and  washed  the  feet  of 
His  disciples.  And  these  three  orders  He  observed  while  He  was  fulfill¬ 
ing  the  Old  (Testament),  and  He  did  not  introduce  the  New  until  the 
supper  of  the  Mysteries  ...  (fol.  66r°)  And  He  did  not  undo  the  Law  and 
the  Prophets;  but  He  was  observing  the  Sabbath  and  offering  sacrifices; 
and  the  legal  passover  He  was  eating.  And  though  He  was  afterwards  to 
give  His  body  and  His  blood,  yet  He  delayed  this... 

But  when  He  had  fulfilled  the  Old  and  begun  the  New,  then  He 
begun  and  typified  the  order  of  the  presbytery.  And  He  fulfilled  the 
presbyter’s  office  when  He  broke  His  body  and  His  blood  for  His  disci¬ 
ples.  He  became  a  periodeutes  when  He  said  to  His  disciples:  “My  peace 

16According  to  George  there  are  3  churches  of  angels,  each  containing  3  or¬ 
ders  or  grades. 

*  I  added  this  paragraph  missing  in  the  original  from  Connolly's  Latin  text. 

9 


I  leave  to  you,  My  peace  I  give  to  you”.  He  became  a  chorepiscopus 
when  he  said  to  His  disciples  in  prayer:  “Father,  sanctify  them”  and  the 
rest.  Now  these  two  orders17  are  given  without  laying  on  of  hands,  by 
the  sole  command  of  the  bishop.  He  became  a  bishop  when  He  rose 
from  the  grave  and  came  to  His  disciples  and  said  to  them:  “All  author¬ 
ity  is  given  to  Me  in  heaven  and  on  earth”,  and  when  He  breathed  on  His 
disciples  and  said:  “Receive  the  Holy  Spirit:  if  ye  shall  remit  sins  to  any 
man  they  shall  be  remitted  to  him”  and  the  rest.  He  became  a  metropoli¬ 
tan  when  He  appeared  by  the  sea  of  Tiberias  and  said  to  Cephas:  “Pas¬ 
ture  Me  My  lambs  and  My  s  leep  and  my  ewes”.18  He  became  a  catholicus 
when  He  lifted  up  His  hands  and  blessed  His  disciples  and  even  parted 
from  them  and  ascended  to  heaven.  He  became  a  patriarch  when  He  sent 
His  Spirit  to  His  apostles  (fol.66v°)  in  the  upper  room. 

And  these  orders,  which  (were  instituted)  after  He  rose  from  the 
grave,  having  received  authority  in  heaven  and  earth,  shew  forth  in  the 
church  a  perfect  dominion;  and  the  hands  of  (those  who  possess)  them19 
are  kissed,  and  they  are  worshipped  [=  bowed  to],  because  they  repre¬ 
sent  Christ  risen  from  the  grave.  And  as  He  was  not  worshipped  until 
He  had  risen  from  the  grave  - 1  mean  by  the  women  and  the  disciples  -  so 
all  those  orders  which  were  fulfilled  [i.e.,  instituted  by  Christ  and  fulfill¬ 
ing  them]  in  the  church  before  His  resurrection,  they  have  not  the  hon¬ 
our  of  dominion  [or  “Lordship”].  And  although  a  presbyter  consecrates 
(the  water  of)  baptism  [or  simply  “the  font”]  and  the  body  and  blood: 
yet  to  bind  and  loose,  and  to  give  the  laying  on  of  hands  [xeipoxovia]  he 
is  not  able:  neither  to  take  up  the  staff  and  to  sit  upon  the  throne;  since  as 
yet  our  Lord  had  said  that  He  had  not  where  to  lay  His  head. 

But  again,  even  though  with  us  in  the  region  of  the  East  the  catholicus 
and  the  patriarch  are  one;  yet  the  holy  apostles  did  not  so  deliver  (to  us); 
but  they  specified  [or,  “ordained”  either  a  simple  bishop,  or  a  metropoli¬ 
tan  bishop,  or  a  bishop-catholicus,  or  a  bishop-patriarch.  And  this  canon 

Sc.  those  of  periodeutes  and  chorepiscopus.  Hence  we  leam  that  these  in 
George  s  day  were  merely  presbyters  with  special  powers  and  functions. 

8Idem  21:15-17  (Syr.  version  Pesh). 

1QLit.:  “their  hands  are  kissed”. 


10 


stained  in  all  part  of  the  East  until  the  time  of  the  King  [=  emperor] 
neodosius  the  Younger.  In  his  days,  when  Cyril  and  John  of  Antioch 
id  the  rest  of  the  Westerns  had  lawlessly  anathematized  saint  Nestorius, 
id  he  had  been  driven  into  exile,  then  the  East  rejected  the  headship  of 
ne  patriarch  of  Antioch  from  her,  as  was  right,  and  set  him  aside,  be- 
luse  he  had  erred,  and  did  not  accept  his  dominion.  Nevertheless  for- 
terly  he  of  Antioch  was  a  patriarch,  he  of  Seleucia  a  catholicus,  and  he 

he  latter]  was  set  under  his  [the  former’s]  authority.  And  also  the  Pa- 

•  » 

iarch  of  Antioch  was  proclaimed20  before  hint 

But  when  the  patriarch  of  Antioch  dared  to  anathematize  Nestorius, 
le  catholicus  in  the  see  (fol.67r°)  of  Seleucia  was  Dadh-Isho  the 
xamaean.21  And  then  the  East  anathematized  John  of  Antioch  and  Cyril 
nd  Celestine  of  Rome  and  Mamon  [=  Memnon]  of  Ephesus,  and  all 
lat  were  with  them  in  that  insolent  and  ungodly  assembly.  And  since 
le  East  was  left  without  a  patriarch,  and  it  is  unseemly  that  the  (our) 
onfession  should  stand  without  a  supreme  head  [rC=n  rd*s],  the  fathers 
etermined  to  add  the  patriarchate22  to  the  catholicus:  since  from  the 
Vestem  and  holy  Synod  he  had  received  this  name  by  the  consensus  of 
lose  who  were  true:  for  they  saw  that  it  was  not  seemly  that  our  confes- 
lon  should  be  without  a  patriarch.  But  that  they  did  not  make  any  other 
le  patriarch,  but  (the  catholicus)  himself,  was  because  they  would  not 
are  of  themselves  to  make  a  head.  But  as  those  who  themselves  alone 
ad  remained  orthodox  and  kept  the  truth  of  the-holy  apostles,  they23 
ppointed  themselves  patriarches. 


But  the  apostles  also  were  appointed  by  Him  [Christjxeaders  when 
le  chose  twelve  and  seventy.  They  were  appointed  subdeacons  when 
1  He  sent  them  two  and  two  before  His  face”.  They  were  appointed  dea- 
:  ons  when  He  took  them  up  to  Mount  Tabor,  and  His  colour  [=  appear- 
i  mce]  was  changed  before  their  eyes.  They  were  appointed  presbyters 

i  vhen  He  taught  them  to  break  His  body  and  His  blood.  He  appointed 

. _ : _ 

1  °I.e.  read  out  in  the  diptychs  -  r^om 
‘Le.  probably  of  Beth-Armaye 
2Lit.  ‘to  add  “patriarch”. 

!  23I.e.  the  catholici  of  Seleucia.  He  means  they  did  not  appoint  a  patriarch 
:  over  the  catholicus,  but  united  the  2  offices  in  one. 


11 


them  bishops  when  He  rose  from  the  grave  and  came  to  them  in  the 
upper  room.  He  appointed  them  metropolitans  when  He  appeared  to 
them  by  the  sea  of  Tiberias.  He  appointed  them  catholici  when  He  blessed 
them  and  ascended  to  heaven.  He  appointed  them  patriarchs  when  He 
sent  them  His  Spirit.  But  although  He  had  breathed  upon  them,  and 
though  again  He  had  said  to  them:  “Pasture  Me  My  lambs  and  My 
sheep”,  and  though  He  had  lifted  up  His  hands  and  blessed  them:  yet  a 
full  blessing  and  perfect  operation  was  not  made  good  to  them  except 
when  the  Spirit  descended  upon  them  in  the  upper  room.  But  (before 
this)  those  orders  were  conferred  upon  them  imperfectly  and 
incompletely. . .  (fol  67 v°) 

But  (as  to)  those  who  liken  all  the  orders  of  the  church  to  the  grades 
of  the  spiritual  beings,  - 1  do  not  understand  how  they  have  devised  this. 
But  we  will  say  to  them:  If  all  the  ranks  in  the  church  are  a  likeness  of 
the  supernal  orders,  who  represents  Christ  in  the  church?  And  how  do 
you  say,  “The  priest  is  as  the  soul  of  Jesus”,24  or  again25  “for26  the  soul 
of  Jesus  he  does  battle  with  the  evil  one”?  And  how  do  you  make  the 
spiritual  orders  worthy  to  consecrate  the  body  and  blood  of  our  Lord, 
since  the  spiritual  ones  have  learned  from  the  church  the  wisdom  of  God 
and  His  power,  as  blessed  Paul  has  said:  “In  the  church  hath  been  re¬ 
vealed  the  wisdom  of  God  to  the  principalitites  and  authorities  that  are 
in  heaven”[Eph.3 : 1 0]?  If  the  prophet  Isaiah,  when  he  saw  the  coal  which 
denotes  a  mystery  of  this  sacrifice,  saw  that  seraph  who  is  of  the  highest 
church  (of  angels),  holding  it  with  a  tongs  as  though  he  were  not  worthy 
to  touch  it.  How  now  does  he  who  represents  the  seraph,  while  he  is 
interior  to  him,  consecrate  and  distribute  not  the  symbolical  but  the  true 
coal,  and  even  causes  orders  which  are  below  him  to  consecrate  and 
distribute  the  coal?  Which  coal  is  the  greater,  that  which  the  prophet 
saw,  or  this  which  is  in  the  church?  I  know  you  will  say,  this  that  is  in 
the  church;  for  that  expressed  only  a  figure  of  this.  But  again  we  will 

240r  “as  Jesus  Himself’.  George  tells  us  later  on  (fol.71,  r°)  that  these  words 

occurred  in  a  certain  anthem  (onitha) 

George  elsewhere  uses  this  in  this  manner.  Thus  he  says  Tract.4 
fol.  130,  r°  “or  even  our  Lord”. 

may  —  for  ,  or  “instead  of’,  i.e.  a  representing. 


12 


j  .ay  to  you,  whether  is  of  more  account,  the  seraph,  or  he  who  represents 
j  he  seraph?  And  again  I  know  you  will  say,  He  who  is  the  true  seraph  is 
pf  more  account  than  he  who  represents  him.  And  so  the  seraph  is  of 
i  nore  account  than  the  man  who  represents  him,  even  as  the  coal  of  our 
|  Mysteries  is  better  than  that  which  the  prophet  saw.  (When)  therefore 
I  .he  true  seraph  did  not  take  that  symbolical  and  figurative  coal  (fol.  68r°) 
n  his  hand  through  fear  of  it,  how  should  the  figurative  seraph  conse¬ 
crate  and  distribute  the  true  coal,  and  command  the  Spirit  so  that  It 
fern.]  come  down?  For  when  Gabriel  announced  to  Mary,  he  did  not 
say  to  her,  “I  have  brought  thee  the  Holy  Spirit”,  but  he  merely  made 
known  to  her  that  “the  Holy  Spirit  shall  come  and  the  power  of  the  Most 
High  shall  light  down  upon  thee”.  But  the  priest  really  commands  the 
Spirit  in  supplication  and  It  [fern.]  comes  down:  and  he  calls  to  It  and  It 
comes  down  unto  him  secretely,  as  the  great  Ephraim  has  said:  He  says: 

The  priest  stands  and  calls 

to  the  Holy  Spirit  secretely: 

And  It  [fern.]  also  does  His  will, 

And  comes  down  unto  him  from  high. 

<tA  r^'uao  yA  )or^n 

cn  \  _.<tj  _^r^a 

noitxcA  o27 

For  when  It  [fern.]  lighted  down  upon  man,  It  did  not  perform  the 
will  of  the  angel;  but  he  was  a  messenger  to  announce  concerning  His 
[mas.]  coming. 

And  if  the  order  be  as  you  say,  -  that  the  readers  are  the  lowest 
church:  but  with  them  the  subdeacons  and  deacons:  how  do  the  deacons 
come  as  far  as  the  throne?  And  how,  -  whereas  the  seraphim  and  cheru¬ 
bim  bear  the  throne  of  the  Lord  and  attend  it,  and  are  not  messengers,  - 

27The  quotation  is  in  4  seven-syllable  verses.  The  fact  that  the  H.  Spirit  is 
feminine,  may  point  to  an  early  date,  but  already  in  George’s  time  (10th  C.) 
so  many  spurious  words  were  current  under  S.  Ephraim’s  name  that  we  can 
place  little  confidence  in  its  genuineness. 


13 


are  the  archangels  and  principalities  become  the  ministers  of  the  throne 
of  the  Lord?  And  how  is  the  bishop  or  priest  to  be  seen  commanding  his 
fellows  in  the  apse,  if  he  also  is  one  of  them?  And  lo,  one  of  the  orders  of 
the  lowest  church,  the  deacons  who  represent  the  principalities,  are  the 
ministers  of  the  altar  which  is  the  throne  of  the  Lord:  what  superior 
place  then,  is  left  for  the  middle  church,  and  what  again  for  the  highest 
church?  Wherever  the  presbyter  or  bishop  enters,  a  deacon  enters  with 
him.  But  it  is  not  so  with  those  supernal  churches:  the  lowest  church 
does  not  invade  the  place  of  the  middle,  the  middle  church  does  not 
invade  the  place  of  the  highest.  But  now  with  you  the  lowest  are  become 
the  highest,  and  sometimes  give  orders.  And  the  seraphim,  who  do  not 
dare  to  look  (fol.68v°)  upon  the  throne  of  God,  are  now  become  eaters 
of  Him  and  consecrators  of  Him  and  distributors  of  Him.  You  ought  to 
have  left  something  in  the  apse  to  which  a  deacon  might  not  come,  or,  if 
(this)  is  impossible,  open  a  house  above  the  altar,  and  forbid  the  lowest 
church  -  which  the  deacons  are  -  to  enter  it.  And  let  not  (even)  the  middle 
church  -  which  the  presbyters  are  -  enter  it:  that  there  may  be  left  a  place 
for  the  highest  church,  which  the  bishops  are;  and  let  them  have  a  little 
honour  ...  [and  so  on]  ... 

But  if  it  appears  to  you  that  the  catholicus  (fol.  69r°)  and  the  patri¬ 
arch  are  one:  yet  they  are  not  so  in  the  ecclesiastical  writings.  The  four 
patriarchs  are  not  catholici  -  that  is,  those  of  Rome  and  Ephesus  and 
Antioch  and  Alexandria  -  but  they  are  called  “bishops”;  but  each  one  of 
them  has  one  catholicus.  It  was  granted  to  the  see  of  Jerusalem  to  have 
[lit.  “to  be”]  a  catholicus;  it  was  granted  to  the  see  of  the  East  -  that  of 
Seleucia  -  to  have  a  catholicus.  But  it  was  not  permitted  to  them  (to 
exercise)  the  patriarchate  in  place  of  a  patriarch.  Lo,  even  a  visitor  rep¬ 
resents  a  bishop;  but  not  in  everything,  nor  at  all  times.  So  also  the 
catholicus  takes  the  place  of  a  patriarch:  but  not  in  every  place.  The 
matter  of  the  catholicus  who  became  a  patriarch  has  been  discussed  by 
us  above. 

So  then,  O  reader  [lit.  “hearer”],  in  our  service  we  represent  the 
dispensation  of  Christ,  and  not  the  dispensation  of  the  spiritual  beings. 
The  spiritual  beings  are  the  ministers  of  God;  and  the  deacons  in  the 
church  are  the  ministers  of  the  priestly  orders.  “Not  all  are  ministers  of 


14 


spirit,”  says  blessed  Paul,  “who  are  sent  by  God  to  those  who  are  about 
to  inherit  life”.  So  then  the  priest  is  mediator,  and  door,  and  the  pardoner 
of  debts:  he  is  not  a  messenger  and  if  so  be  that  the  body  and  blood  of 
Christ  have  been  given  “for  the  pardoning  of  debts”,  and  He  commanded 
His  disciples  to  do  continually  [what  He  did],  he  who  changes  the  bread 
and  wine  into  the  body  and  blood  performs  “a  pardoning  of  debts”,  and 
confers  “forgiveness  of  sins”.  But  the  spiritual  beings  are  messengers 
always:  and  (even)  if  the  seraph  said  to  the  prophet,  “Behold  this  hath 
touched  the  lips  that  it  may  pardon  thine  iniquity  and  forgive  thy  sins”: 
yet  they  were  not  forgiven  by  him,  but  by  other  than  him.  But  our  Lord 
said  to  His  disciples:  “This  is  My  body,  which  for  your  sake  is  broken 
for  the  forgiveness  of  sins”28.  Thou  seest  (fol.69v°)  that  here  the  priest 
gives  a  pardon  of  sins;  for  an  anthem  (onitha)  says  somewhere  “a 
medecine  of  penance  our  Lord  gave  to  skilful  physicians”,  and  the  rest. 
Wherefore  they  heal  of  iniquity  by  a  spiritual  medicine. 

And  know  this,  O  brother,  that  that  dispensation  of  the  church  is  the 
true  one  which  represents  the  dispensation  of  our  Lord;  for  by  it  we 
signify  heaven  and  earth  and  Paradise  and  Jerusalem  and  Nazareth;  and 
all  things  that  were  there  fulfilled  in  the  dispensation  of  Christ.  But  if  it 
be  so  as  thou  sayest,  (that)  the  lowest  church  is  that  of  the  readers  and 
subdeacons  and  deacons;  why  dost  thou  not  collect  these  into  our  church? 
Why  dost  thou  leave  the  readers  on  the  Kaxaoxpcopa;  why  dost  thou 
bring  the  subdeacons  as  far  as  the  lamps,  the  deacons  as  far  as  the 
throne?  And  where  is  there  place  for  the  orders  of  presbyters  and  their 
companions?  All  these,  from  the  deacons  and  upwards,  are  allowed  to 
enter  everywhere.  But  if  it  is  right  that  the  deacons  and  the  presbyters 
should  be  in' one  church:  (yet)  I  know  not  where  the  readers  and 
subdeacons  are  to  stand.  And  behold  the  vesture  of  the  readers  is  unlike 
that  of  the  Subdeacons,  the  vesture  of  the  subdeacons  is  unlike  that  of 
the  deacons.  They  are  different  in  garb  and  in  place.  The  vesture  of  the 
presbyters  and  periodeutae  and  chorepiscopi  is  the  same;  and  the  ves¬ 
ture’ of  those  from  the  bishop  and  upwards  is  the  same.  How  is  it  then 


28  As  in  the  Liturgy  of  Nestorius. 


15 


that  there  is  agreement  in  these  higher  churches  as  to  dress  and  place, 
but  that  the  lowest  church  is  different  in  everything?29 

Return  then  to  the  way  of  truth,  and  ascribe  the  ministry  of  servi¬ 
tude  to  the  spiritual  beings,  and  the  ministry  of  lordship  to  Christ,  God; 
and  let  the  readers  be  in  place  of  the  lowest  church,  and  let  their  place  be 
the  KaxaaTpwpa,  which  is  the  ether.  And  let  the  subdeacons  be  in  place 
of  the  middle  church,  (fol.  70r°)  and  let  them  enter  as  far  as  the  middle  of 
the  apse30.  And  let  the  deacons  be  the  highest  church,  who  are  able  to 
minister  to  the  Lord  close  at  hand  continually.  And  leave  the  other  grades 
to  take  the  place  of  Christ  in  the  church;  that  he  who  fills  His  place  may 
be  able  to  bestow  pardon  upon  us,  even  as  He  was  a  mediator  between 
us  and  God.  And  let  us  give  to  Him  and  to  His  Father  and  to  the  Holy 
Spirit  glory  and  honour  for  ever  and  ever.  Amen. 

Note.  In  chapter  5  of  Tract  2  George  writes  (fol. 63,  r°):  -’’The  dea¬ 
cons  enter  as  far  as  the  divine  throne  [i.e.  the  altar];  the  subdeacons  as 
far  as  the  middle  of  the  apse,  which  is  at  the  place  of  the  lamps,  which 
signifies  the  light  of  the  sun  which  is  in  the  midst  (of  the  heaven);  but  the 
readers  as  far  as  the  door  of  the  apse”. 

From  Fr.  Bridgett’s  History  of  the  Holy  Eucharist  in  Great  Britain 
(Re-edited  by  Fr.  Thurston  s.j.,  1908),  pp. 60-61 : 

The  priest  represented  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  the  “Priest  for  ever 
after  the  order  of  Melchizedech”.  It  is  interesting  to  read  in  the  pon¬ 
tifical  of  Egbert,  Archbishop  of  York  in  the  eighth  century,  how  the 
various  orders  of  the  clergy  were  understood  to  participate  in  our 
Lord’s  priesthood.  I  translate  literally,  omitting  only  a  few  unimpor¬ 
tant  phrases:  “Christ  was  a  Porter  (ostiarius)  when  He  shut  and 
opened  the  ark  of  Noe,  and  opened  the  gates  of  hell.  Wherefore  now 
those  who  are  called  porters  have  charge  of  the  doors  of  the  church 
and  sacristy,  and  ring  the  bell  to  call  all  men  to  church.  Christ  was  a 
reader  (lector)  when  He  opened  the  book  of  Isaias  the  prophet;  He 
was  an  exorcist  when  He  cast  the  seven  devils  out  of  S.  Mary 

29  He  means  that  those  who  constitute  the  lowest  church  -  readers,  subdeacons 
and  deacons  -  differ  in  dress,  etc.,  and  not  that  the  lowest  church  is  different 
from  the  higher  ones. 

30These  lamps  evidently  hung  in  the  apse  midway  between  the  door  and  altar. 

16 


Magdalene;  He  was  a  subdeacon  when  He  blessed  water  at  Cana 
and  changed  it  into  wine.  The  subdeacon  must  read  the  epistle,  clothe 
and  decorate  the  altars,  and  minister  to  the  deacon.  Christ  was  a 
deacon  when  He  broke  the  loaves  to  feed  the  multitudes,  and  washed 
the  feet  of  His  disciples;  for  the  deacon  must  minister  at  the  altar, 
read  the  Gospel  in  the  church,  baptize  and  give  communion  in  the 
absence  of  the  priest,  wash  the  feet  of  pilgrims  (or  strangers),  and 
bury  the  dead.  Christ  was  a  priest  (presbyter)  when  He  took  bread 
and  the  chalice  into  His  sacred  hands... 


(3).  Passages  of  Liturgical  Interest  in  George  of 
Arbel’s  Exposition  of  the  Ecclesiastical  Offices 

1)  Tract  4.  Chap. 21  fol.  139  r° 

[referring  to  Sursum  Corda ]  “Aloft  then,  and  on  high  let  your  minds 
be.  Where  the  whole  abide  is  pure,  and  the  dwellers  thereof  are  glorious 
-  where  the  angels  in  the  awful  place  cease  not  from  flying  and  honouring 
the  nature  of  the  Godhead,  and  with  plaudits  [Syr.  hullalle]  praise  and 
sing  to  His  Majesty,  and  with  pleasant  utterances  [rOc^L t  KlTLlrj 
with  honour  please  the  Lord  -  there,  as  men  who  have  been  shaken  free 
of  death  and  have  become  companions  of  the  spiritual  beings  [let  your 
minds  be]”.  A  few  lines  further  on:  “and  when  you  have  seen  them  [= 
the  mysteries]  on  earth,  consider  that  they  are  in  heaven,  and  let  there 
your  minds  be”. 

This  is  clearly  taken  from  either  the  Liturgy  of  ‘Theodore’  or  that  of 
‘Nestorius’  [‘Theodore’  and  ‘Nestorius’  agree  here],  which  are  alone  in 
having  a  very  long  and  elaborate  Sursum  Corda.  But  as  George  goes  on 
to  refer  to  the  Sursum  Corda  as  in  ‘  Addai  and  Mari’  immediately  after, 
it  appears  that  he  utilizes  ‘Theodore’  -  ‘Nestorius’  only  by  way  of  com¬ 
mentary;  for  he  says  just  after  “And  as  he  said  ‘aloft’,  and  did  not  ex¬ 
plain  [where  ‘aloft’  is],  then  they  [=  people] ...  say  whither  ‘aloft’:  that 
is  ‘unto  thee,  the  God  of  Abraham”,  etc. 

[Further  allusions  to,  or  quotations  from  ‘Theodore’  and  ‘Nestorius’ 
are  given  in  Liturgical  Homilies  ofNarsai  in  an  English  translation  in 


17 


Text  and  Studies,  vol.8,  no.l,  pp.83.  I  give  here  the  Syriac  of  those 
passages  as  there  numbered] : 

(1):  cnincvnra  r^cna 

.rrS  °Avm  ^T<11Apo  V 1  ^acrA^  _sA>X\ 

rc^Vi  v  — >Vv\  r<Ao  r<li_A  r<A  „-i  [^-JAjs*. 

iV'  \n- mr\n  rc^  \  \tAo  r^ir^  r^c7Ar^  nl_.V73 

■rr»r>\ va-i  r^lao-cn.0!  crAj^n  f^itct  h^ctA^*^ 


This  passage  is  found  in  the  present  intercession  of  the  Liturgy  of 
Nestorius  [Urmi  Syr.  textp.48]:  the  only  variants  in  ‘Nestorius’  are 
(1)  r^crAn^]  ‘N  +  r^_iJrA_oj 

rrf  \  \vAo]  ‘N’  r<l  \rno  °Ao 

i.e.  God]  ‘N’  +  of  hosts 
and  unto  favour]  ‘N’  and  unto  redemption. 


c\_Jm 


(2)  tV m\^vQ  iV  'n-mt\  r  _^-D^vrra 

(3j  X2i  C7xg.no  n~i  _co_.na\rca_i  r<fr  .no  °A*7a:\ 

vx^iran.  .  *C73r^  KLa^cto.  Av-.r^lrrarua  c\  era  :  orv^-Si 

cAcv^r^  a -am.  'cnrr^o  _.c7aaru^AAA  j=x7a_.a.  A-Arc^a  vC 


r<^a 


v^iraa  rtlcn'n  -=jc\A\c\.  _.v^ 

_.C7DOX-^7AAA  J=KT2_.a  _.irvir^o 


tirvo. 


a_ion. 


■C^QO 
a  ^A  ^  m  \«?a 


An  earlier  writer  -  Isho’dad  of  Mero  -  also  quotes  ‘Nestorius’  (=  his 
liturgy)  for  this. 


(4)  [“And  as  the  Interpreter  has  said”,  etc.] 

cn_io  \q  _.cnoAv_.r<^  r£  \'\m  ck*  not  <\*n  v^n^o 

_m_.'ioA^rca_i  v^.r<A  Au_.r^_.cvi  \xx^xr<l  ^Ajs  ^^>A\o  rtl^ncrao 

rrlu.  t3T.o  hA  t  ,x>n  \_.n  A\  ■— >  cxcnra  v^_^arua  .rva  rrl^an 

In  Tract  2,  chapter  6  fol.69  r°  George  speaks  of  the  priest  as:  “He 
who  changes  the  bread  and  wine  into  the  body  and  blood”. 

r^iAo  n^n^aA  r^-UTaaAa  rd^ajAA  ^\»t  -t^  ocn 

In  the  Invocation  of  ‘Nestorius’  occur  the  words:  “Than  changing 
(_2lW=*)  and  sanctifying  them”  [sc.  the  bread  and  the  cup,  mentioned 
just  before.] 

2)  Tract  2.  Chap.  6  fol.  68  r° 

“But  the  priest  really  commands  the  Spirit  in  supplication,  and  It 
[fern.]  comes  down:  and  he  calls  to  it,  and  It  comes  down  unto  him 


18 


i  secretly,  as  the  great  Ephraim  has  said:  [The  passage  quoted  from  S. 
j  Ephraim  is  in  4  seven-syllable  verses].  He  says: 

“The  priest  stands  and  calls  to  It, 

Is  the  Holy  Spirit,  secretly: 

And  It  also  does  his  will, 

and  comes  down  unto  him  from  on  high”. 

^  r<ox\'A 

r  .crv\  _*c7>o:\n^.  rOroa-io:  cnX  r^'ino 

cnX  rr^'vno  n^_ion^  }aX  ^arrlo 
X\_K/  .cn*\  rrlxncvnn  r^**a^X 
:  cn  \  >Ty  _.ct>  _arCo. 

cdXxcvX  r<:Xvx»-ia.31 

In  Tract  4,  chapter  20  fol.  136  v°  we  read:  “Because  now  [when  the 
priest  approaches  the  altar  to  make  the  offering]  the  priest,  Christ,  ful¬ 
fils  this  ministry,  the  name  of  presbyter  and  bishop  is  removed.  ‘For  He 
is  priest  and  pontiff,  says  blessed  Ephraim,  ‘and  it  is  He  that  offers  and 
receives,  also  consecrates32”’.  [Similarly  in  a  Hipure  of  Severus  (Brooks 
II,  p.680);  but  not  attributed  to  S.  Ephraim]. 


31  The  fact  that  the  Holy  Spirit  is  feminine  here  [in  the  quotation  and  in 
George  here  (influenced  by  the  quotations  elsewhere  makes  the  H.  Spirit 
masculine)],  may  point  to  an  early  date.  But  already  in  George’s  day  (10th 
C.)  there  were  many  spurious  words  under  the  name  of  Ephraim.  It  would 
appear  not  to  be  in  any  of  Ephraim’s  published  works,  which  would  have 
been  ransacked  for  the  ‘Epiklesis’. 

32  Isho’dad  of  Mero  in  his  comments  on  Mt.26:27  says:  “And  Mar  Ephraim 
also  bears  witness  concerning  this  [that  our  Lord  Himself  ate  of  the  Eucha¬ 
rist  in  the  poem  (memra)  on  the  Epiphany:  he  says: 

From  the  bread  of  life 
That  was  given  to  the  world. 

Not  the  angels  did  eat. 

But  the  Lord  of  the  angels’. 

For  of  that  bread  which  He  ate  with  His  disciples  He  broke  and  gave  to  them, 
Mar  Nestorius  also  in  his  liturgy  (quddasha)  bears  witness  concerning  this”. 
Just  before  this  Isho’dad  says:  “And  it  is  right  that  we  should  know  that  our 
Lord  Himself  is  priest  and  sacrifice  and  eater”. 


19 


Here  “he”  may  refer  to  the  priest,  but  it  more  naturally  refers  to 
Christ.  George  has  him  saying  that  up  to  the  offertory  the  celebrant  was 
spoken  of  as  either  ‘presbyter’  or  ‘bishop’,  but  after  that  he  is  called 
‘priest’,  and  represents  Christ,  the  true  priest. 

In  Tract  4,  ch.2  i  (fol  138v°)  commenting  on  the  “canon”  “The  grace 
of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ”  etc  .  before  the  Sursum  Corda  George  says: 
For  when  Christ  fulfilled  grace,  He  fulfilled  it  by  the  love  of  God  the 
Father.  And  there  is  orn  will  in  the  whole  Trinity;  but  the  descent  [of 
the  Son]  is  by  grace;  the  good  pleasure  [or  ‘consent’]  of  the  Father 
is  by  love;  and  the  communicating  of  completeness  is  through  the 
descent  of  the  Spirit.  And  thus  when  the  Father  willed  our  redemp¬ 
tion,  it  was  not  perfected  until  the  Son  consented  and  came  down; 
when  the  Son  came  down  and  visited  us  by  His  dispensation,  our 
redemption  was  not  perfected  save  by  the  descent  of  the  Holy  Spirit. 
The  first  part  of  this  would  seem  to  apply  to  the  H.  Eucharist,  and 
imply  s  descent  of  the  Son  first,  and  then  a  descent  of  the  H.  Spirit. 

NB.  It  is  curious  that  in  Tract  4  (On  the  Mysteries)  George  says  not 
a  word  about  the  intercession ,  though  in  Tract  2,  ch.3  he  gives  a  quota¬ 
tion  from  the  intercession  of  Nestonus  (see  above:  Liturgical  Homilies 
ofNarsai ,  p.83).  Note  that  in  Addai  and  Mari  the  large  point  (B  286f.) 
has  nothing  of  the  nature  of  an  intercession.  The  cushapa  in  small  print 
on  p.285  (as  also  those  on  pp.273,  282,-284)  is  probably  later  than 
George’s  time;  he  makes  no  comment  on  any  of  these  prayers,  in  fact 
does  not  use  the  term  kushshapha  at  all.33  It  looks  as  though  Addai  and 
Mari  had  no  intercession  distinct  from  the  diptychs.  Narsai’s  interces¬ 
sion  copied  from  ‘Nestorius'  was  a  novelty  in  this  line  it  would  seem  (?) 

On  fol.  144r°  (Tract  4,  ch.24)  he  says:  “But  perhaps  some  will  say: 
If  the  mysteries  have  been  consecrated  by  the  death  of  our  Lord,  and  the 
Spirit  has  come  down  and  consecrated  them,  and  they  have  been  com¬ 
pleted  with  all  true  completeness.  What  is  this  that  he  should  break  and 
sign?  Here  “the  death  of  our  Lord”  is  not  identical  in  George’s  mind 

with  the  descent  ot  the  H.  Spirit..?  in  (see  transl.  of  Tract  4).  That  the 

—  - ,  _  .  . _  _ 

He  calls  the  whole  of  the  preface  -  institution  a  gehanta  -,  and  from  the 
institution  to  the  invocation  also  a  gehanta. 


20 


death  of  our  Lord  is  symbolized  by  the  part  of  the  priest’s  prayer  (after 
institution)  which  precedes  the  descent  of  the  H.  Spirit;  and  that  the 
descent  of  the  H.  Spirit  signifies  our  Lord’s  resurrection.  Hence  he  seems 
to  give  some  part  in  the  consecration  to  the  prayer  preceding  the  invoca¬ 
tion.  This  is  the  more  intelligible  when  we  remember  that  the  invocation 
in  Addai  and  Mari  contains  no  prayer  for  actual  consecration.  He  goes 
on  (foil 44  v°)  to  say:  “And  he  [=  the  priest]  gives  thanks  to  Christ  who 
perfects  [or  “celebrates”].  There  the  word  “perfects”  or  “celebrates”  is 
practically  the  same  as  “consecrates”. 

4.  George  of  Arbel’s  church 

[In  the  Notes  B  =  Brightman’s  Liturgies  Eastern  and  Western ,  vol.  1 

1 .  Apse  or  sanctuary  (pp.2f.).  This  appears  to  have  been  at  the  East  end 
of  the  church,  as  in  Tract  2,  chapter  1  George  tells  us  that  worship  was 
performed  towards  the  East.  It  of  course  contained  an  altar. 

2.  Somewhere  in  the  apse  was  the  diaconicon  [beth  deyaqon:  “deacon’s 
house”].  Whether  or  no  it  was  walled  off  from  the  sanctuary  part  is  not 
indicated.  See  pp.36f. 

3.  Outside  the  apse  was  a  platform  called  the  Kaxaoxpco|ia34  [qestroma]. 
This  was  on  a  level  with  the  apse,  and  had  steps  leading  up  to  it  from  the 
level  of  the  nave.  See  pp.2f.,  35. 

4.  The  apse  had  at  least  two  doors  leading  out  to  the  Kaxaaxpcojia,  a 
great  door  and  a  little  one.  See  pp.40, 42f. 

5.  There  was  a  door  leading  from  the  mxaoxpcopa  into  the  diaconicon. 
See  pp.36f.  It  seems  to  be  implied  (p.42)  that  the  door  of  the  diaconicon 
was  the  same  as  the  little  door  of  the  apse. 

6.  Between  the  (great)  door  of  the  apse  and  the  altar  lamps  were  sus- 

t 

pended  (pp.16,  35);  by  these  lamps  was  the  station  of  the  subdeacons 
(pp.  16, 47);  lamps  were  also  hung  at  the  (great)  door  of  the  apse  (p.35). 

7.  Veils  or  curtains  were  hung  in  front  of  the  apse,  certainly  over  the 

great  door,  and  probably  over  the  little  one  (pp.35). 

-  -  - -  - -  -  -  ■■■■  -  -  -  -  -  -  — 

34  On  the  KOCxaaxtpcDjia  the  readers  took  their  stand  (p.3).  It  is  quite  certain 
that  the  Kaxaoxcpcopa  was  a  platform  just  outside  the  apse,  on  the  level  of 
the  apse,  approached  by  steps  from  the  level  of  the  nave:  but  how  far  it  reached, 
there  is  nothing  to  indicate. 


8.  “In  the  midst  of  the  nave”  stood  the  bema,  which  seems  to  have  been 
a  raised  platform  large  enough  to  accommodate  the  bishop  and  a  con¬ 
siderable  number  of  presbyters  (p.2).  The  whole  of  the  service  (of  the 
Mysteries)  up  to  the  dismissals  of  catechumens  (inclusive)  was  con¬ 
ducted  by  the  bishop,  or  celebrant,  from  this  bema.  After  the  dismissals 
the  bishop  and  attendant  presbyter  went  in  procession  to  the  apse. 

9.  In  the  bema  was  an  altar  (pp.3,  35),  a  throne  for  the  bishop  (pp.3, 
34),  and  two  lecterns  or  “places  of  reader”,  one  on  the  right,  the  other  on 
the  left  (p.3).  These  lecterns  were  probably  raised  somewhat  above  the 
level  of  the  rest  of  the  bema,  see  pp.46,  48,  p.54  note  2,  p.60  note  3. 

10.  On  pp.39  and  43  it  is  implied  that  when  the  bishop  sits  down  in  the 
bema  he  cannot  be  seen  by  the  people.  Hence  the  bema  was  in  all  prob¬ 
ability  surrounded  by  a  low  parapet. 

1 1 .  Between  the  apse  and  the  bema  was  a  straight  gangway  [sheqaqone, 
or  beth  sheqaqone].  In  this  were  three  doors,  one  “before  the  apse”,  one 
“in  the  middle”,  and  one  “before  the  bema”  (pp.3f.).  It  is  reasonable  to 
suppose  that  the  one  “before  the  apse”  was  the  great  door,  and  that  the 
one  “before  the  bema”  was  at  the  bottom  of  the  steps  leading  up  to  the 
bema.  The  one  “in  the  middle”  (or,  “in  the  midst”,  i.e.  somewhere  be¬ 
tween  the  others)  may  well  have  been  at  the  bottom  of  the  steps  leading 
up  to  the  KaxaaTpcopa. 

12.  The  doors  of  the  church,  and  also  the  baptistery  were  somewhere  on 
the  south  side  (pp.2f.).  There  was  a  special  door  for  the  women  (pp.61 ,64). 

13.  The  men  and  women  sat  in  different  parts  of  the  nave.  From  p.4  may 
be  inferred  that  the  men  had  the  eastern  halt,  the  women  the  western  - 
behind  the  men. 


22 


A.  Apse 

B.  Altar 

C.  Lamps 

D.  Great  door  or  Door  before  the 
apse 

d.  Wall 

E.  E\  Diaconicon 

F.  Little  doors  or  Doors  of 
diaconicon 

G.  Qestroma.KaxacjTpcDpa 

H.  Steps 

I.  Door  in  the  middle 

K.  Gangway 

L.  Door  before  the  bema 


M.  Bema 

N.  Steps 

O.  Altar 

P.  Throne 
p.  Lecterns 

R.  Wall  between  men  and  women 
r.  Wall  around  bema 

S.  Passage  between  men  and 
women 

T.  Place  of  men 
V.  Place  of  women 

X.  Door  of  men 

Y.  Door  of  women 
Z  (or  E’).  Baptistery 


Church  of  S.  Gregory,  Etschmiadsin  c.650  AD  (Lethaby,  Medieval  Art , 

«  7 A\ 


UP 


CnTFTT 


Cathedral,  Etschmiadsin  (Lethaby,  Medieval  Art ,  p.75),  probably  same 
date  as  S.  Gregory’s 


23 


The  above  is  a  purely  tentative  sketch,  and  does  not  pretend  to  give 
the  shape  etc.  of  George’s  church.  The  only  parts  the  relative  positions 
of  which  we  may  feel  prbtty  sure  about  of  are  the  apse,  great  door, 
lamps,  apse  altar,  mxaaxpcopa,  gangway,  and  bema.  The  rest  is  merely 
a  suggestion.  For  references  see  preceding  pages.  In  former  page  the 
attached  plans  of  2  old  Armenian  churches,  taken  from  Lethaby’s  Medi¬ 
eval  Art.  That  of  the  Cathedral  of  Etschmiadsin  seems  to  shew  the  bema 
in  the  middle  of  the  nave. 


Symbolism 

George  of  Arbel  had  an  elaborate  symbolism  for  all  matters  ecclesi¬ 
astical  and  liturgical.  As  he  often  refers  to  actual  persons  and  things  in 
terms  of  this  symbolism  without  explaining  himself,  it  will  be  useful  at 
the  start  to  have  a  key  to  it.  The  following  may  help  to  make  him  more 
intelligible. 

1.  Apse  =  heaven. 

2.  Qe stroma. Kaxaaxpcopa  =  Paradise. 

3.  Bema  =  Jerusalem. 

4.  Nave  =  all  the  world. 

5.  Altar  in  apse  =  throne  of  God. 

6.  Altar  in  Bema  =  Golgotha. 

7.  Bishop  (celebrant)  =  sometimes  our  Lord,  sometimes  S.  Peter  (Cephas). 

8.  Presbyters  who  assist  =  disciples  of  our  Lord. 

9.  Deacons  =  “highest  church”  of  angels. 

10.  The  2  deacons  who  make  addresses  to  the  people  =  Gabriel  and 
Michael  respectively. 

1 1 .  Subdeacons  =  “middle  church”  of  angels. 

12.  Readers  =  “lowest  church”  of  angels. 

13.  Holy  Eucharist  is  often  spoken  of  as  “the  mansions”:  i.e.  the  heav¬ 
enly  mansions  which  shall  be  given  to  the  righteous  (“In  My  Father’s 
house  there  are  many  mansions”.) 

14.  The  reception  of  Holy  Communion  is  usually  spoken  of  as  “the 
enjoyment”:  i.e.  heavenly  bliss,  the  happy  lot  of  those  who  are  rewarded 
with  heaven. 


24 


15.  “Nature”  signifies  the  period  of  the  world’s  history  before  Abraham. 

16.  Lay  communicants  are  spoken  of  as  “those  on  whom  mercy  has 
been  done”,  “or  who  have  received  mercy”:  i.e.  those  who  have  not 
really  earned  heaven  by  their  labours  (like  those  who  assist  in  the  ser¬ 
vice),  but  have  received  it  through  God’s  free  grace:  there  is  an  allusion 
to  the  parable  of  the  husbandsmen  (those  of  the  1 1th  hour). 

17.  Sitting  on  the  ground  signifies  death. 

18.  Rising  up  =  resurrection. 

19.  Jordan  =  baptismal  font. 

20.  The  commemorations  of  names  in  diptychs  are  spoken  of  as  “gifts” 
distributed  to  the  person  commemorated. 

Other  items  of  this  symbolism  are  explained  by  George  (or  will  be 
commented  on  in  footnotes)  as  they  occur.  The  above  run  more  or  less 
through  the  whole,  and  must  be  kept  in  mind. 

NB.  The  two  deacons  who  take  part  more  immediately  in  the  ser¬ 
vice,  and  address  the  people,  are  called  “keepers  of  the  order”,  which  I 
have  usually  rendered  “on  duty”. 


25 


TRACT  4.  CHAPTER  V 


Time  for  Celebration  of  Mysteries 

Why  Blessed  Isho’  Yabh* 2  commanded  that  the  Mysteries  should  be 
performed  at  the  third  hour;  and  what  is  (the  meaning  of)  this  name 
Mysteries.  (fol.ll3r° )  By  the  power  of  the  Spirit  and  by  your  prayers, 
brothers,  we  have  come  forth  from  three  contests,  wherein  we  pursued 
our  course  in  the  fear  that  perchance  we  should  not  be  able  to  add  the 
fitting  conclusion  to  our  discourses.  But  now  that  we  have  spoken  of 
those  matters  which  were  explained  with  the  evening,  night  and  morning 
offices,  it  remains  to  explain  this  also  on  account  of  which  those  were 
set  forth.  I  beg  and  beseech  thee,  take  care3  (of  me)  and  increase  the 
power  of  thy  prayers,  that  I  may  be  able  to  pass  along  this  bridge  set 
over  fire:  that  I  may  (at  least)  save  my  life,  even  though  I  profit  nothing 
more;  for  the  Scripture  has  said  "Who  shall  dwell  for  us  with  devouring 
fire?4 5,  and  again,  "The  Lord  our  God  is  a  devouring  fire”.  Only  by  this 
power  do  we  approach  the  expositions  of  the  glorious  Mysteries. 

Meaning  of  Mysteries  (Theological  discussion) 

Thou  hast  asked  concerning  the  time  of  the  Mysteries:  As  some 
hand  down:  -  even  as  Mar  Paul  in  his  epistle  to  the  Corinthians,  and  as 
we  have  heard  from  the  Acts,  thus,  they  say,  in  the  days  of  the  apostles 
and  in  the  time  after  them  they  used  to  perform  the  Mysteries  in  the 
middle  of  the  night  and  receive  the  Sacrament,  and  they  would  spend  the 
night  in  the  church  till  morning.  And  they  adduce  as  a  testimony  from 
the  Acts  the  story  of  Eutychus:  “At  night”,  he  says,  “when  we  were 
assembled  to  break  the  Eucharist,  and  Paul  prolonged  his  discourse,  a 
youth  fell  from  three  stones”'* .  And  again  Paul  rebuking  the  Corinthians: 

'The  translation  was  made  from  a  ms.  (in  monastery  of  Alqosh  Mosul):  a 
number  of  corrections  have  since  been  made  from  ms.  S  (in  library  of  Seert 
Kurdistan). 

2That  is  Isho’  Yabh  III,  Nestorian  Catholicus'A.D.  647-658. 

'I'or  the  meaning  of  the  word  cf.  Je.23:2.  The  word  occurs  in  the  same  sense 
in  Tract  1  fol.7r°. 

4Is.33:14. 

5 Acts  20:9 


26 


“On  the  day”,  he  says,  “when  ye  are  assembled  to  the  church,  one  of  you 
is  hungry  and  one  is  drunken”6 :  for  thus  they  used  to  carry  food  to  the 
church,  and  there  sup;  and  some  of  them  were  rich  and  some  poor. 

And  they  say  that  this  practice  prevailed  for  a  considerable  length 
of  time.  But  when  they  suffered  evil  things  at  the  hands  of  plunderers 
and  robbers,  the  class  of  believers  [=  laity]  requested  that  they  should 
change  this  practice,  (fol.  1 13v°)  And  what  the  apostles  used  (at  first)  to 
do  was  this:  they  used  to  give  the  Sacrament  at  the  time  when  (our  Lord) 
delivered  His  body  and  His  blood,  and  also  at  the  time  when  He  rose 
from  the  grave7 .  But  when  the  faithful  requested  that  they  should  change 
the  time  to  the  day,  on  account  of  the  evils  they  had  to  put  up  with,  they 
decided  that  the  Mysteries  should  be  performed  at  the  time  when  Cephas 
said  MLo,  it  is  yet  the  third  hour"8 ,  -  the  former  practice  passing  away. 
They  left,  however,  as  a  witness  to  the  former  time  (of  celebrating)  those 
two  days  wherein  the  actual  Mysteries  and  the  resurrection  were  ac¬ 
complished:  that  is  Passover9  and  Resurrection  (day).  Wherefore  Isho’ 
Yabh  orders  that  at  the  3rd  hour  of  the  day  they  begin  the  Mysteries. 

Thou  hast  asked  concerning  the  name  "Mysteries".  "Mystery"  [Syr. 
raza ]  is  the  name  (of  something)  that  is  absent:-  like  the  depicting  of  a 
portrait  of  a  king,  which  is  drawn  on  a  board:  or  as  when  a  man  builds 
[i.e.,  probably,  draws  a  plan  of]  a  house  which  resembles  (another)  house; 
and  though  the  one  is  much  less  than  the  other,  yet  their  angles  and 
chambers  (?  and  entrance  and  exit  are  alike.  So  the  Myster¬ 

ies  of  the  church,  -  they  depict  a  mystery  of  what  is  past  and  what  is  to 
be.  What  is  past  we  imitate  by  recounting  (it):  what  is  to  be  we  imitate 
by  faith.  And  thus  we  imitate  both  times  by  the  Mysteries:  typifying 

•  *  i 

heaven  and  Jerusalem  and  Paradise  and  the  world  and  Christ  and  the 


6cf.  1  Co.  11:20-21. 

7This  meant  that  these  times  were  the  same,  viz.  after  dark  on  Saturday. 

8cf.  Acts  2:15 

9So  the  East-Syrians  (at  least)  call  Good  Friday.  The  writer  means  that  the 
Mysteries  were  still  celebrated  in  the  night  of  (=  preceding,  since  with  the 
Syrians  the  liturgical  day  began  in  the  evening)  Good  Friday  and  Easter 
Sunday  (cf.  Tract  I  chapter  10  fol.28v°) 

27 


angels  and  men10 :  and  all  things  that  are  visible  in  creation  we  depict 
by  them,  and  all  things  that  by  the  mind  are  known.  There  is  nothing  in 
creation  that  ought  to  typily  something,  which  is  not  enacted  in  this 
divine  service.  Let  us  then  in  the  power  of  God  set  forth  in  quest  of  the 
glorious  significations  (of  those  things)  that  are  enacted  in  order  at  the 
time  of  the  Mysteries. 


l0See  introductory  remarks  on  George's  symbolism. 


CHAPTER  2 


Marmitha 

(fol.ll4r°)  Why  at  the  beginning  of  the  Mysteries  we  say  a 
Marmitha 1 ,  and  then  after  if  the  Lakhu  Mara 2  [=  "Thee,  O  Lord"],  and 
then  the  Holy3 .  As  I  have  said  above,  all  the  services  represent  (things) 
from  the  beginning  of  creation  and  unto  the  end  (of  the  world).  And 
those  who  are  officiating  take  pains,  so  far  as  the  mind  is  able  to  shew 
forth  a  mystery  of  them  all.  And  though  they  [i.e.  the  representations] 
do  not  fully  and  adequately  correspond  to  the  actual  things,  yet  (at  least) 
in  part:  for  neither  are  any  mysteries  or  representations  able  to  copy  the 
true  image;  but  those  who  trace  the  image  of  a  king  on  a  board  are  not 
able  to  depict  his  image  accurately  as  it  is,  but  they  copy  (it)  is  as  far  as 
they  can.  And  even  though  they  could  copy  all  things,  yet  they  could  not 
(so)  depict  that  he  should  move  and  give  command.  So  this  representa¬ 
tion  of  things  hidden,  which  is  depicted  in  the  Church:  so  far  as  it  is 
possible  to  imitate,  we  imitate  by  it. 

We  commence,  then,  in  the  beginning  with  the  Marmitha ,  showing 
that  we  have  begun  from  the  Law,  (and)  that  at  the  end  the  "commence¬ 
ment"  (, shurraya )4  will  close  with  the  New  Testament.  We  begin  with 
the  seventh  chant  [ qala ],  which  I  have  already  said,  expresses  the  mys- 

‘Cf.  B  254  1.28.  A  marmitha  is  a  certain  division  (1/60)  of  the  Psalter.  See 
Brightman  Lift.  Eastern  and  Western  Vol.I  (hence  forward  referred  to  by  the 
letter  B)  p.253  1.10.  Note  that  George  says  nothing  of  the  Order  of  Prepara¬ 
tion  (B  247-253  1.8).  He  says  positively  (ch.15)  that  Isho’  Yabh  did  not  pre¬ 
scribe  any  order  of  baking  the  eucharistic  bread  or  mingling  the  wine.  Before 
this  Marmitha  in  Brightman  (p.252)  stands  what  B  calls  an  evocp^iq.  This  is 
represented  in  the  Malabar  rite  in  a  somewhat  shorter  form.  It  is  followed  by 
the  prayer  “Strengthen,  O  Lord”  (B.253  1.4-8)  and  than  the  prayer  “The 
adorable”  (given  in  B.  note  a:  for  “memorials  and  ordinary  days”).  This  is 
followed  by  the  Ps.  “Domine  quis  habitabit”,  (Ps.  150  +  Ps.116  “Laudate 
Domine  omnes  gentes”. 

2B  285  1.17. 

3B  285  1.17. 

4This  is  used  here  technically  to  indicate  a  part  of  the  service  before  the 
“Mass  of  the  faithful”.  See  B  256  1.6. 


29 


tery  of  the  coming  of  John5 .  Inasmuch  as  this  service  approaches  nearer 
to  the  revelation  of  the  truth,  from  its  beginning  one  should  [or,  ‘it  should’] 
shew  a  representation  of  him  who  was  our  Saviour's  kinsman:  Whereas 
the  Marmitha  of  the  evening  office  the  first  chant  [ qala ]  was  used  on 
account  of  the  remoteness  of  the  thing  (signified);  but  at  the  night  office, 
all  the  chants  [ qale ]6 . 

Here  then  we  use  the  last  chant,  shewing  that  the  aim  of  all  the 
(other)  offices  is  directed  (foil  14v°)  towards  this  one.  And  what  is  the 
Marmitha?  Some  employ  “Caeli  enarranf  ’  (Ps.19),  some  “Exaltabo  te” 
(Ps.95).  And  these  (employ  them)  on  all  Sundays.  But  on  festivals7  and 
memorials8  some  change  and  some  do  not  change.  Those  who  say  “Caeli 
enarrant”  deliver  (themselves)  thus:  -  It  is  fitting  and  right,  they  say,  that 
that  Marmitha,  as  being  in  itself  appropriate,  should  stand  (here)9 ,  and 
be  said  with  its  own  chant;  since  also  the  Marmitha  itself  in  its  begin¬ 
ning  recounts  the  glories  of  God  and  His  greatness.  Again  the  middle 
psalm  (Ps.20)  shews  that  God  answers  (us)  out  of  tribulation,  and  also 
that  all  we  have  is  from  God.  The  last  psalm  (21 )  fills  up  the  joy  of  the 
elect  and  the  confusion  of  unbelievers.  So  also  the  Marmitha,  according 
to  its  position  in  the  psalter  [lit.  “David”],  symbolizes  Jacob,  the  father 
of  the  tnbes,  with  his  fathers  before  and  his  seed  after  him,  as  far  as 
Moses.  And  forasmuch  as  the  Marmitha  itself  ends  with  a  Qinta 10 ;  and 
the  psalms  also,  according  to  their  order  (in  the  psalter),  are  the  begin- 

5In  Tract  2  he  said  that  the  Ps.  “Cantate”  (The  1st  Ps.  of  the  present  Marmitha 

cf.  B253  1.10)  signifies  the  baptism  of  John. 

bQala  seems  to  be  used  here  as  equivalent  to  Marmitha. 

7I.e.  of  of  our  Lord. 

8I.e.  Saints’  days 

9I  am  not  sure  that  this  is  what  is  meant  by  _.rm  -pS.  _nM 

}ocvalrv  mmv=)  _.rooirv_.r^n 

l0I  have  not  been  able  to  discover  what  in  general  George  means  by  a  Qinta. 
It  usually  =  a  mournful  chant  In  George,  but  he  uses  it  always  in  a  technical 
sense  to  signify  some  sort  of  joyful  singing.  See  below  chap.4,  p.39  where  the 
non-scriptural  verses  interposed  between  verses  of  the  O.T.  in  the  Shurraya 
(B  256  1.7  ff.)  are  called  a  Qinta.  There,  as  here  (at  least  in  B  253  1.15) 
Halleluiah  occurs;  and  it  is  possible  that  the  Qinta  refers  to  this.  See  p.47 
where  Qinta  certainly  means  the  Halleluiahs  sung  in  the  Zummara  (B  258). 


30 


ning  of  the  Law  and  the  promises11 ,  and  because  it  (the  Marmitha)  is 
extremely  appropriate,  let  us  say  it:  Since  it  has  three  witnesses- 1  mean 
the  Qinta ,  (its  being)  the  beginning  of  the  Law,  and  its  appropriateness. 

Those  who  say  “Exaltabo  te”  (Ps.145)  answer  thus:  -  Since  this 
Marmitha  typifies  the  end  of  the  times,  and  also  the  victory  of  Elijah 

and  the  confusion  of  the  son  of  perdition  [=  Antichrist],  and  is  very  near 

*  *  • 

to  the  Marmitha  of  the  psalms  which  typify  the  resurrection,  let  us  make 
it  the  beginning  of  this  great  service.  Furthermore,  because  its  phrases 
magnify  God  exceedingly:  (such  as)  that  He  answers  those  who  call 
upon  Him  in  truth  (P§.  145:1 8);  and  other  appropriate  things,  -  such  as, 
that  He  heals  and  binds  up  (cf.  Ps.  147:3),  and  raises  up  the  poor,  and 
(foil  15r°)  humbles  the  ungodly  (cf.  Ps.  147:6),  and  that  He  gives  rain 
(Ps.  147:8),  and  makes  (the  grass)  to  grow,  and  gives  food  and  drink 
(ibid,  v.9):  some  of  which  typify  the  glorious  Mysteries,  -  with  others  as 
well. 

Now  the  idea  of  each  part  is  exceedingly  good  and  accurate.  Those 
who  change  [the  Marmitha]  for  festivals  and  memorials  say  thus  :  -  It  is 
right  that  on  festivals  of  the  dispensation  of  our  Lord  we  should  say 
“Cantate  Domino”  (Ps.96),  which  is  a  figure  of  the  manifestation  of  our 
Lord  and  of  His  dispensation  in  Jerusalem.  Whereas  we  celebrate  a 
festival  of  his  dispensation,  let  the  Marmitha  that  typifies  His  dispensa¬ 
tion  be  said.  On  memorial  days,  since  we  honour  the  saints,  let  that 
Marmitha  be  said  which  signifies  the  election  of  Aaron  and  his  sons  and 
the  Levites  and  the  constitution  of  the  tabernacle  of  testimony  [i.e.  (?) 
Pss.33  (Vulg.32)  ff.]42 .  As  those  were  chosen  to  the  priesthood,  so  the 
saints  dedicated  themselves  to  the  Lord,  and  some  of  them  were  chosen 
to  the  priesthood,  some  of  them  apostleship  and  martyrdom,  and  some 
of  them  to  prophecy.  Now  the  opinions  of  all  these  are  very  appropriate 
and  good. 


llcf.  his  application  of  the  psalms  in  Tract  2  ch.3  (fol.56  r°)  as  these  pss.  are 
applied  to  the  times  of  the  Israelites  just  before  Moses,  so  they  ought  to  be 
said  here,  just  before  the  reading  of  the  O.T.:  that  seems  to  be  the  argument. 
12See  Tract  2  ch.3,  (fol.  56v°). 


» 


31 


CHAPTER  3 


Variation  of  Marmitha 

What  is  the  meaning  of  the  variation 1  (or  change)  in  the  apse  [A 
omitts].  "I  will  confess  to  Thee  in  the  great  church”  (Ps.35: 1 8).  The 
variation  signifies  the  coming  of  John:  so  also  the  evening  office  has  a 
variation  of  two  verses.  But  now  the  bishop  comes  forth;  and  at  the 
time  of  his  entering  into  the  apse2  they  change  (to)  "I  will  confess  to 
Thee",  even  though  the  Marmitha  be  not  ended;  since  the  whole 
Marmitha  signifies  the  voice  of  John3 ,  but  now  these  verses  typify  the 
concourse  overagainst  our  Lord  [i.e.  at  the  baptism].  And  whereas  they 
introduce  the  "variation"  [lit.  ‘they  change’]  first  in  the  apse4  (that 
means)  that  John  first  of  all  saw  the  angels  conducting  our  Lord5 6  with 
honour,  and  the  heavens  opened,  and  the  Spirit  (foil  15v°)  coming 
down.  And  when  he  saw  these  things  he  also  stirred  himself  up  to  say, 
"Behold  the  Lamb  of  God". 


•The  verses  (18ff)  of  Ps.35  (cf.  B  253  1.14)  are  evidently  regarded  as  not 
belonging  to  the  Marmitha  proper. 

2So  text:  but  if  “apse”  be  right  it  is  not  clear  where  the  bishop  “comes  forth” 
from.  What  follows  is  evidently  a  description  of  a  procession  from  the  apse  to 
the  bema:  and  so  it  is  possible  we  should  read  “bema”  here.  Still  the  Ms  S 
says  the  “variation”  is  begun  in  the  apse;  and  the  anthem  that  follows  is  “of 
the  apse”  Probably  the  bishop’s  first  entrance  to  apse  is  meant:  then  follows 
his  procession  to  the  bema. 

3This  implies  that  the  Marmitha  began  with  Ps.96  “Cantate”  (as  in  B  253, 
1.10),  cf.  above  (ch.2). 

4The  “canon”,  when  used  absolutely,  usually  means  the  “Sanctus”  with  George. 
B  253  has  nothing  corresponding  to  this.  S  has  “in  the  apse”,  which  is  prob¬ 
ably  right. 

5George  elsewhere  explains  the  “Sanctus”  as  the  song  of  angels  who  ap¬ 
peared  singing  it  during  a  certain  earthquake  at  Constantinople.  The  allu¬ 
sion  to  angels  in  connection  with  our  Lord’s  baptism  derives  from  the  apoc¬ 
ryphal  story,  found  in  Tatian’s  Diatessaron ,  of  a  fire  on  the  Jordan,  and  the 
appearance  of  angels  at  the  time  of  the  baptism  (cf.  infra  p.41). 

6I.e.  the  “Anthem  of  the  Sanctuary”.  B  253  1.27. 


32 


Anthem  of  the  Throne 

Again  the  Anthem  ( Onitha )  which  is  said  -  which  is  styled  “Of 
the  throne”,  or  “Of  the  apse”6 ,  -  is  as  it  were  a  recognition  (of  the 

fact)  that  God  the  Word  came  down  from  heaven  [=  apse]  and  was 

# 

united  to  flesh,  and  came  to  Jerusalem  [=  bema]  that  He  might  ac¬ 
complish  His  dispensation.  And  so  the  subdeacons  and  deacons,  with 
the  archdeacon  and  the  bishop,  shew  a  witness  of  these  things.  What 
then?7 

The  subdeacons  carry  lanterns  [ naphtere ,  which  is  said  to  be  the 
same  as  the  Greek  Axxpirrr|p],  and  stand  at  the  door  of  the  altar  with¬ 
out  the  veils8  -  that  is,  shewing  that  their  position  is  at  a  distance  from 
the  throne  -  but  the  deacons  carry,  some  of  them  candles  [KTjpcoxoq], 
some  of  them  thuribles.  But  those  on  duty9  -  the  two  deacons  who  take 
the  place  of  Gabriel  and  Michael  -  go  forth  empty  (-handed),  that  they 
may  fulfil  their  office:  Gabriel,  as  holding  the  office  of  the  New  (Tes¬ 
tament),  and  Michael  as  a  helper,  and  as  handing  over  (to  him)  the 
rule10 .  And  these  come  first;  and  after  them  the  subdeacons,  who  be¬ 
long  to  the  middle  church  (of  the  angels)11 ,  and  then  the  highest  church, 
who  have  the  management  of  the  throne:  and  their  head  is  the  archdea¬ 
con.  As  knowing  first  what  things  are  dispensed*  by  the  Creator,  he  is 
near  to  the  bishop,  keeping  on  [or  ‘holding’]  his  left  hand:  that  is,  inas 
much  as  the  right  hand  performs  actions,  and  then  they  are  made  known 
to  the  left  hand.  So  our  Lord  also  said:  "When  thou  doest  an  alms,  let 
not  thy  left  hand  know  what  thy  right  hand  doeth"12 .  And  so  the  arch- 


7Here  probably  began  the  procession  to  the  bema. 

8This  appears  to  be  a  quotation  from  a  rubric. 

9Lit.  “the  keepers  of  the  order”:  i.e.  the  2  officiating  deacons. 

_  i 

l0Michael,  as  the  deacon  of  the  Q:T.,  is  said  earlier  to  hand  over  the  people  to 
Gabriel. 

1  'This  symbolism  is  worked  out  in  Tract  2  ch.2.  There  are  according  to  George 
3  churches  of  angels,  each  divided  into  3  orders  (9  orders  in  all).  These  3 
churches  are  represented,  (1)  by  the  deacons,  (2)  by  the  subdeacons,  (3)  by 
the  lower  clergy  (readers  etc.). 

12Mt.6:3. 


33 


deacon  keeps  on  [or  ‘holds’]  the  left  hand  of  the  bishop;  since  the 
things  that  the  bishop  requires  and  commands  to  be  done,  he  com¬ 
mands  as  the  right  hand;  and  then  he  stirs  up  the  left  hand  to  shew 
(these  things)  to  those  that  are  near  him.  So  the  archdeacon,  who  keeps 
on  [or,  ‘holds’]  his  left  hand,  when  he  (foil  16r°)  learns  a  secret,  then 
he  beckons  to  his  companions,  that  they  may  carry  out  the  things  that 
this  second  God  (sic)  desires  and  wishes  to  be  done. 

And  so  he  beckons  and  they  roll  (back)  the  veils.  And  the 
subdeacons  hold  themselves  in  readiness,  and  he  shews  them  (saying): 
"The  Lord  hath  been  well-pleased  with  His  people,  and  has  made  ready 
to  come  down  for  the  redemption  of  His  creation.  In  procession  go  forth 
before  him”13 .  And  thus  they  go  forth  rank  after  rank.  And  first  those 
on  duty,  Gabriel  and  Michael,  and  after  them  the  subdeacons,  and  af¬ 
ter  them  the  deacons;  then  he  who  holds  the  standards  of  the  victori¬ 
ous  King,  even  the  cross,  and  the  list  of  His  commandments  [which] 
He  is  about  to  deliver  in  the  adorable  Gospel;  and  finally  the  bishop, 
who  is  Christ,  comes  forth.  And  whither?  To  the  place  which  was  first 
employed  for  the  worship  of  God,  and  in  which  were  set  forth  carnal 
commandments,  that  as  those  [=  Jews]  were  trained  by  carnal  laws, 
they  may  now  receive  a  spiritual  law,  and  to  those  to  whom  the  proph¬ 
ets  prophesied  concerning  the  revelation  of  the  Lord,  His  revelation  may 
be  shewn;  and  in  the  peace  of  typical  oblations  He  may  give  the  true 
oblation.  And  so  he  descends  from  heaven14  by  the  way  trodden  by 
the  prophets  -  the  ladder  which  Jacob  saw  -  and  he  comes  to  Jerusa¬ 
lem  [=  bema].  So  the  ministers  go  forth  from  the  apse,  and  come  to 
the  bema,  Jerusalem.  The  subdeacons  stand  in  the  gangway 
[. sheqaqone ],  here  also  observing  their  order,  and  they  do  not  go  up  to 

this  throne  which  is  in  Jerusalem15 .  What  then? _ 

1  ’This  may  be  merely  an  ideal  speech,  -  there  is  nothing  to  the  same  effect  in 

B. 

l4The  text  has  wrong  by  shammashe ,  “deacons”,  instead  of  shemaya ,  “heaven” 
(i.e.  the  apse,  according  to  George’s  symbolism).  George  never  uses  the  word 
shammashe  for  “deacons”,  always  employing  meshamshane. 

15The  service  from  this  point  is  conducted  from  the  bema.  The  bishop  does 
not  return  to  the  sanctuary  (apse)  till  the  dismissals  of  catechumens  have 
been  read  out. 


34 


Time  for  Opening  Veils 

Some  open  the  veil  before  the  bishop,  and  some  do  not  open  (it) 
until  the  Lakhu  Mara  (“Te  Domine”).  Those  who  open  say  thus:  -  In 
the  hour  when  God  the  Word  has  come  down  to  save  us,  then  let  the 
doors  of  heaven  be  opened.  Those  who  do  not  open  say  thus:  -  Even 
though  God  came  to  save  us,  yet  mortals  did  not  perceive  Him.  And 
the  doors  of  heaven  were  opened  that  we  might  believe:  not  that  he  had 
need  (foil  16v°)  of  the  opening  of  heaven,  neither  the  angels.  But  we 
did  not  recognize  Him  as  God  save  at  the  baptism  and  His  baptism 
was  at  Jerusalem,  and  at  His  baptism  the  heavens  were  opened,  For 
what?  “When  Jesus  was  baptized,  straightway  He  went  up  from  the 
water,  and  the  heavens  were  opened”,  and  all  marks  of  honour  were 
shewn  (to  Him).  And  so  now,  -  until  the  Lakhu  Mara16 ,  which  signi¬ 
fies  the  epiphany  of  our  Lord,  let  not  the  apse  be  opened.  Though  both 
these  views  are  excellent,  yet  that  of  those  who  do  not  open  is  the  more 
significant  of  a  mystery. 

So  those  also  who  hold  the  lamps  and  candles,  when  the  bishop 
ascends  the  bema,  return  to  the  Kaxaoxpoopa  and  stand  (there):  shewing 
by  this  that  they  must  not  leave  the  service  of  the  natures  which  they 
hold17 .  They  accompanied  the  Lord  till  He  came  down,  and  again  they 
have  returned  to  their  service.  And  others  add  lamps  also  over  the  door 
of  the  apse;  for  whereas  their  Lord  comes  to  visit  His  creation,  they 
have  increased  the  honour  of  their  service.  And  though  all  these  things 
be  not  done  in  every  place,  yet  this  blessed  man  [Isho’Yabh]  is  diligent 
to  set  down,  as  I  said  above,  those  things  which  signify  a  mystery. 

After  Procession  to  the  Bema 

The  two  deacons  on  duty  also  he  commands  to  remain  in  the  bema 
by  the  altar.  And  he  says,  “they  remain  to  honour  the  altar  and  the 
bishop”18,  that  thus  by  the  book  of  the  Gospel  and  the  sign  standard 
of  the  cross  they  may  honour  the  Hidden  One  who  is  among  them,  the 
16See  p.36. 

17I.e.  the  oil  and  wax:  these  deacons  and  subdeacons  represent  angels;  and 
according  to  the  East  Syrians  the  angels  had  charge  of  the  whole  world  and 
all  the  various  things  therein. 

l8It  is  impossible  to  say  where  the  quotation  should  end. 

35 


bishop:  even  as,  revealed  in  a  man,  the  Hidden  One  fulfilled  the  dis¬ 
pensation;  so  that  after  the  union  of  the  body  and  God  the  Word  wor¬ 
ship  and  honour  and  lordship  was  proclaimed  to  both  equally  -  to  God 
become  man,  and  to  man  Decome  God  [crArO^rJ.  And  the  archdea¬ 
con  or  the  deacon  announces  the  “Peace”  -  both  of  them  being  on  duty 
-  whether  on  account  of  the  Lord’s  (foL117r°)  being  brought  down  to 
them  of  earth,  or  on  account  of  the  exaltation  of  our  nature. 

Lakhu  Mara 

-  Xs. 

Why  he  says  “Peace  bt  with  us”,  and  not  “Let  us  pray”19 ,  has  been 
explained  by  us  in  the  exposition  of  the  evening  office.  And  they  begin 
the  Lakhu  Mara 20  [Te  Domine].  Those  who  carry  censers  act  accord¬ 
ing  to  the  ceremony  of  the  evening  office21 . 

Trisagion 

Those  who  are  on  the  mxaaxpcojia  return  and  enter  the  door  of 
the  deacons’  apartment  \beth  deyaqon ],  since  the  mystery  which  they 
were  signifying  has  been  completed.  And  they  of  the  censers  also  de¬ 
scend.  But  those  on  duty  remain,  and  they  ascend  [the  bema  and  say 
(?)]22  the  Canon  “Holy”72, ,  which  is  the  completion  of  (this  part  of  the 
service)  of  the  Mysteries24 .  Thus  far  they  typified  only  the  service  of 
the  dispensation;  but  now  the  dispensation  is  completed.  They  began 
with  nature,  and  (now)  they  introduce  the  Scriptures25 ,  and  what  fol¬ 
lows. 


19In  B  255  1.6  we  find  “Let  as  pray.  Peace  be  with  us”;  but  this  is  after  the 
Lakhu  Mara.  No  “Peace”  is  indicated  before  it. 

20B  254  1.28.  5 

21Cf.  Tract  2  Chap  11:  first  those  who  hold  the  thurible  are  blessed  by  the 
bishop;  then  they  cense  the  altar  [in  the  bema?]  and  the  apse;  then  the  bishop 
(3  times);  then  the  presbyters  (once  each);  then  the  people  all  together.  See 
p. 52  below.  *; 

"Some  words  appear  to  have  been  omitted  here  by  a  scribe.  (Both  MSS  have 
same  reading). 

^3Cf.  B  255  1.17.  The  reading  of  Scripture  begins  immediately  after. 

~4Or,  “which  is  the  fulfilling  of  the  Mysteries”:  i.e.  the  point  at  which  the 
service  proper  beings.  The  context  seems  to  favour  this  interpretation. 

25Cf.  B  255  1.30;  256  1.1. 


36 


CHAPTER  4 


Lessons.  The  Law 

Why  they  read  the  Law  and  the  Prophets,  and  then  stand  and  say 
the  Shurraya}  As  I  said  at  the  beginning,  nature  was  first  created,  and 
then  the  Law  was  given  to  it;  and  men  spent  a  long  time  without  Law 
and  Scripture.  Thus  they  signify  now  also  by  the  lections:  they  first 
read  the  Thorah  £=  Law]  wherein  is  contained  (the  account  of)  the  crea- 

?  i 

tion  of  nature  and  the  constitution  of  the  world,  after  it  the  book  of  the 

« 

prophets,  which  teaches  the  Law  and  carnal  commandments.  Now  this 
blessed  man  [Isho’  Yabh]  says:  “The  reader  comes  forth  from  the  door 
of  the  diaconicon* 2  and  worships  to  the  altar,  and  comes  to  the  bema 
and  is  blessed  by  the  bishop.  And  the  deacon  on  duty  says  ‘Sit  ye?  and 
be  silent’.”3 

That  the  reader  comes  forth  from  the  diaconicon:  (that  means)  from 
the  archives  of  testimony4  he  comes,  that  (he  comes)  not  from  the  apse, 
is  because  the  peace  of  the  lower  church  (of  angels)  is  removed  from 
heaven.  Although  they  [i.e.,  the  readers,  =  lowest  church  of  angels]  are 
high  above  us,  yet  they  are  lower  than  the  church  above  them,  since 
they  perform  their  service  with  the  voice.  And  to  shew  (foil  17v°)  truly 
that  they  are  not  subtle,  like  the  higher  (angels),  they  wear  their  stole 
[orarium]  upon  their  hands,  which  is  the  King’s  sign  and  mark5.  He 

comes  forth  from  the  diaconicon,  because  the  way  has  not  yet  been 

*  -  % 

trodden  that  they  should  come  forth  from  heaven.  He  comes  to  the  bema, 
-  (that  is)  the  place  of  commandments,  even  Jerusalem.  He  worships 
to  the  bishop,  as  having  received  authority  from  God  to  speak  coricem- 


>B  256  1.6. 

2cf.  preparation  for  *  Apostle’  which  seems  to  shew  that  the  door  of  the 
diaconicon  was  the  same  as  the  little  door  of  the  apse. 

3This  is  not  found  in  B  255  or  256. 

t 

4S  omits  “and”.  Note  of  the  editor:  Connolly  also  omits  it  here. 

5Later  (p.42)  it  is  said  that  the  stole  on  the  shoulder  is  the  "standard  of  the 
king". 


37 


ing  the  tilings  of  nature.  But  he  who  is  now  on  duty  (is  he  that)  repre¬ 
sents  Michael6 ;  and  he  commands:  “Sit  ye,  and  be  silent"' . 

The  people  sit,  and  the  priests  (also),  for  as  yet  the  world  is  con¬ 
cerned  with  earthly  things,  and  of  dust  it  was  composed,  and  unto  dust 
it  returns.  And  thus  all  men  are  equal:  no  son  of  Abraham  is  recog¬ 
nized,  nor  any  son  of  Canaan.  And  while  he  [=  the  reader]  is  enacting 
this  period  of  nature,  it  is  as  when  the  angel  appeared  to  Noah  and 
gave  him  command  concerning  the  ark.  And  a  revelation  was  given  to 
Abraham  and  Isaac,  and  to  Hagar  and  Jacob:  Though  laws  and  com¬ 
mandments  were  not  given  to  them,  but  only  (this),  that  they  should 
know  Him  [God].  So  also  this  reader  comes  to  speak;  and  all  men, 
whether  they  be  in  Jerusalem  [=  bema]  or  the  world  [=  nave],  sit  after 
one  fashion,  and  typify  death. 


Prophets 

But  again:  when  the  first  (reader)  has  begun  to  read,  then  another 
reader  after  him,  in  this  (same)  garb  (axpua),  bearing  the  book  of  the 
laws  and  commandments,  ascends  according  to  the  manner  of  the 
former,  and  stands  at  his  side,  looking  for  the  completion  of  the  words 
of  nature.  And  then  he  delivers  his  testament,  even  fleshly  command¬ 
ments.  And  he  on  duty  also  commands,  “Be  ye  silent"8 :  shewing  (on 
this  wise):  Although  you  behold  a  change  of  events,  yet  this  (reader)  is 
of  the  same  sort  [lit.  “is  near  to"]  as  the  former,  and  is  not  much  supe¬ 
rior.  Whereas  he  [the  other]  will  command  that  [the  law  of  nature?] 
should  be  kept,  (this  one)  does  not  add  anything  to  the  duties  of  na¬ 
ture.  He  corrects  [or *  *  regulates']  nature  by  the  Law,  by  adding  sacri- 
tices  and  shadows  that  are  to  pass  away.  ( fol.llSr °) 

And  when  he  who  represents  the  1  aw  concludes,  what  then?  He 
[the  deacon]  commands  something  else:  “Stand  ye  for  prayer"'3.  These 
things  then  (belong  to)  the  laws  of  the  flesh,  until  another  revelation  is 


'Michael  is  not  the  reader  of  O.T.,  though  later  Gabriel  apparently  reads  the 
Apostle. 

Tsot  tound  in  B  255-6  (Here  it  only  resumes  what  was  said  in  this  page  -  this 
is  not  a  second  remark  of  the  deacon. 

*Not  in  B  255-6. 

°Not  in  B  256. 


38 


shewn.  But  after  the  people  have  received  the  Law  by  which  they  were 
trained  by  the  hand  of  the  prophets,  and  have  received  the  promise  of 
that  light  which  is  to  dawn:  what  then?  [They  go]  to  Babylon;  and  there 
in  Babylon  they  receive  a  promise,  like  the  promise  to  Abraham.  In 
the  former  (promise,  God)  made  Abraham  go  up  (out  of  Egypt)  by  a 
promise  and  a  fixed  number  of  years:  So  too,  there  arose  in  Babylon 
also  a  man  who  was  charged  with  a  new  (promise);  and  to  him  was 
given  a  promise  concerning  the  dawning  of  the  Light,  and  he  shews 
them  that  they  are  to  abide  with  the  promise,  until  it  [the  Light]  be 
revealed,  the  same  space  that  they  remained  after  the  promise  to 
Abraham,  until  they  received  the  Law  and  inherited  the  land  of  prom¬ 
ise.  Thus  said  Daniel:  “I  saw  the  man  of  fire,  Gabriel,  fly  and  swoop 
and  come  from  heaven.  And  he  taught  me  how  long  the  old  oblation 
must  abide”10.  And  according  to  the  word  spoken  to  Daniel,  “stand 
up”,  -  (the  like)  does  he  on  duty  employ,  in  that  he  says,  “Stand  ye  for 
prayer”.  What  then?  Stand  up  (and)  receive  those  things  which  you 
are  to  hear11  at  the  end,  which  are  for  your  help  and  your  redemption 

Shurraya 

And  when  they  stand  up,  they  say  verses  from  the  Old  (Testament), 
with  a  Qinta12  of  the  New13 :  shewing  by  this  that  it  was  with  a  prom¬ 
ise  of  the  New  that  the  children  of  Israel  were  performing  (their)  sac¬ 
rifices  after  their  going  up  from  Babylon  until  the  appearance  of  our 
Lord.  And  thus  they  employ  a  few  verses  from  the  middle  of  a  psalm, 
or  from  the  end,  which  are  appropriate  to  the  lesson  that  has  been  read, 
inasmuch  as  they  do  not  depart  from  the  character  of  the  oblations  of 
the  Law.  But  they  change  (fol.ll8v°)  (the  psalms)  forasmuch  as  a  limit 
(arjKcopa)  has  been  appointed  them,  until  the  oblation  pass  away.  But 
now  the  bishop  does  not  stand  up.  Whereas  he  fills  the  place  of  our 
Lord,  let  not  the  promise  which  was  given  concerning  him  be  seen14 
[i.e.  appear,  be  realized]  get.  And  as  soon  as  the  Shurraya  is  concluded 
another  mystery  is  enacted. 

,0Cf.Dn.9:21ff. 

”A:  “perform”  (better). 

12cf.  supra  (p.30). 

,3Cf.  B  256  11.7  ff. 

I4cf.  supra,  p.43,  note  15. 


39 


CHAPTER  5 


Preparation  for  Apostle 

Why  the  deacon  takes  the  Apostle  and  goes  forth  from  the  apse, 
and  (why)  some  bring  it  out  by  the  great  door,  and  some  by  the  little 
one;  and  why  the  deacons  go  forth  before  him  as  far  as  the  bema.  Now 
Gabriel  has  come  from  heaven  [=  apse]  to  announce  the  conception  of 
John:  for  the  Shurraya  typifies  the  promise  of  the  same  Gabriel  to 
Daniel  and  now  he  comes  forth  from  the  apse  to  perform  what  he  prom¬ 
ised  to  Daniel.  And  the  deacons  come  before  him:  which  shews  that 
this  coming  is  more  excellent  than  that  of  Michael1 ,  who  delivered  the 
Old  Testament.  And  he  comes  and  stands,  -  where?  On  the  right  hand 
of  the  altar  of  incense,  where  he  appeared  to  Zacharias.  He  stands  there 
on  the  right  hand  of  the  bema.  And  (he  does  this)  that  he  may  shew 
him  [sc.  Zacharias]  by  his  very  coming  that,  “I  am  Gabriel  who 
aforetime  appeared  to  Daniel  and  announced  to  him  concerning  this 
hope’T 

But  now  Michael  announces  the  “Peace”2 ,  or  leaves  the  place  where 
he  is  standing,  and  of  his  own  accord  hands  over  his  own  to  this  new 
one  that  is  come.  And  he  [sc.  Michael]  commands  as  usual  “Be  silent”3 . 
And  at  his  word  the  people  are  silent;  and  the  deacon  cries  out4 .  Gabriel 
speaks,  and  Zacharias  holds  his  peace.  He  who  has  no  tongue  [sc. 
Gabriel,  representing  an  angel]  speaks,  and  he  who  possesses  a  tongue 

'This  can  hardly  be  the  same  Michael  as  the  one  mentioned  just  below,  i.e. 
the  one  “on  duty”,  for  in  chap. 4,  cf.  above,  p.37)  it  was  said  that  the  first 
reader  of  the  O.T.  belonged  to  the  lower  church  of  angels,  i.e.  he  was  not  a 
deacon  (=  highest  church). 

2Cf.  later  where  it  is  said  that  he  also  says  “Be  ye  silent”.  He  evidently  said 
together  “Be  ye  silent:  peace  be  with  us”  cf.  B  257  1.11  where  however  the 
formula  is  “Let  us  pray.  Peace  be  with  us”. 

3Cf.  former  footnote. 

4This  appears  to  be  the  other  deacon  -  he  who  reads  the  apostle:  cf.  below, 
where  it  is  said  that  the  first  words  are  said  very  loud.  The  names  Michael 
and  Gabriel  are  evidently  not  confined  to  the  2  deacons  “of  the  order”  or  “on 
duty”:  cf.  p.43,  where  the  archdeacon  is  called  Gabriel  at  one  point. 


40 


and  speech  [sc.  Zachanas,  represented  by  the  presbyters  in  the  bema: 
cf.  infra]  holds  his  peace.  And  how  this  came  about  I  will  tell  thee:  - 
Because  by  the  hands  of  his  [sc.  Zachanas’]  son  the  Old  Testament 
was  (foil  19r°)  to  be  changed  and  put  to  silence,  before  (this  event) 
the  priest  was  silenced,  “from  whose  mouth  (men)  seek  the  law’’5 .  And 
the  angel  Michael  also,  when  he  delivered  his  own  testament  to  him 
[the  deacon  Gabriel],  commanded  that  they  should  be  silent;  but  (he 
did)  not  (say)  “Sit  ye”.  (He  said)  “Be  silent”,  first,  on  account  of 
Zachanas;  secondly,  because  the  light  of  our  Lord  was  not  yet  mani¬ 
fested  over  Jordan6 7 ,  they  were  still  in  darkness,  the  people  and  the 
peoples.  But  Jerusalem  and  those  in  her  -  who  are  the  priests  in  the 
bema  -  sit,  since  they  do  not  yet  know  the  Light,  and  it  has  not  ap¬ 
peared  to  them.  The  peoples  afar  off ,  not  sealed  with  the  stamp  of 
the  Law,  stand  up  before  Him:  the  East  runs  with  gifts,  thus  offering 
worship:  Egypt  receives  Him  with  honour:  the  rude  shepherds  espe¬ 
cially  saw  His  glory.  So  also  those  in  the  nave  stand  upon  their  feet, 
representing  those  who  received  Him  immediately  upon  his  birth.  The 
orders  of  women  (also)  stand  upon  their  feet,  with  [i.e.  representing] 
the  women  who  assent  to8  those  things  which  are  above  nature,  and 
with  those  who  prophecy:  I  mean,  Elizabeth  and  Hannah  in  the  matter 
of  prophecy,  but  Mary  in  that  which  is  above  nature.  The  priests  with 
Zachary  do  not  even  consent  to  accept  (that  which  is  according  to) 
nature:  -  "How  shall  I  know  this,  who  am  an  old  man,  and  my  wife  an 
old  woman?"  said  Zachary  to  the  angel.  Not  even  to  nature  does  he 
assent,  though  he  is  one  of  those  who  know  the  promises  and  nature9 . 
But  what  does  the  woman  [Mary]  (say)?  “Behold  I  am  the  handmaid 
of  the  Lord:  be  it  done  into  me  according  to  Thy  word”.  And  what  the 

5Mal.2:7. 

6Another  reference  to  the  Diatessaron  story  of  a  fire,  or  light,  over  Jordan  at 
the  baptism:  cf.  p.32,  note  5. 

7I.e.  the  congregation. 

o  •  •  • 

9A11  this  was  worked  out  in  Tract  I  chap.9.  By  “nature”  here  he  means  that  it 
was  not  against  nature  that  a  married  women  should  have  a  son,  as  witness 
Sarah  and  Hannah. 


41 


Magi,  who  did  not  know  the  promises?  “For  we  have  seen  His  star  in 
the  East,  and  are  come  to  worship  Him”.  The  shepherds  (also)  run  to 
worship  the  Babe  in  the  manger,  accepting  the  promise  of  the  angel. 
Jerusalem,  mistress  of  the  promises  and  prophecy,  sleeps  in  the  gross¬ 
ness  of  the  flesh. 

And  so10  the  reading  of  the  Apostle  typifies:  The  first  utterance  he 
[the  reader]  shouts  aloud  and  stirringly;  which  is  (foil  19v°)  the  ap¬ 
pearance  to  Zachary.  After  this,  he  speaks  gently  or  quickly:  which  is 
the  appearance  of  the  angel  to  Mary,  when  he  announced  to  her.  The 
people  in  the  nave  stand  upon  their  feet,  like  the  East  and  Egypt  and 
the  company  of  shepherds.  But  the  priests,  the  fellows  of  Zachary,  sit 
and  are  silent.  They  sit,  waiting  for  the  coming  of  Christ,  representing 
the  old  order,  like  Zachary:  they  are  silent,  as  he  was:  and  they  remain 
in  Jerusalem  [=  bema]  as  he  remained,  until  the  days  of  his  ministry 
should  be  ended. 

But  how  is  it  that  some  bring  the  Apostle  out  from  the  great  door, 
and  some  from  the  little  door?  In  any  case  he  has  come  out  from  the 
apse.  Those  who  bring  him  out  from  the  great  door  say  thus:-  If  the 
angel  comes  down  from  heaven,  let  him  come  by  this  beaten  way  -  let 
him  come  out  from  the  great  door  -  that  his  promise  may  be  the  more 
perfect.  Those  who  bring  him  out  by  the  little  door  say  this  :-  Although 
he  is  come  down  from  heaven,  yet  he  has  travelled  by  the  way  of  the 
Law  of  Moses.  Where  did  he  appear?  At  the  right  hand  of  the  altar  of 
incense.  When?  While  the  priest  was  celebrating  the  festival  of  atone¬ 
ment.  To  whom?  To  the  offerer  of  the  sacrifices  of  the  Law.  Let  him 
therefore  come  by  the  way  by  which  the  Thorah  and  the  prophets 
came'*  1 ,  and  let  the  honour  of  the  standard  of  the  King  be  enough  for 

,0A:  now. 

1  'Cf.  p.37,  note  where  it  is  said  that  the  Law  was  brought  from  the  diaconicon, 
“not  from  the  apse”.  Evidently  the  diaconicon,  though  ...?  [Note  of  editor: 
unreadable  in  manuscript]  find  with  the  apse...  Here  by  the  ‘little  door’  he 
seems  to  mean  the  door  of  the  diaconicon.  When  he  says  that  the  Apostle 
comes  from  the  apse,  he  seems  to  speak  more  loosely  than  earlier  of  the 
diaconicon  as  part  of  the  apse.  Perhaps  the  diaconicon  was  behind  the  altar. 


42 


him,  even  the  stole  [ orariurn ]  which  is  upon  his  shoulder,  and  not  upon 
his  hand12 .  Moreover  the  honour  of  the  deacons  who  come  out  before 
him13  is  sufficient  for  him. 

Now  as  it  appears  this  [latter  practice]  is  the  more  suitable:  that 
iis,  that  he  should  come  forth  from  the  little  door.  And  thus  the  enacts, 
by  the  reading  of  the  Apostle  as  far  as  the  end,  (the  period)  from  the 
time  when  John  was  announced  until  he  came  from  the  wilderness  to 
Jordan.  And  few  were  acquainted  with  this  period:  the  angel,  and  our 
Lord  and  John.  Thus  the  bishop  also  sits,  as  our  Lord  sat  in  Nazareth 
without  (fol.J20r°)  showing  His  power.  And  he  sits  in  silence.  And  the 
priests  sits  with  John  and  with  Zachary.  The  archdeacon,  who  holds 
the  bishop’s  staff  and  stands,  is  the  angel  Gabriel14,  who  guarded  the 
honour  of  our  Lord,  even  though  he  was  hidden  from  the  generality15 . 


12cf.  p.37  above. 

,3cf.  p.40. 

I4cf.  note  4. 

I5cf.  p.40,  where  also  it  is  implied  that  the  bishop’s  sitting  down  in  the  bema 
causes  him  to  be  hidden  from  the  congregation.  There  would  appear  to  have 
been  a  low  parapet  around  the  bema,  such  as  would  hide  a  man  sitting  down, 
but  not  standing  up. 


43 


CHAPTER  6 


Apostle 

Why  he  [Isho’  Yabh]  says,  “When  he  reads  three  sentences  [or 
“verses”]  of  the  Apostle,  the  deacon  on  duty  and  those  with  him  come 
down  to  the  door  of  the  bema  and  worship  towards  the  bema,  and  a 
presbyter  rises  and  worships  and  enters  with  them”.  When  he  reads 
three  sentences  of  the  Apostle,  this  is  what  they  mean:  -  The  first  pas¬ 
sage  is  the  annunciation  of  our  Lord;  the  second  the  birth  of  John;  the 
third  the  birth  of  our  Lord.  Now  that  he  is  bom,  -  what?  The  Magi 
come  from  the  East  with  the  shepherds,  and  they  offer  worship.  So  the 
deacons  also  draw  nigh  to  the  door  of  the  bema,  with  their  faces,  to 
the  West  and  their  back  to  the  East,  and  that  is,  when  the  Magi  came. 
And  they  worship  towards  the  priest1 ,  as  towards  Christ.  And  when 
this  is  done  the  angel  appears  to  Joseph  in  a  dream  (and  warns  him)  to 
flee  to  Egypt.  What  then?  “And  the  angel  appeared  in  a  dream  to 
Joseph,  and  said  to  him,  arise,  take  the  Child  and  His  mother  and  flee 
to  Egypt”,  etc.  Now  he  on  duty,  as  in  a  dream,  stands  at  a  distance 
from  the  priest2 ,  in  the  door  of  the  bema,  and  not  near  (him).  They 
bow  their  head  because  they  are  worshipping  their  Lord,  Christ.  The 
priest  stands  up  and  worships,  and  kisses  the  cross  and  the  bishop,  and 
then  goes  with  them.  Here  Christ3  goes  from  Jerusalem4 .  And  he  de¬ 
scends  by  the  way  by  which  the  promises  came.  From  heaven  the  prom¬ 
ises  came  to  Egypt,  to  the  people.  And  from  Egypt  to  Jerusalem  the 
angel,  their  guide,  travelled  with  them. 


'This  appears  to  be  the  presbyter  who  is  going  to  fetch  the  Gospel  book:  cf. 
postea. 

2  Evidently,  the  presbyter  who  is  to  fetch  the  Gospel. 

3Not  the  bishop  here,  but  the  presbyter  of  the  Gospel:  also  probably  just  be¬ 
fore. 

4  S  adds  “to  the  diaconicon”. 


44 


And  when  they  arrive  at  the  door  of  the  apse  (fol.l20v°)  That  is 
at  (the  place)  whither  the  promises  descended,  which  is  Egypt  -  there 
they  stand  and  pray  a  prayer5 :  which  prayer  signifies  the  short  time 
they  [Joseph,  with  Mary  and  the  Child]  remained  in  Egypt.  Then  they 
enter  the  door  of  the  diaconicon,  whence  came  forth  the  Law  and  the 
Prophets.  And  the  priest  remains  in  the  diaconicon,  like  Christ  at  Naza¬ 
reth:  and  no  one  knows  what  is  the  lection,  which  is  the  office  of  the 
priest,  except  the  angels  who  are  standing  before  him.  And  thus  they 
typify  secretly,  and  make  ready  for  the  procession  in  which  they  are 
going  to  bring  the  Gospel:  which  [procession  or  Gospel]  is  the  mani¬ 
festation  of  our  Lord  at  Jordan. 

Now  as  regards  the  dispensation  of  the  Old  Testament,  it  is  being 
enacted  in  the  bema,  which  is  Jerusalem,  by  the  reading  of  the  Apos¬ 
tle.  That  the  priests  are  standing6  in  wonder  and  silence:  (that  is)  for¬ 
asmuch  as  now  their  own  leader,  Zachary,  has  been  put  to  silence.  And 
thus  the  priest  [who  is  to  read  the  Gospel]  remains  in  the  diaconicon, 
as  it  were  in  Nazareth,  until  the  time  of  the  baptism  of  our  Lord. 


5Cf.  B  258  1.5, 

6  It  has  been  said  emphatically  above  that  all  in  the  bema  sit  during  the  read¬ 
ing  of  the  Apostle.  We  should,  probably,  read  “sitting”  here  instead  of  stand¬ 
ing.  But  cf.  next  page  which  tells  us  that  after  the  Apostle  they  stand  wait¬ 
ing  for  the  Gospel  to  commence,  while  a  zummara  is  sung;  it  may  be  this 
that  is  here  referred  to. 


45 


CHAPTER  7 


Zummara  after  Apostle 

Why  when  the  Apostle  is  ended,  the  deacon  says,  “Be  ye  silent”; 
and  a  cantor  {amor a)  ascends1  and  says  [or  sings]  a  hymn  (zummara)2 . 
Gabriel,  who  is  the  deacon,  when  he  has  enacted  (his)  part  as  far  as 
the  coming  of  John,  makes  an  end3  and  commands  according  to  cus¬ 
tom,  “Be  ye  silent”4 :  for  thus  you  are  to  stand  in  silence  until  the  true 
Light  appears.  And  a  cantor  ascents  from  [or  “on”]  the  other  side  to 
say  [or  “sing”]  the  Zummara.  That  he  [Isho’  Yabh]  calls  him  a  “can¬ 
tor”,  and  nor  a  “deacon”,  (means)  that  he  is  not  an  angel,  but  a  priest 
of  the  seed  of  Aaron.  Moreover  he  called  him  a  ’'cantor”  also,  or 
"singer,”  because  the  priests  also  used  to  sing  praises  to  the  Lord  be¬ 
fore  the  people.  And  he  ascends  from  [or  “on”]  the  other  side,  and  does 
not  come  whence  the  deacon5  came:  because  John  came  from  the  wil¬ 
derness.6  But  that  he  ascends  to  the  place  of  the  deacon,  the  angel,  is 
because  he  represents  how  an  angel  made  the  promise  concerning  him. 
(foL121r°) 

Again,  the  (readers  of  the)  lessons  of  the  Old  (Testament)  stand 
on  the  left  side  of  the  bema,  that  is,  in  an  inferior  position  -  and  also 
deliver  inferior  and  weak  commandments:  that  is  to  say,  according  to 
their  commandments  is  also  their  peace.  But  this  one  (stands)  on  the 
right  side.  The  cantor,  John,  ascends  then  and  stand  on  the  right  hand; 


*...?  (Note  of  the  editor:  few  words  unreadable  in  manuscript)  get  in  a  pres¬ 
byter  (see  postea):  but  the  presbyters  all  stayed  in  the  bema  with  the  bishop. 
Hence  it  is  not  to  the  bema  he  ascends  but  probably  ...  of  the  “places  of  the 
readers”,  elevates  somewhat  above  the  bema. 

2Cf.  B  258,  1.31. 

3So  S;  A:  “delivers”. 

4B  259  1.7  has  “Be  still  and  silent”  after  the  Zummara,  but  before  a  Turgama 
which  precedes  the  Gospel  (this  Turgama  does  not  appear  in  George  of 
Arbel). 

Apparently  he  who  read  the  Apostle. 

6The  presbyter  of  the  Zummara  evidently  impersonates  John  Baptist. 


46 


and  with  words  which  John  formerly  used  he  also  speaks:  that  is  “Hal¬ 
leluiah”7  (which  is)  in  place  of  the  saying  which  John  said,  “Repent, 
the  kingdom  of  heaven  is  at  hand”.  And  the  people  answer  after  him, 
assenting  to  his  words.  Thus  says  the  Gospel:  “Then  went  there  forth 
unto  him  all  Jerusalem  and  all  Juda;  and  they  were  baptized  of  him 
confessing’'8 .  Moreover  the  word  “Halleluiah”  in  Hebrew  (means)  “cel¬ 
ebrated  with  praises”9 10  and  he  adds  a  clause  (rti^sK)  (consisting)  of 
phrases  from  the  Old  (Testament).  And  what  do  they  typify?  The  an¬ 
swer  with  which  John  answered  the  priests,  when  they  sent  to  him  to 
know  his  way:  “I,”  said  he,  “am  a  voice  that  crieth  in  the  wilderness, 
as  it  is  written  in  Isaiah  the  prophet”.  This  is  the  first  clause  (rl^*\). 
And  that  he  says  a  phrase  (or  verse)  from  David:  (this  is)  forasmuch 
as  (John)  said  ‘I  am  come  with  prophecy’:  the  phrase  (or  verse)  wit¬ 
nessing  to  the  prophecy.  By  the  chant  (Qinta)xo  which  he  adds  to  them, 
{he  shews)  the  fulfilment  of  the  prophecy.  What  then?  They  assent  to 
his  words  and  say  Halleluiah11  (^_AW*).  The  second  clause  (is)  the 
rebuke  of  the  Jews,  -  “brood  of  vipers”,  etc.  That  is,  even  though  from 
the  Scripture  of  the  Old  (Testament)  you  maintain  that  you  are  sons  of 
Abraham:  do  not,  he  says,  rely  on  this.  What  then?  For  lo,  the  axe  is 
laid  at  the  root  of  the  trees;  every  tree  that  maketh  not  good  fruits  is 
cut  down  and  falls  into  the  fire”.  Heretofore,  he  says,  the  Law  was 
wont  to  cut  of  the  branches  of  sins  from  trees  that  were  unprofitable; 
but  now  He  (God)  tears  up  the  roots  of  sin;  and  what  tree  soever  is 
not  apt  to  give  fruits  is  cut  down.  What  then?  The  priests  did  not  con¬ 
sent  to  be  baptized,  (fol.l21v°)  or  to  receive  him  (John).  Publicans  and 
harlots  accepted  him  and  cried  out  “Halleluiah”. 

But  after  the  singer  has  typified  the  part  of  John  and  his  baptism: 
that  is  to  say,  the  saying  (by  which)  he  preached  the  kingdom  of  heaven, 
and  again  the  fulfilment  of  prophecy,  and  the  rebuke  of  the  Jews:  thus 

7B  258  1.34. 

8The  writer  makes  the  word  here  mean  “praising”,  whereas  in  the  Gospel 
it  is  “confessing  (sins)”.  The  Syr.  word  can  mean  either  on  occasion. 

9It  really  means  “Praise  Ye  Jah”  (=  Jehovah). 

10This  certainly  refers  to  the  Halleluiahs:  See  p.30  (on  marmitha),  note  10. 

“Lit:  “and  they  hallel”. 


47 


he  makes  ready  with  exultation'2 ,  because  he  sees  the  standard  of  the 
manifestation  of  our  Lord13 :  he  sees  the  apse  shining  with  lamps,  and 
the  subdeacons  standing  on  guard.  The  doors  of  heaven  are  moved, 
and  he  smells  the  odour  of  the  King  who  is  coming.  The  deacon  also 
at  the  same  movement  moves  the  veils.  And  when  the  singes  sees  these 
things  he  stands  with  exultation14,  and  refrains  from  the  teaching  of 
the  baptism  of  the  people15 .  He  turns  to  praise  and  meet  Him  who  is 
coming.  And  he  says  a  Hullala 16 .  And  he  descends  to  the  door  of  the 
bema.  And  he  stands  until  the  Gospel  has  gone  up;  and  then  he  de¬ 
scends17  :  indicating  the  which  he  [=  John]  said  to  the  people:  “He  must 
increase,  and  I  must  decrease”.  And  the  door  of  the  bema  is,  as  it  were, 
Jordan,  which  is  before  the  land  of  promise:  the  people  cross  the  Jor¬ 
dan,  and  then  inherit  the  land  and  so  he  stands  at  the  door  of  the  bema, 
as  it  were  by  Jordan.  And  when  he  has  baptized  Christ18 ,  he  descends 
below;  and  our  Lord  goes  up  to  Jerusalem  to  fulfil  His  dispensation. 
He  [or  ‘it’]19  goes  to  the  right  side,  to  the  place  of  the  readers,  observ¬ 
ing  the  order  of  the  Old  (Testament),  and  with  it  he  makes  the  New, 
His  teaching,  to  agree  whereas  it  [=  the  Gospel]  goes  first  to  the  bishop, 
and  he  kisses  it20 ,  by  this  it  shews  that  the  Word  who  came  down  from 
heaven  -  whom  the  Gospel  signifies  -  was  united  to  a  man  taken  from 
us  -  that  is,  the  bishop. 

,2Syr.  deyasa:  an  uncommon  word,  and  one  that  really  signifies  “danc¬ 
ing”:  but  there  is  no  further  hint  at  something  like  ceremonial  dancing.  See 
however  note  14. 

,3i.e.  probably,  the  Gospel  being  carried  in  procession. 

14Here  the  word  deyasa  does  seem  to  imply  some  sort  of  action  on  part  of 
the  singer,  rather  than  an  attitude  of  mind. 

,5This  seems  to  mean  that  he  does  not  continue  his  Zummara  to  the  point 
where  it  would  signify  this. 

16=  a  division  (1/20)  of  the  Psalter:  but  may  here  be  a  Halleluiah. 

17This  would  seem  to  imply  two  levels  on  the  bema  -  the  main  portion  and 
that  where  the  reading  took  place;  cf.  ch.10  (on  Gospel),  note. 

18I.e.  finished  the  Zummara. 

l9The  writer  does  not  distinguish  between  the  Gospel  book  and  the  priest 
who  carries  it  -  both  here  represent  our  Lord  coming  to  Jordan. 

20Cf.  ch.54. 


48 


CHAPTER  8 


Preparation  for  Gospel  -  Dress  of  Presbyter  and  Deacons 

Why  Isho’  Yabh  ordered  that  the  presbyter  who  brings  forth  the 
Gospel  should  wear  a  chasuble  [(?)  Gk.  word  cpaivo^riq],  but  the  dea¬ 
con’s  tunics;  and  that  they  should  carry  lights  and  censers,  and  go  forth 
before  him;  and  that  the  subdeacons  should  leave  their  places,  and  come 
overagainst  him  with  lamps.  (fol.l22r°)  The  deacons,  as  representing 
the  highest  church  (of  angels),  prepare  themselves  at  once  to  go  forth 
before  the  King,  being  distinguished  by  the  dress  of  the  king’s  serv¬ 
ants1  ;  but  the  presbyter  (wears)  the  phaina  [=  cpaivoXyq,  paenula];  that 
is,  he  receives  the  garb  [oxhiia]  of  royalty.  But  the  deacons  (wear) 
tunics,  which  shew  truly  the  order  of  servitude.  (They  have)  thuribles 
and  lights,  which  befit  the  time  of  a  reception2 :  for  so  also  our  com¬ 
mandments  are  not  suitable  for  him3 .  But  when  he  announced  the  hope 
of  the  “revelation  of  the  gentiles”4 ,  he  commanded,  “Be  ye  silent”.  Since 
he  is  putting  the  Old  (Testament)  to  silence  and  causing  the  New  to  be 
heard,  let  us  be  silent  with  the  Old,  and  “stand  up”  to  receive  the  New5 . 
But  now  that  the  light  of  the  redemption  of  all  is  come,  “Stand  ye  [read 
‘we’  (?)]  ready”.  And  when  you  stand,  yield  not  to  any  other  thought; 
and  do  not  rush6  into  prating  words,  and  do  not  appear  (to  be  occu¬ 
pied)  with  other  thoughts,  but  pray  with  your  ears,  and  listen  to  the 
words  of  the  Gospel. 

Now  before  this  he  was  commanding  others:  “Sit  ye”,  he  said,  and 
again  “Be  ye  silent”.  But  now,  associating  himself  with  the  commu¬ 
nity,  he  says,  “Let  us  stand  ready  and  hear”7  shewing  by  this  (on  this 

'Lit  “the  service  of  the  kingdom”  (or  ‘royalty’). 

2Or  “banquet”,  “entertainment”. 

3This  refers  to  the  use  of  the  2nd  person  in  the  deacon’s  former  remarks, 
whereas  he  now  says  “Let  us  stand  ready”.  This  will  appear  presently. 

4I.e.  before  the  Apostle. 

5This  refers  back  to  before  the  reading  of  the  Apostle. 

6Meaning  of  this  word  doubtful  (^cnak*ir\)  Brun  says  that  Ethpe.  has  some¬ 
thing  the  sense  of  Arabic  “se  occultavit,  erravit”. 

7B  259  1.5. 


49 


wise):  Heretofore  you  were  commanded  commandments  suited  to  you: 
that  is.  Eat  this,  (fol.l22v°)  and  Ye  shall  not  eat  that,  and  Ye  shall  not 
commit  adultery,  and  Ye  shall  not  steal,  and  the  rest:  Which  things  are 
not  suitable  for  us  [sc.  angels]  when  they  are  commanded.  For  we  do 
not  commit  adultery,  whether  we  be  commanded:  not  to  commit  adul¬ 
tery,  or  whether  we  be  not  commanded:  Not  yet  like  manner  theft  and 
murder,  -  if  we  were  not  commanded  (not  to  commit  them).  (But)  in 
this  we  are  with  you,  when  you  live  spiritually.  These  things  we  truly 
stand  in  need  if,  and  seek  and  wait  for,  -  to  be  set  free  from  incon¬ 
stancy8  .  And  if  you  are  not  free  from  death,  neither  are  we  free  from 
inconstancy.  And  heretofore  we  had  not  heard  of  the  hope  of  the  res¬ 
urrection  of  the  dead,  but  we  considered  our  labour  for  you  to  be  in 
vain.  But  now  that  this  mystery  has  been  revealed,  and  the  Lord  is  about 
to  work  a  redemption  for  mortals,  rightly  do  we  hear  this  saying  [sc. 
“Let  us  stand”]  together  with  you.  Up  to  this  time  we,  in  the  work  in 
which  we  were  (engaged),  were  going  our  diligence  that  we  should  not 
be  cast  off  with  the  devils;  nor  were  we  looking  for  any  other  salva¬ 
tion;  since  we  saw  that  to  the  good  sons  of  Adam  their  reward  was 
given  in  this  world.  Now  we  have  heard  of  the  hope  of  the  resurrec¬ 
tion  of  the  dead,  and  we  have  gotten  the  hope  of  being  set  free  from 
the  evil  disposition  and  passions  of  intelligent  beings9 ;  (therefore)  “let 
us  stand”  and  joyfully  become  one  company,  and  “let  us  hear”  the  ut¬ 
terances  which  rejoice  us  and  you:  let  us  be  one  church.  For  this  cause 
he  commanded  “Let  us  stand  ready”.  And  so  the  priest10,  who  is  our 
Lord,  seeing  angels  and  corporeals  being  well  prepared  to  receive  him, 
utters  a  fitting  speech:  that  is  “peace  be  with  you”11 . 

Now  on  no  occasion  when  angels  appeared  or  even  our  Lord,  ap¬ 
peared,  have  we  heard  that  He  used  this  saying:  (but)  to  Adam,  “Where 

Hr^c\  a  common  word  with  George.  It  means  ‘a  bias  towards’  (what 

is  bad),  possibility  of  deterioration,  defectibility.  According  to  him  even  the 
angels  are  not  entirely  freed  from  this  till  after  the  general  resurrection  day. 
gI.e.  such  as  intelligent  beings  may  have. 

,(This  is  evidently  the  presbyter  who  reads  the  Gospel  (not  the  bishop),  cf. 
p.  56  infra. 

"B  260  1.31  George  knows  nothing  of  the  long  Turgama  to  B  259-260. 


50 


irt  thou?”;  to  Abraham  He  said,  “I  am  El  Shaddai,  God”,  etc.;  to  Mo- 

iLes,  “Moses,  Moses,  loose  thy  (fol.l23r°)  shoes  from  off  thy  feet”;  to 

sic)  Isaiah,  “I  saw  the  Lord  sitting  upon  a  high  throne”.  But  what  now? 

i  \  word  that  is  (more)  lofty:  “Peace  be  with  you”:  the  trouble  which 

,  -vas  laid  upon  the  nature  of  mortals  has  been  loosed:  the  distress  which 

j  -eigned  over  you  is  taken  away.  Heretofore  envoys  were  coming  to  you 

with  terror:  now  the  Lord  of  the  envoys  with  peace.  And  when  he 

employs  this  (saymg)  the  spiritual  and  bodily  ones  pay  the  interest:  “And 

with  thee,  and  with  thy  spirit”:12  out  of  that  which  is  Thine  we  give 

rhee  thanks,  even  the  wisdom  which  Thou  hast  taught  us.  And  since, 

when  we  were  unworthy,  Thou  didst  honour  us,  with  what  can  we  re- 

nay  Thee.  And  shewing  that  He  is  God  become  man  and  man  become 

God,  even  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  the  people  give  glory  to  Him.13 

•  ; 

Afterwards,  what?  “Be  ye  silent  now”14 .  And  why?  Now  that  we 
have  been  set  free,  and  have  been  united  one  with  another,  ,and  have 
f  become  one  people,  our  Saviour,  who  is  of  our  race,  is  come  to  re- 
i  deem  us  and  you.  And  I  [sc.  the  deacon]  have  been  made  His  [i.e.  the 
presbyter,  who  reads  the  Gospel]  keeper  of  the  order15  that  you  may 
hear  from  him  His  words,  -  which  I  know,  because  I  have  learned  the 
mystery  [or  “secret”]  of  them.  Hearken,  that  he  may  recite  (them)  into 
you. 

The  people  are  obedient,  as  it  were  to  the  master  and  (his)  serv¬ 
ant16  ;  and  they  turn  their  faces  towards  the  king  who  has  appeared  [i.e. 
the  reader  of  the  Gospel],  uncovering  their  heads,  which  before  were 
covered  by  the  sin  of  Adam,  and  they  lift  their  faces  upward,  for  the 
sake  of  the  house  of  Adam,  whose  nakedness  they  have  seen.  And  thus 
they  remain  until  the  reading  is  ended.  But  the  ministers  who  are  hold- 

«  * 

12B  260  1.32. 

,3The  idea  no  doubt  is  that  the  words  “thee”  and  “thy  spirit”  signify  the 
manhood  and  Godhead  of  Christ. 

14Not  in  B  260:  but  at  259  1.7  (after  the  deacon’s  “stand  we  prepared”) 

. 

15r^ usually  translated  by  me  “on  duty”:  it  means  one  of  the  dea¬ 
cons  who  make  remarks  to  the  people. 
l6Perhaps  a  reference  to  the  parable  of  the  supper. 


51 


ing  things  stand  in  order:  the  subdeacons  in  the  midst  of  the  gangway, 
since  they  have  no  authority  to  ascend  to  the  throne;  the  deacons  of 
the  tapes,  on  either  side  of  the  bema.  And  they17  do  with  the  thuribles 
as  is  proper:  they  go  and  are  blessed  by  the  bishop,  as  (by)  our  Lord. 
And  they  go  to  the  altar  [on  the  bema  (?)]18  and  to  the  cross  and  the 
Gospel;  and  first  to  the  right  side,  (fol.l23v°)  and  then  to  the  left,  and 
thirdly  to  the  band  of  deacons  on  duty. 

Incense 

There  are  some  who  give  (incense)  to  the  deacons  together  with 
the  congregation19 .  But  those  who  do  not  give  to  them  together  with 
the  congregation  say  thus:  -  As  the  order  of  slaves  may  not  banquet 
with  the  masters  and  the  guests:  but  after  these  have  banqueted,  then 
they  banquet:  so  it  is  not  right  for  the  order  of  deacons,  who  perform  a 
service,  to  be  associated  with  the  congregation,  but  when  the  congre¬ 
gation  has  been  censed  with  the  incense,  then  let  those  [the  deacons] 
be  censed.  But  those  who  give  them  the  incense  together  with  the  con¬ 
gregation  say  thus:  -  Since  we  are  become  one  church  in  Christ,  let  us 
not  name  (any)  slaves  or  masters,  but  let  us  offer  (them)  the  smoke 
and  incense  alike,  associating  them  together.  Now  the  former  follow 
the  distinction  of  spiritual  and  corporeal  natures;  the  latter  say  that  we 
are  (now)  above  nature.  And  such  is  the  tradition  of  the  one  side  and 
the  other. 


'  “They”  appears  to  be  indefinite,  not  the  deacons  just  mentioned,  but  oth¬ 
ers. 

,8There  was  an  altar  on  the  bema:  cf.  Tract  2  ch.2,  fol.52r° 
l9On  incensing  see  above,  p.36. 


52 


CHAPTER  9 


Salutation  of  the  Deacon  Before  the  Gospel 
Why  in  the  days  of  passion  and  at  Baptism  the  deacon  says  be¬ 
fore  the  Gospel  “Be  still  and  silent”1 ,  and  does  not  say  “Let  us  stand 
ready”.  Because  the  days  of  the  fast  appertain  especially  to  us2 ,  and 
the  angels  are  not  sharers  (in  it)  with  us.  Again,  the  passion  and  death 
of  our  Lord  were  for  us.  Baptism  again  was  given  to  us;  while  the 
spiritual  beings  do  not  share  with  us  in  the  fast  -  for  neither  do  they 
eat  -  nor  do  they  take  part  with  us  in  the  passion,  since  it  was  for  us 
that  Christ  died;  nor  do  they  take  part  in  baptism.  Since  we  are  bap¬ 
tized  into  the  death  of  the  Son,  and  typify  death  and  the  resurrection, 
rightly  now  that  he  is  reading  the  Gospel  which  signifies  these  things, 
does  the  deacon  command  us3 ,  as  being  himself  removed  from  these 
things.  But  when  he  transacts  the  dispensation  of  redemption  and  de¬ 
clares  the  doctrine  (thereof),  (fol.l24r°)  they  [the  angels  =  deacons] 
are  associated  with  us.  When  the  reading  signifies  those  things  which 
are  peculiarly  ours,  he  [the  deacon]  separates  himself  from  us,  and 
does  not  share  in  the  commandments  that  are  given  to  us,  -  the  fast, 
the  passion,  baptism.  But  whereas  these  things  are  peculiarly  ours  - 
since  an  angel  actually  strengthened  even  the  Lord  of  glory  Himself 
in  (His)  passion,  as  it  is  said:  “There  appeared  to  Him  an  angel  from 
heaven  strengthening  Him”;  and  again  in  His  fast;  after  He  had  van¬ 
quished  Satan,  angels  drew  nigh  and  ministered  unto  Him;  and  again 
when  He  was  baptized,  angels  came  down  to  honour  Him4  -  rightly 
now  does  the  deacon  command  us,  not  associating  himself  with  us. 
(But)  on  festivals  and  Sundays  since  we  typify  the  resurrection,  and 
at  the  resurrection  angels  sat  upon  the  stone,  and  the  supernal  orders 
rested  with  us  -  He  associates  Himself  with  us  when  on  (these)  days 
of  gladness  we  stand  up  to  keep  festival.  And  these  things  according 
as  it  is  fitting  we  have  set  down. 

.  t 

]B  259  1.7  the  formula  is  q\iq  acu»  rdArja  lit  be  ye  in  silence  and  be  silent 

2r^T_v^  gct>  Lit:  “an  attendant  on  us”,  is  evidently  a 

noun  here,  and  probably  =  Persian  (so  Brun),  i.e.  “satelles”,  “lictor”.  In  Tract 
I  Ch.  13  fol.28v°  Good  Friday  is  said  to  be  a  of  the  fast,  i.e.  “an 

appendage’’,  not  part  of  the  fast  itself  :  since  they  broke  the  fast  that  day, 
i.e.  after  the  celebration  of  the  Mysteries  on  Thursday  night. 

3Using  the  2nd  person  (“be  ye  still”)  see  heading  of  chapter. 

4The  Diatesseron  story  again:  see  p.32  above. 


53 


CHAPTER  10 


Gospel 

Why  a  presbyter  draws  near  and  supports  the  Gospel  together  with 
him  who  reads;  and  why,  when  the  Gospel  is  ended,  the  bishop  kisses 
it,  and  the  archdeacon  takes  it  and  sets  it  upon  the  altar,  and  why  there 
are  some  who  when  the  Gospel  comes  forth  kiss  it1 ,  and  some  who  do 
not  kiss  it  until  it  comes  down  from  the  bema2 .  That  the  [second  ]  pres¬ 
byter  supports  the  Gospel,  -  (with  thus)  agree  the  words  of  our  Lord 
who  says:  “Upon  the  month  of  two  or  three  witnesses  every  word  shall 
stand”.  Moreover  from  the  beginning  God  said  thus:  “It  is  not  good 
for  Adam  to  be  alone:  I  will  make  for  him”,  (etc.)  and  God,  when  He 
appeared  to  Abraham,  shewed  Himself  with  two  angels.  And  at  our 
Lord’s  manifestation  [or  ‘Epiphany’]  the  Father  bore  witness  to  him, 
and  the  Spirit.  So  now  also,  when  the  presbyter  draws  near  to  support 
the  Gospel,  (it  is)  in  order  that  the  Gospel  by  the  writing,  the  presby¬ 
ter  by  (his)  voice,  and  another  (fol.l24v°)  by  an  (outward)  sign  and  in 
silence,  should  typify  the  three  witnesses  who  are  worthy  to  be  believed. 

And  when,  it  is  said,  the  Gospel  is  ended,  it  goes  to  the  bishop, 
and  he  kisses  it:  shewing  that  this  dispensation  was  fulfilled  by  a  Man 
who  is  from  us,  (but)  who  was  anointed  with  the  Godhead.  And  so  let 
us  regard  the  Gospel  as  God  the  Word  who  dwelt  in  a  man  who  is 
from  us,  even  the  bishop.  And  as  the  dispensation  was  to  be  fulfilled 


'I.e.  when  it  has  come  forth  (from  the  apse)  George  constantly  uses  the  present 
in  this  way  for  the  past  in  what  follows,  it  appears  to  be  implied  that  this  was 
the  kissing  of  the  Gospel  in  the  bema  by  the  bishop  just  before  the  reading. 

2This  can  hardly  mean  that  immediately  after  the  reading  the  Gospel  is  taken 
away  from  the  bema,  for  in  chap  13  we  are  told  that  after  the  litanies  the 
Gospel  and  cross  are  taken  in  solemn  procession  to  the  apse.  What  is  meant 
may  perhaps  be  gathered  from  ch.12,  p.60  which  refers  to  this  as  follows: 
“Its  [the  Gospel's]  descent  from  the  place  of  readers  signifies  their  leading 
Him  to  be  crucified:  its  being  set  on  the  altar  cf.  p.55  (signifies)  His  crucifix¬ 
ion”.  So  its  coming  down  from  the  bema  can  only  mean  from  an  elevated  part 
of  the  bema  where  it  was  read.  Another  passage  (Zummara)  seems  to  imply 
that  there  were  two  levels  in  the  bema. 


54 


by  the  reading,  the  bishop  took  part  in  it  by  kissing  it  [the  Gospel]  at 
the  beginning,  and  now  (again)  at  the  end3 . 

But  we  have  already  said  that  the  going  forth  of  the  Gospel  from 
the  apse  is  the  coming  of  our  Lord  from  heaven  to  Jerusalem,  and  the 
reading  of  it  His  teaching  and  dispensation  after  baptism.  But  now  that 
He  has  fulfilled  His  dispensation,  -  what?  He  has  come  to  deliver  Him¬ 
self  to  death.  And  the  archdeacon,  the  bishop’s  substitute4,  takes  the 
Gospel  and  sets  it  upon  the  altar5 .  That  he6  himself  does  not  set  it  is 
forasmuch  as  by  the  instrumentality  of  others  He  was  hanged  upon  the 
cross.  The  priest  [=  who  read]  comes  of  himself  [sc.  to  the  bishop,  for 
him  to  kiss  the  Gospel],  and  the  Gospel  with  him,  forasmuch  as  He 
came  to  the  passion  of  His  own  will,  and  was  not  brought  (thereto)  by 
force. 

It  remains  to  say  why  some  kiss  the  Gospel  when  it  goes  forth7 
from  the  apse,  and  others  do  not  kiss  it  until  it  is  entering8 .  Those  who 
kiss  it  when  it  is  coming  forth  say  thus:  -  What  time  the  Light  of  the 
world  has  been  manifested  and  has  come  from  heaven  [=  the  apse]  to 
Jordan  [=  door  of  bema]9 ,  let  us  go  forth  to  meet  Him  with  rejoicing, 
since  we  know  that  He  is  our  lifegiver.  Those  who  do  not  (go  to)  re¬ 
ceive  it  [=  the  Gospel]  say  thus:  -  In  his  coming  from  heaven,  even 
though  the  angels  and  spiritual  ones  perceived  Him,  yet  we  did  not 
recognize  Him  until  He  was  baptized,  and  John  bore  witness  to  Him, 
and  the  Father  from  heaven  cried  out,  and  the  Spirit  came  down.  And 


3Cf.  p.48,  above. 

4n±2icoo  r George  elsewhere  uses  _A»>  “Fill  (the 

place)  after”  in  the  sense  of  “Take  the  place  of’:  his  usual  word  for  “repre¬ 
sent”  is  -Ai* 

5This  is  evidently  the  altar  on  the  bema.  cf.  p.79. 

bProbably  the  reader  still,  (possibly  the  bishop). 

7I.e.  probably  just  after  it  has  come  forth  (before  the  reading):  cf.  p.54,  note  1 

8This  may  mean:  is  entering  the  bema  proper,  after  coming  down  from  the 
“place  of  readers”:  cf.  p.54,  note  2. 

9Cf.  p.48. 


55 


if  indeed  we  typify  these  mysteries  that  were  done  there,  (fol  125r°)  it 
is  right  that  we  should  shew  forth  even  as  it  was  there  done,  and  not 
now  run  to  receive  Him:  even  as  we  did  not  there  know  Him  nor  re¬ 
ceive  Him:  and  that  we  should  not  turn  our  faces  towards  Him  until 
we  know  Him  accurately.  And  so  at  the  "peace”  which  he  [the  presby¬ 
ter  who  reads  the  Gospel]10  gives,  and  (at)  what  the  deacon  says  -  “Let 
us  stand  ready”  -  now  we  stand  ready  when  our  faces  are  towards  the 
East  -  let  us  so  stand  and  answer  to  the  “Peace”,  that  we  do  not  turn 
our  faces  round;  and  thus  let  us  remain  until  we  hear  the  character  of 
a  man’s  speech11 ,  let  us  not  assent  to  everyone  who  calls  (or  ‘reads’) 
until  we  learn  whether  he  has  the  truth.  For  our  Lord  also  wrought 
wonders  and  miracles  through  His  name  to  this  end,  that  He  should  be 
known  and  preached  and  believed.  And  so  now  we  act  in  like  manner 
as  it  was  done  at  the  baptism:  when  He  was  baptized  and  began  to 
perform  signs,  then  many  believed  in  Him.  So  we  also,  by  His  teach¬ 
ing  and  His  signs12  let  us  be  converted  to  Him;  and  after  His  passion 
let  us  receive  Him13 ,  -  when  He  is  going  down  from  the  dispensation 
of  the  bema,  after  his  passion14 ,  that  we  may  imitate  the  women  and 
the  disciples.  Before  His  passion  they  did  not  account  Him  worthy  of 
worship;  but  the  women  honoured  Him  with  ointment,  and  were  styl¬ 
ing  Him  the  Messiah,  the  Son  of  God  -  some  of  them,  with  the  disci¬ 
ples  -  though  they  (so)  called  Him  as  one  of  the  anointed  ones  of  the 


10cf.  p.50,  note  10. 

nFor  further  notes  on  bema  cf.  pp.48  &  50.  This  last  sentence  seems  only  to 
mean  the  same  as  the  one  before.  Those  in  the  bema  probably  stood  usually 
facing  the  bishop  and  the  altar  (of  bema)  with  backs  to  apse.  They  are  not  to 
turn  round  to  greet  the  Gospel  till  it  begins  to  be  read. 
l2I.e.  during  the  reading  of  the  Gospel  cf.  p.55. 

13The  word  Ann  here  means  “welcome”,  “Give  a  reception  to”:  it  refers  to  the 
kissing  of  the  Gospel  after  the  reading. 

14This  may  mean  that  those  who  did  not  kiss  the  Gospel  before  the  reading 
did  not  do  so  after  the  reading  at  once,  but  only  when  it  was  about  to  be  taken 
back  to  the  apse  after  the  litanies  (cf.  ch.13,  p.71):  for  on  pp.55  &  60  it  is  said 
that  its  being  set  on  the  altar  (of  the  bema)  after  the  reading  =  crucifixion. 


56 


of  the  house  of  David,  and  as  (any)  religious  man  who  is  called  a  son 
of  God:  -  as  it  is  said  in  a  certain  place,  “sons  of  Elohim”,  and  again, 
*‘My  son  and  my  first-born  Israel”,  and,  “Sons  have  I  reared  up”,  etc. 
But  of  worship  they  did  not  account  Him  worthy  before  His  passion. 
But  when  He  was  glorified  on  the  cross,  and  rose  from  the  grave, 
women  took  hold  of  His  feet  and  worshipped  him,  and  the  disciples, 
when  they  saw  Him,  worshipped  Him.  So  let  us  act,  -  let  us  worship 
Him  with  the  women  and  the  disciples,  and  honour  Him.  And  as  it 
would  seem  the  (opinion)  of  these  last  is  (the  more)  accurate. 


57 


CHAPTER  11 


Homily  after  Gospel 

What  the  sermon  (or  “homily"  -  amorutha)  after  the  Gospel  sig¬ 
nifies;  and  why  the  deacon  says  here,  “Sit  ye,  and  be  silent"1 .  As  our 
l  ord  spoke  in  parables  with  the  multitudes,  and  interpreted  those  para¬ 
bles  to  His  disciples  alone,  so  does  the  sermon  typify:  even  as  He  in¬ 
terpreted  over  again  to  His  disciples  the  parable  of  the  seed  and  the 
sower,  and  the  field  and  the  tares,  when  they  did  not  understand  it. 
That  the  deacon  says  "Sit  ye.  and  be  silent",  shews  on  this  wise:  Now 
vou  have  heard  the  signs  of  our  Lord,  and  His  dispensation;  but  you 
have  not  understood.  And  when  you  have  learned  with  the  disciples 
what  is  the  sign  of  the  coming  of  the  end  of  the  world,  cause  your¬ 
selves  to  die  [=  ‘sit  down']  a  voluntary  death,  that  you  may  know  hid¬ 
den  mvsteries. 


And  thus  the  preacher  shews  in  his  instruction  an  exposition  of 
the  festival'  and  an  interpretation  of  the  reading.  The  interpretation  of 
the  reading  m  a  tvpe  of  this  teaching  (given)  to  His  disciples.  By  the 
allegorizing  (?)  of  the  feast  (he  shew  s),  as  it  were,  that  He  w  as  trans¬ 
figured  on  the  Mount  of  Tabor  before  Cephas  and  Janies  and  John, 
and  appeared  in  a  vision  of  the  resurrection' .  And  as  we  are  those  who 
came  to  believe  through  the  disciples,  and  not  through  the  cruci tiers, 
rightly  now  do  w  e  learn  over  again  the  interpretation  of  that  teaching 
which  was  delivered  before  all. 


Again  differently:  That  the  deacon  commended  “Sit  ye.  and  be  si¬ 
lent".  shews  thus:  O  men.  do  not  suppose  that  you  are  equal  to  under- 


B  has  nothing  corresponding  to  this:  cf.  pp.2h0-261  (i.e.  after  Gospel);  but 
the  MS  A  has  here  in  margin  “On  the  turgama"  whether  tins  =  the  turgama 
(=  hymn)  betore  the  Gospel  in  B  p.2>0  is  not  clear:  a  real  homily  on  Gos¬ 
pel  is  rather  implied. 


^xuct.  Brun  s  lexicon  S  V.  “allegorice  exposuit":  whence 


the  noun  here  may  mean  “an  allegorical  explanation" 
l.e.  in  a  glontied  torm,  such  as  He  would  have  after  the  resurrection. 


58 


standing  the  power  of  the  dispensation  of  our  Lord,  unless  you  nd  your- 
Lelves  of  the  grossness  of  your  flesh  by  death.  Die  now  by  a  mystery 
i.e.  by  sitting  down],  that  you  may  be  able,  like  Christ,  who  is  nsen, 
ind  know  the  good  things  that  have  been  done  towards  us.  And  the 
preacher  stands,  like  our  Lord,  (fol.l26r°)  shewing  that  He  is  above 
sin,  and  was  not  deserving  to  die. 

And  these  things  the  deacon  commands,  as  a  steward  who  knows 
he  will  of  his  master:  for  so  the  deacon  also  learns  beforehand  in  [lit. 
‘from”)  the  diaconicon  those  things  that  the  teacher  is  about  to  inter¬ 
pret:  whereby  be  signifies  this:  that  hidden  things  are  first  made  known 
no  the  spiritual  beings  in  secret,  and  then  they  shew  them  openly.  He 
[Isho’  Yabh]  says  also  that  the  deacons  do  not  sit:  that  is,  the  spiritual 
ones  are  not  liable  to  death:  also,  they  stand  in  honour  of  our  Lord. 


59 


CHAPTER  12 


Litanies 

What  the  Litanies1  here  signify  ;  and  why  he  who  stands  on  duty 
proclaims  the  first  one,  and  he  who  reads  the  Apostle  proclaims  the 
second.  Already  in  the  exposition  of  the  evening  office  we  have  shewn 
that  the  litanies  typify  the  passion  and  death,  and  the  petition  and  sup¬ 
plication  shew  forth  His  [Christ’s]  resurrection.  So  now  also:  for  the 
reading  of  the  Gospel  typifies  the  dispensation  of  our  Lord  after  the 
baptism:  its  descent  from  the  place  of  readers2  (signifies)  their  leading 
Him  to  be  crucified:  its  being  set  on  the  altar3  (signifies)  His  crucifix¬ 
ion.  By  His  crucifixion  was  given  a  peace  for  mercy:  I  mean,  in  that 
He  reconciled  with  our  race  the  Father  who  sent  Him;  and  again,  when 
He  asked  for  mercy  upon  His  crucifiers,  and  upon  penitents  also,  -  like 
as  He  acted  towards  the  thief.  Now  that  the  leaders  [=  deacons]  have 
seen  these  things,  they  urge  the  people  to  ask  for  mercy,  as  sinners  and 
penitents. 

First  ascends  Michael,  as  he  is  the  first  leader,  and  knows  the  pe¬ 
titions  that  are  suitable  for  mortality,-  as  we  have  said  in  the  exposi¬ 
tion  of  the  evening  office.  But  now  he  does  not  say  “Thou  that  art  rich 
in  mercy”4 ,  and  those  other  (petitions)5 .  Why?  Because  lo,  His  good- 
.  ness  and  His  mercifulness  have  now  appeared;  and  that  He  “is  rich  in 
mercy”  you  have  learned,  since  He  has  visited  you  in  His  mercy;  and 
(fol.l26v°)  that  He  “is  immortal”6  and  did  not  suffer  in  the  death  of 
the  son  of  your  race7  whom  He  joined  to  Himself.  Again  Gabriel,  the 
leader  of  the  New  (Testament)  comes  to  perform  his  part.  And  he  typi¬ 
fies  death  and  resurrection.  Now  that  He  is  risen  from  the  grave,  and 
the  dispensation  is  accomplished,  it  remains  for  Him  to  ascend  to 
heaven. 

'The  word  Karozutha  is  applied  to  all  addresses  of  any  length  made  by  the 
deacon,  but  especially  to  the  litanies  led  by  them.  cf.  B  p  262. 

2cf.  ch.7  &  10  (note). 

3No  doubt  the  altar  in  the  bema  cf.  10. 

4B  263  1.1 

5It  seems  pretty  clear  that  the  subsequent  petitions  (B  263  11.  3-19)  also  were 
in  George’s  church  omitted  in  the  liturgy. 

6B  263  1.14. 

7i.e.  in  the  Man,  Jesus:  or  in  His  human  nature. 


60 


CHAPTER  13 


Expulsion  of  Catechumens 

Why  two  deacons  bear  the  cross  and  the  Gospel,  and  those  (dea¬ 
cons)  who  are  on  duty  go  before  them;  and  what  is  the  meaning  of 
those  sayings  “Whoso  has  not  received  baptism”1 ,  (etc.);  and  why, 
when  they  say  “Go,  ye  hearers”,  the  deacons  bind  the  veils,  and  the 
subdeacons  (shut)  the  door  of  the  nave,  (and)  the  religious  women2 
(shut)  the  women’s  door.  Now  that  the  whole  dispensation  has  been 
completed,  the  spiritual  ministers,  who  are  set  over  the  spiritual  serv¬ 
ice,  typify  the  ascension,  That  they  do  not  say  the  canon  “Holy”,  is 
because  this  canon  asks  for  mercy:  (but)  the  mercy  of  God  has  (al¬ 
ready)  been  revealed  (and  so)  it  is  not  becoming  that  now  a  petition 
for  mercy  should  be  uttered.  What  then?  The  presbyter  who  reads  the 
Gospel  supplies  what  is  fitting:  he  prays,  “Do  Thou3 ,  we  beseech  Thee, 
complete  with  us  Thy  grace,  and  pour  out  upon  our  hands  this  Thy 
gift4 ,  which  Thou  didst  appoint  us  from  the  beginning  of  Thy  dispen¬ 
sation.  And  as  in  all  things  Thou  hast  renewed  us,  renew  us  on  Thine 
accusation  into  heaven  by  the  manifestation  of  Thy  Spirit,  which  Thou 
dost  make  to  dawn  upon  us. 

And  the  deacon  prepares  the  people  that  they  receive,  like  the  dis¬ 
ciples,  the  blessing  of  the  ascension5 .  And  when  he  gives  the  command, 
the  archdeacon  and  others  bear  the  cross  and  the  gospel6 ;  and  those 
on  duty  (go)  before  them.  For  with  four  is  the  ascension  accomplished, 
even  as  all  things  connected  with  us  have  their  accomplishment  by 
means  of  four:  by  4  elements  we  are  controlled:  and  there  are  four 
humours  in  man:  the  quarters  (of  the  words)  also,  which  are  round 

'B  p  267  1.25. 

2Syr.  Benath  Qeyama:  lit  “daughters  of  the  covenant”. 

3Text  “as”:  but  read  “Thou”. 

4Cf.  B  266  1.27ff;  also  267  1. 1 1  ff.  What  comes  after  this  appears  to  be  merely 
‘ideal’ 

5I.e.  the  blessing  which  symbolises  that  given  by  our  Lord  at  His  ascension. 

6Cf.  B  268  1.32  (after  dismissals). 


61 


about  us,  are  four.  Man  also  turns  to  the  right  and  to  the  left,  and  for¬ 
wards  (fol.l27r°)  and  backwards.  And  if  in  three  parts  we  lift  a  thing 
up,  but  it  is  not  lifted  up  in  the  other  part,  its  elevation  is  incomplete. 
Again,  as  the  earth  and  the  waters  minister  to  us  with  what  they  bear, 
so  also  do  air  and  fire  minister.  And  so  two  deacons  accompany  the 
ascension  walking,  and  two  laden  [sc.  with  cross  and  Gospel].  And 
when  they  arrive  at  heaven  -  the  apse  -  those  on  duty  stand  at  the  door, 
and  those  who  bear  the  cross  and  the  Gospel  enter  to  the  altar:  for  even 
so  those  who  bear  our  Lord"  shall  conduct  Him  even  unto  His  throne, 
and  the  rest  remain  here  until  they  cut  off  the  vision  of  the  disciples  [= 
presbyters  assisting  the  bishop]  from  beholding  the  ascension:  even  as 
Luke  has  said  in  the  Acts:  “And  while  they  were  looking  into  heaven, 
while  He  was  going,  there  appeared  to  them  two  men  standing  by  them 
in  white  apparel”.  He  says  “who  were  standing  by  them”,  as  though 
they  were  not  far  off:  that  they  might  cut  off  their  vision  from  striving 
after  those  things  which  cannot  be  reached,  and  teach  them  that  He  is 
about  to  come  at  the  end  of  the  times.  And  thus  they  stand,  waiting  for 
the  bishop  to  bless  the  people,  even  as  He  [=  our  Lord]  commanded 
them7 8 .  The  bishop  is  now  a  ruler  in  stead  of  our  Lord,  from  whom  he 
has  received  that  whatsoever  he  binds  and  looses  is  bound  and  loosed 
also  in  heaven.  And  thus,  as  our  Lord  has  said:  “Where  two  or  three 
are  gathered  together  in  My  name,  there  am  I  amongst  them”,  -  so  is 
the  priest  as  though  Christ  Himself  should  bless  the  people. 

But  when  they  have  received  the  blessing,  like  the  disciples,  when 
He  lifted  up  His  hands  and  blessed  them  -  what  then  do  those  spiritual 
ones  [=  deacons]  do?  He  on  duty,  Gabriel,  cries:  “Whoso  has  received 
baptism,  let  him  depart”.  That  is,  O  mortal  men,  all  these  things  that 
you  have  seen,  by  faith  are  they  known  now,  by  which  (faith)  you  re¬ 
ceived  baptism.  And  if  in  the  death  of  Christ  and  in  His  resurrection 
you  were  baptized,  confess  that  you  also  with  Him  shall  rise  up  in  the 
day  when  He  shall  come  to  be  glorified  in  His  saints.  And  if,  having 
been  baptized,  you  do  not  believe  in  the  resurrection,  you  shall  also 
become  aliens  from  the  fold  of  the  kingdom.  Hear  Paul  saying  “We 

7Syr.  ->  \v\,  practically  =  “Christophori  Viri”. 

8Cf  Acts  1:4. 


62 


who  have  been  baptized  in  Christ,  in  His  death  have  we  been  bap¬ 
tized”.  And  if  you  have  been  baptized  in  His  death,  you  have  risen 
with  Him  by  a  mystery:  and  if  this  be  not  affirmed  by  you,  go  forth 
from  the  fold  of  the  kingdom. 

Again  his  fellow,  Michael,  says:  “Whoso  receives  [or  ‘accepts’] 
not  the  sign  of  life,  let  him  depart”.  That  is,  even  though  you  have  been 
sealed  with  the  sign  of  life,  yet  it  is  from  the  institution  of  the  tent  of 
testimony  that  you  have  been  signed  -  with  the  sign  of  the  prophets, 
who  prophesied  concerning  this  mystery  of  life  which  has  been  revealed. 
And  if  with  the  sign  of  these  you  have  been  signed,  add  to  the  sign  the 
cross.  Now  the  sign  shews  the  capacity  of  the  body9 :  the  filling  up  of 
this  capacity  is  action  [or  ‘performance’).  If  then  you  have  been  signed 
with  prophecy,  paint  your  members  with  the  paints  [or  ‘drugs’)  which 
those  [sc.  the  prophets]  have  made  known  to  you  who  have  signed  you, 
that  you  may  become  an  immortal  body.  But  if  you  do  not  receive  [or 
‘accept’),  go  forth  from  the  fold  of  the  kingdom10 . 


9Or  ‘extant’  (r<l\cu5a):  this  seems  to  refer  to  the  anointing  of  the  whole  body 
which  came  before  the  baptism:  See  next  note. 

10This  is  an  obscure  passage  but  I  think  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  general 
drift  is  this:  George  interprets  the  words  (in  present  =  future  tense)  “Whoso 
does  not  receive  the  oA  \iq^  sign  of  life”,  as  referring  to  the  Eucharist.  Thus 
above  he  speaks  of  the  “mystery  of  life”  as  the  true  fulfilment  of  the  prophetical 
sign,  i.e.  the  pre-baptismal  rushma  [see  Tract  4  cf.29  where  it  is  said  that  the 
ceremony  of  baptism  as  far  as  the  anointing  (inclusive)  signifies  the  old  dis¬ 
pensation].  Now  “mystery  of  life”  is  a  common  phrase  for  the  Eucharist. 
Again  it  is  said  that  by  the  use  of  the  ‘drugs’  [another  common  term  for 
Eucharist]  forshewed  by  the  prophets  [the  coal  in  Isaiah  is  regularly  inter¬ 
preted  of  the  Eucharist]  those  who  ‘receive’  are  to  become  “an  immortal 
body”.  This  applies  naturally  to  the  quicking  effect  of  the  H.  Eucharist  (a 
common  idea).  Finally  he  uses  the  words  “but  if  you  do  not  receive”  abso¬ 
lutely,  which  is  natural  only  in  connection  with  the  reception  of  the  Eucha¬ 
rist.  He  says  them  in  effect  that  the  words  mean  this:  Although  your  bodies 
have  been  anointed  with  the  rushma,  yet  this  is,  as  it  were,  only  a  prophetical 
symbol  of  the  Eucharist,  the  “true  mystery  of  life”,  the  drug  which  will  make 
your  bodies  immortal:  if  you  do  not  fulfil  this  type  of  the  reception  of  the 
reality,  you  may  count  yourselves  as  aliens  from  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  See 
Liturgical  Homilies  of  Narsai  p.78  note  2. 


63 


Then  he  also  who  carries  the  cross  -  the  cherub  who  bears  the 
chariot  -  says:  “Whoso  receives  not  (the  sacrament)  [_=^]  let  him  de¬ 
part.  That  is,  understand,  O  brethren,  that  what  things  these  your  di¬ 
rectors  have  been  commanded:  I  mean  Michael,  of  the  sign,  and  Gabriel 
of  the  true  image:  faithfully  do  they  command  you;  for  this  door  no 
man  can  find  except  he  do  what  your  directors  have  commanded.  Cease 
then  from  the  things  of  death,  and  receive  those  things  that  have  been 
said  to  you;  and  if  you  do  not  these  things,  how  have  you  been  raised 
up  from  death  by  a  mystery?  Go  forth  from  the  fold  of  the  kingdom. 
(fol.l28r°) 

But  when  three  witnesses  have  borne  witness  to  the  people11  he 
who  files  up  all  completeness12  does  not  bring  in  for  them  (another) .. 
witness  or  command.  But  he  commands  the  subdeacons13 ,  who  are  the 
middle  church  (of  the  angels),  (saying):  “Go,  ye  hearers,  see  (to)  the 
doors”.  (That  is),  you,  (who  are)  our  hearers,  known  you,  he  says,  that 
we  have  been  commanded  this  commandment:  After  the  entering  into 
heaven  shut  ye  the  doors,  upon  which  the  sinners  knock.  So  our  Lord 
also  said  concerning  the  foolish  (virgins),  that  when  the  door  was  shut 
they  came  and  knocked  at  the  door  and  were  saying  “Lord,  Lord,  open 
unto  us”.  So  they  now  signify  by  driving  out  the  doubters,  even  as  our 
Lord  said  by  the  parable  of  the  king  and  his  servants:  and  he  cast  out 
him  that  had  not  on  him  fair  garments  for  the  wedding-supper  into  the 
outer  darkness.  When  they  drive  out  the  doubters  then  they  also  shut 
the  doors,  upon  which  the  foolish  (virgins)  knock.  And  as  He  said  again, 
At  the  end  choose  out  the  tares  from  the  midst  of  the  wheat.  That  the 
subdeacons  So  choose  out  who  are  of  the  middle  church  (of  angels)  is 
because  they  have  authority  over  these  things  :  though  from  the  women 
also  has  been  chosen  an  order  of  deaconesses  and  of  portresses;  since 
the  whole  race  of  Adam’s  house  is  one,  even  though  they  differ  in  the 
matter  of  fruitfulness  and  natural  fecundity. 

MI.e.  the  fourth  remark  is  not  addressed  to  them,  but  to  the  subdeacons. 

l2I.e.  makes  a  fourth,  cf.,  what  was  said  about  the  number  4  at  the  beginning 
of  the  chapter. 

13Not  the  people. 


64 


Those  then  [  =  the  subdeacons]  do  as  has  been  said  to  them,  and 
hey  shut  the  doors.  And  those  who  have  partaken  of  baptism  without 

(good)  behaviour14  are  left  in  a  middle  place:  They  do  not  go  forth  with- 
»ut  because  of  (their)  faith,  and  they  are  hindered  from  entering  [the 
tpse]  because  they  have  not  borne  the  yoke  of  labours15 .  Thus  is  it 
ione  in  regard  of  those  who  are  in  the  nave:  and  the  veils  of  the  screen16 
i>f  the  bridechamber  are  tied.  So  too  the  bishop  also,  who  is  in  the  place 
}f  our  Lord,  (and)  who  has  been  left  on  earth  [sc.  still  in  the  bema]  to 
ill  His  place  (foL128v°)  in  the  mysteries17,  begins  (His)  teaching  by 
neans  of  a  course  of  action  which  signifies  nature  and  its  cleansing18 . 

But  others  say  differently,  -  that  in  the  beginning  of  the  faith  there 
was  a  custom,  (established)  by  the  apostles  that  baptizandi  were  not 
baptized  until  their  30th  year  -  that  is,  at  the  age19  of  Christ  -  and  one 
✓ear  before  baptism  they  used  to  sign  them  with  the  baptismal  sign, 
signifying  by  the  signing  of  the  year  before  the  baptism  of  John  before 
our  Lord.  They  say  moreover  that  even  those  who  had  been  baptized, 
ind  on  account  of  accidental  (sins)  which  they  had  contracted  were  ab¬ 
staining  from  receiving  the  Sacrament,  used  to  remain  at  the  service 
of  the  mysteries  up  to  this  point;  and  for  this  reason  the  deacons  used 
:o  cry  out  thus;  and  when  he  [the  deacon]  said  “Whoso  has  not  re- 
I  ceived20  (baptism)”,  “and  whoso  does  not  receive  (the  sign  of  life)”, 
:hey  who  were  not  baptized  used  to  go  forth;  and  again,  if  any  were 
not  receiving  the  sacrament  for  accidental  (causes),  he  would  go  forth, 
and  those  who  were  receiving  [S  adds:  the  sacrament]  would  remain: 
and  then  he  commands  the  subdeacons  to  shut  the  doors. 

14Possibly  this  only  means  the  same  as  the  ‘labours’  mentioned  just  after:  see 
next  note. 

l5George  uses  “labours”  to  signify  the  office  of  those  who  actually  minister  at 
l  the  service. 

16r^_vSir\  1 

,7Lit.  “to  fill  the  place  of  His  mysteries”. 

18This  refers  to  the  washing  of  the  bishop’s  hands,  cf.  next  chapter. 
,9Reading  mi roocuxa  for  mkw.m  (text)  “resurrection”  [the  MS  S  confirms 
this  conjecture. 

20The  past  tense  which  follows  shows  A  to  be  right. 

65 


But  let  them  be  answered  thus:  Why  then,  since  this  practice  has 
been  changed,  have  not  the  words  (also)  been  removed?  But  granting 
that  the  deacons  command  these  things21 ,  why  do  the  subdeacons  shut 
the  doors,  and  why  does  not  one  of  the  congregation22  do  so?  How 
has  this  office  been  [So  S:  A  as  originally  translated]  assigned  to  the 
subdeacons?  But  as  I  have  already  said,  blessed  Isho’  Yabh  set  down 
and  insisted  on  such  things  as  should  signify  mysteries,  and  did  not  so 
much  care  about  the  (actual)  things;  and  since  the  subdeacons  have 
authority  over  intermediate  things  as  (representing)  the  middle  church 
(of  the  angels),  and  those  in  the  nave  stand  in  a  middle  position  -  [he 
ordered  the  subdeacons  to  shut  the  doors  of  the  nave].  Because  they 
[=  the  congregation]  have  been  signed  with  baptism  and  have  not  been 
diligent  in  labours,  they  stand  in  the  nave.  And  they  shew  by  this  that 
those  who  have  been  diligent  in  faith  and  have  been  sanctified  in  their 
soul,  but  have  not  (fol.l29r°)  laboured  with  their  body,  and  those  who 
have  laboured  bodily  but  have  not  received  baptism,  are  seen  to  be  [or 
‘appear’]  in  one  order  and  in  one  mansion23 ;  and  those  who  in  name 
have  received  baptism,  but  have  believed  in  our  Lord  after  an  hereti¬ 
cal  confession,  go  forth  out  of  the  kingdom.  So  those  who  carry  the 
cross  and  the  Gospel  do  not  place  them  on  the  altar  until  the  veils  are 
bound;  even  as  the  disciples  were  not  able  to  attain  to  [=  follow  with 
their  eyes]  the  destination  of  our  Lord-  whither  He  ascended. 


2,I.e.  probably  use  the  words  they  do  -  especially  “go  ye  hearers”. 

22I.e.  literal  carrying  out  of  the  words  “go  ye  hearers”  [cf.  p.126]. 

23The  author  denies  that  there  was  a  time  when  the  unbaptized  used  actually 
to  go  out;  he  says  Isho'  Yabh  wrote  things  that  signified  mysteries,  regardless 
of  literal  sense  of  his  words  -  hence  he  says  in  effect  that  the  baptized  laity 
stand  in  the  nave,  where  good  unbaptized  people  would  also  stand  (if  there 
were  any):  for  baptised  people  who  are  without  “labours”  (i.e.  probably,  not 
of  the  clergy)  form  one  class  with  good  and  diligent  unbaptized  people,  such 
as  the  deacons’  remarks  refer  to:  it  is  only  heretics  who  are  excluded.  The 
fact  is,  that  the  discipline  of  the  catechumenate  (the  actual  putting  forth  of 
the  catechumens  after  the  scripture,  being  long  obsolete,  the  author  is  quite 
puzzled  by  these  formulae  of  dismissal  and  is  driven  to  allegorize  them,  in 
order  to  extract  some  meaning  from  them. 


66 


And  when  the  mystery  of  our  Lord’s  dispensation  has  been  accom- 
•lished,  and  He  has  ascended  into  heaven,  and  made  His  disciples  wise 
»y  His  spirit,  they  begin  the  anthem  [onitha]24  which  signifies  His  pas- 
ion  and  death,  and  His  resurrection  and  all  His  dispensation.  When 
hen  the  community  have  received  their  [=  the  deacon’s]  Gospel  [or  ‘an- 
iouncement’]  and  are  making  confession  with  them,  and  all  the  disci¬ 
ples  [=  the  presbyters  in  the  bema]  are  saying  the  anthem,  then  Simon 
°eter,  the  bishop,  who  is  head  like  his  Lord,  and  all  the  disciples  with 
lim,  typify  the  death  with  Christ.25 


24B  269  (see  next  page)  only  the  “anthem  of  the  mysteries”  is  spoken  of  by 
1  George:  he  says  nothing  of  the  long  anthem  preceding  it  in  B  267-8. 

25I.e.  they  sit  on  the  ground. 

67 


CHAPTER  14 


Anthem  of  Mysteries 

What  signifies  the  sitting  of  the  bishop  and  the  presbyters  during 
the  Anthem  of  the  Mysteries1 ;  and  why  one  of  the  presbyters  takes 
the  bishop's  staff  and  stands  in  place  of  the  archdeacon;  and  why  four 
deacons  bring  out  water  and  towels,  two  to  the  bishop,  and  two  to  the 
priests.  Oh  the  power  of  the  Spirit!  -  how  greatly  He  has  supplied  the 
power  of  His  wisdom  in  the  mind  of  this  blessed  man  (Isho’  Yabh) 
What  then?  The  bishop  and  his  companions,  the  disciples  typify  the 
death  of  Christ2 ,  and  die  with  Him,  that  they  may  live  with  Him  in  the  • 
resurrection.  But  he  does  not  leave  the  Church  without  a  substitute; 
and  even  as  he  has  risen  up  in  place  of  his  Lord3 ,  so  he  delivers  the 
staff  of  his  pastorship  to  another  after  him,  that  he  [the  other]  may 
pasture  the  flock  that  was  committed  to  him.  He  then,  and  his  com¬ 
panions  die.  I  have  already  said  that  sitting  on  the  (fol.l29v°)  ground 
signifies  death  everywhere. 

But  others  explain  differently  :  -  They  say  that  the  sitting  of  the 
disciples  now  represents  their  hiding  and  concealing  themselves  for  fear 
of  the  Jews.  So  Abraham  Bar  Lipeh  has  handed  down  and  interpreted: 
and  thus  he  says:  -  This  sitting  signifies  the  hiding  of  the  disciples. 
But  man,  (if)  the  sitting  is  the  hiding  of  the  disciples,  what  does  the 
rising  up  and  entering  into  the  apse  signify?  When  the  disciples  had 
received  the  Spirit  they  went  forth  to  all  quarters:  and  so  it  would  be 
right,  according  to  what  you  say,  that  they  should  depart:  but  not  by 
one  way:  but  from  Jerusalem  they  [the  disciples]  went  forth  to  the  gen¬ 
tiles,  from  the  gentiles  to  death,  from  death  to  the  kingdom.  But  if  the 
gentiles  dwell  in  heaven  [sc.  the  apse],  whither  did  Christ  ascend.  It 
would  be  right  therefore  that  when  the  priests  rise  up,  some  of  them 
should  go  to  the  women,  some  of  them  to  this  side  of  the  bema,  and 


*B  269. 

2Sc.  by  sitting  on  the  ground. 

3I.e.  “has  taken  the  peace  of’:  it  does  not  mean  that  he  stands  up. 


68 


some  of  them  to  that  side,  and  that  they  should  preach  the  Gospel  in 
every  place:  but  not  one  of  them  should  be  seen  going  into  the  apse  [= 
heaven].  But  we,  travelling  in  the  nght  way,  shall  leave  Abraham  Bar 
Lipheh  in  his  madness,  and  return  to  our  own  lucid  expositions4 ,  and 
complete  (them)  on  the  same  principles  with  which  we  began.  The  sit¬ 
ting  of  the  bishop  and  the  presbyters  signifies  death.  The  staff  which 
one  of  the  presbyters  holds  is  the  authority  which  is  handed  on  from 
generation  to  generation.  What  then? 

• ,  i 

Washing  of  Hands 

Four  deacons  now  come  forth,  two  bearing  jugs  and  basins,  and 
two  (bearing)  towels,  and  two  wash  the  bishop,  and  two  the  priests. 
But  the  washing  of  the  bishop  is  different  from  that  of  the  priests.  And 
that  the  bishop  washes  first,  while  the  other  deacons  are  standing  at 
the  door  of  the  bema,  is  forasmuch  as  our  Saviour  first  died  and  rose, 
and  our  whole  nature  rose  afterwards.  His  washing  is  different  from 
that  of  the  priests:  that  is  to  say,  they  (fol.l30r°)  bring  him  two  tow¬ 
els,  one  upon  his  knees,  and  one  to  wipe  with:  even  as  our  Lord  is  dif¬ 
ferent  from  our  nature  -  though  not5  completely  -  in  that  He  was  con¬ 
ceived  without  wedlock;  and  His  baptism  was  more  excellent  than  theirs 
that  were  baptized  in  His  name;  and  His  resurrection  was  on  the  third 
day;  and  He  was  distinguished  into  (lit.  ‘ as  ’)  two  (natures?)  rather 
than  any  other  of  the  race  (lit.  ‘ nature  V  of  men)6 .  And  that  the  bishop 
shares  in  the  washing  with  the  priests:  that  is,  our  Lord  was  of  our 
nature  in  His  manhood,  and  whereas  He  has  risen,  we  also  shall  rise 
with  Him.  And  that  they  [the  deacons]  come  forth  from  the  door  of  the 
diaconicon,  and  not  from  the  great  door,  that  is,  (they  come  forth)  as 
it  were  through  the  door  by  which  death  entered  in,  -  from  that  namely, 
through  which  we  travelled  according  to  nature.  And  so  the  washing, 


4Lit.:  ‘to  the  lucidity  of  our  own  expositions’. 

5Reading  cd  for  (so  S). 

crAx ^.Sirvno  Vvacn  rOrviocG  the  above  is  the 

only  rendering  that  satisfies  the  grammar  but  the  Syriac  expression  is  pecu¬ 
liar. 


69 


which  is  a  sign  of  the  atonement,  comes  by  the  way  by  which  death 
entered.  Thus  has  it  been  brought  about  by  the  coming  of  God  the  Word, 
-  instead  of  Satan,  an  angel:  a  woman  instead  of  a  woman:  instead  of 
the  subtle  serpent  the  priest  Zachary,  by  the  conception  of  whose  son 
Mary  was  reassured:  and  instead  of  the  driving  forth  of  our  nature  - 1 
mean,  after  it  had  eaten  (the  forbidden  fruit)  -  our  nature  has  been  lifted 
up  by  the  baptism  of  the  tree  of  life.  And  as  Adam  did  not  die  at  once, 
so  neither  do  we  rise  at  once.  Again:  -  Since  there  is  no  man  who  does 
not  sin,  according  to  the  Scripture,  God’s  mercy  has  been  sent  to  weak 
nature  through  the  door  of  death,  that  it  should  be  pardoned  of  its  sins, 
according  to  the  mercy  that  has  been  shewn  to  it,  that  it  may  thus  en¬ 
ter  the  kingdom  purified  from  sins  and  faults.  But  when  these  (types) 
have  been  fully  enacted  in  the  bema  -  even  (the  types  of)  Cephas,  or 
even  our  Lord,  death  and  atonement  -  straightway  they  typify  the  res¬ 
urrection.  And  if  our  Lord  promised  His  disciples  that  “Where  two  or 
three  are  gathered  together  in  My  name,  there  am  I  in  their  midst”,  it 
is  not  absurd  if  the  (fol.l30v°)  bishop  sometimes  fills  the  place  of  our 
Lord,  and  sometimes  the  place  of  Cephas. 

And  now  [they  rise]  from  the  dust,  like  Christ,  by  a  mystery,  and 
become  immortal.  In  Jerusalem  [=  bema],  where,  as  inspired  doctors 
are  agreed,  the  resurrection  will  take  place,  there  they  rise  up  like  Christ, 
and  then  they  set  out  in  the  way  to  heaven  [=  the  apse].7 


7George  is  here  anticipating:  he  tells  us  later  that  before  the  clergy  leave  the 
bema  the  mysteries  are  prepared  by  the  archdeacon  and  others. 


70 


CHAPTER  15 


Preparation  of  Bread  and  Wine 

Why,  whilst  they  are  saying  the  anthem  in  the  nave,  the  deacons 
repeat  it  in  the  apse,  and  why  he  [Isho1  Yabh]  here  says1 ,  they  pre¬ 
pare2  the  mysteries;  and  why  he  did  not  indicate  how  the  bread  should 
be  baked  and  the  wine  mingled3 .  When  the  holy  Church  was  made 
perfect  by  the  descent  of  the  Spirit  in  all  true  fullness  of  the  holy  faith, 
the  spiritual  powers  also  received  thereof,  as  the  heavenly  apostle  has 
said:  “In  the  Church  hath  been  revealed  the  manifold  wisdom  of  God 
to  the  principalities  and  authorities  that  are  in  heaven”.  And  now,  after 
the  church  has  shewn  forth  the  dispensation  of  our  Lord  by  the  an¬ 
them,  that  by  this  faith  they  may  be  made  worthy  of  the  kingdom;  then 
He  is  revealed  to  the  spiritual  beings  [=  deacons];  and  they  confess  with 
us,  agreeing  with  our  confession  without  doubting.  That  the  archdea¬ 
con  and  those  with  him  make  ready  [or  ‘arrange’]  the  mysteries,  as 
Isho’  Yabh  teaches,  (is)  because  it  is  time  that  they  should  prepare  the 
mansions4  of  the  kingdom. 

But  let  us  explain  [lit.  ‘say’]  why  he  did  not  teach  how  they  should 
prepare  them,  and  whence  they  have  come:  even  as  he  has  spoken  of 
such  small  matters  as  the  washing  of  the  lamps,  and  the  rattle5 ,  and 
the  like.  But  as  our  Lord  said  “I  go  to  prepare  you  a  place”,  and  “In 
My  Father’s  house  there  are  many  mansions”,  but  did  not  make  known 
how,  and  where:  even  so  here  also,  this  blessed  man  did  not  make  known 
whence  they  [sc.  the  bread  and  wine]  have  come,  or  how  they  were 


‘Or  ‘says  that  here’. 

2Or  ‘set  in  order’ 

3 We  have  already  seen  (p.29,  note  1)  that  George  has  no  commentary  on  the 
“Order  of  preparation”  B  247-252.  This  positives  excludes  any  such  order. 

frequently  after  this  point  the  eucharistic  elements,  the  Sacrament,  is  spo¬ 
ken  of  as  the  (heavenly)  “mansions”,  i.e.  the  (heavenly)  portion  to  be  given 
to  the  saints. 

5These  matters  were  dealt  with  in  Tract  2. 


71 


prepared6  and  arranged,  inasmuch  as  it  passes  our  nature  to  know  what 
are  the  good  things  that  are  prepared  or  whence  they  are,  or  whether 
(fol.l31r°)  they  were  from  of  old  or  have  (only)  now  been  prepared. 
That  he  prepares  for  us  we  have  learned  from  our  Lord,  and  that  the 
ministers  of  these  things  are  the  spiritual  beings  we  know,  and  that  they 
bring  in  those  that  are  worthy  to  the  kingdom.  He  has  revealed  to  us; 
but  what  the  good  things  are  we  know  not.  For  our  Lord  has  also  said, 
“Eye  hath  not  seen  nor  ear  heard,  neither  hath  it  gone  up  upon  the  heart 
of  man,  what  God  hath  prepared  for  them  that  love  him”. 

And  he  also7  [sc.  Isho’  Yabh]  shews  by  an  intimation  concerning 
the  preparation  of  the  mansions,  which  the  mysteries  are  [=  represent], 
inasmuch  as  it  is  hidden  from  us  whence  they  are:  not  that  he  was  neg¬ 
ligent  to  teach  concerning  them:  but  he  depicted  a  type  of  those  things 
that  are  incorruptible. 


6coAal\r^ 

7cu»  _ar^o  indicates  a  change  of  subject. 


72 


CHAPTER  16 


Procession  from  Bema  to  Apse 

Why,  while  they  are  saying  -  “Gloria”1 ,  they  roll  (back)  the  cur- 
ains,  and  the  deacons  come  forth  and  bring  in  the  priests.  And  each 
one  of  the  things  that  are  here  (done)  do  thou  explain  to  me.  Now  that 
he  dead2  have  risen  with  our  Lord  by  a  mystery,  and  the  mansions  of 
he  kingdom  have  been  prepared,  and  the  banquet  has  been  set  in  or¬ 
der,  -  what?  The  spiritual  ones  [=  deacons]  within  come  forth  and  bring 
die  elect  into  heaven  [=  the  apse],  even  those  who  are  the  chosen  wheat. 
\nd  first  they  move  the  veils.  Why?  The  dead  who  are  in  Christ  shall 
rise  first  at  the  cry:  They  see  the  veils  which  are  [before  (?)]  heaven, 
±at  they  are  moved;  and  they  (themselves)  are  shaken  free  from  the 
dust,  and  become  immortal,  while  with  the  sign  of  the  Trinity3 ,  with 
which  they  have  been  signed,  they  rise  from  the  grave  at  the  comple¬ 
tion  of  the  whole  dispensation  of  Christ,  -  which  before  the  death  they 
had  shut  off  -  so  that  the  heavenly  ones  and  also  the  spiritual  ones  [= 
deacons]  were  learning  from  them4 .  Now  they  come  forth  rank  after 
rank,  two  and  two:  that  is  to  say  there  are  many  of  them.  And  first 
(comes)  the  archdeacon  and  his  associates,  and  after  him  the  others, 
two  and  two.  But  if  there  happens  to  be  a  superfluity  of  deacons,  or, 
unavoidably,  a  deficiency  ...  Nevertheless  what  ought  to  be  done  is  this: 
That  there  should  be  three  orders  (or  ranks),  according  to  the  three 
orders  of  the  churches  of  the  supernal  beings,  cherubim  and  seraphim 
i  and  thrones. 

They  [=  the  deacons]  come  forth,  the  doors  (fol.l31v°)  being  open, 
with  their  heads  bowed;  and  they  come  to  Jerusalem,  the  bema,  and 
worship  the  troops  of  saints  [=  presbyters]  who  are  therein.  Then  they 

R  1.31. 

2I.e.  those  sitting  in  bema. 

3This  probably  refers  to  the  sayings  of  the  ‘Gloria’  at  the  end  of  the  anthem: 
ccf.  B  269  1.31. 

4Sc.  after  the  dismissals  the  veils  were  tied  (ch.13).  Then  the  death  of  Christ 
was  represented  by  the  sitting  of  the  bishop  and  presbyters  in  the  bema  dur¬ 
ing  the  anthem  (ch.14).  See  what  is  said  of  the  angels  learning  from  the 
church  in  ch.15  (begin):  but  the  subjects  here  are  confused  -  there  those  in 
the  nave  =  church:  here  those  in  the  bema  are  spoken  of. 


73 


turn  their  faces  to  the  altar5 ,  and  worship,  indicating  that,  “As  mes¬ 
sengers  of  that  Lord  who  sits  there  we  are  (sent)  in  your  regard.  Be  ye 
strengthened  in  our  Lord,  and  set  out  towards  him.  You  have  now  gotten 
perfect  knowledge  after  the  resurrection:  see  the  mansions  prepared  for 
you,  that  they  are  arranged.  And  the  veil6  lies  over  them,  that  they  may 
be  concealed  from  the  eye  of  sinners. 

And  when  they  say  [=  ‘have  said’  here]  the  anthem  (onitha)  to¬ 
gether,  the  spiritual  and  corporeal  beings7 ,  who  are  now  become  one 
Church,  and  are  brought  into  concord,  having  been  freed  from  death 
and  inconstancy:  and  (while)  now,  their  differences  being  brought  into 
agreement,  they  together  say  “Gloria”,  -  the  elect  make  haste  to  go  to 
the  heavenly  mansions.  And  they  worship  them,  rendering  thanks  to 
Him  also  who  sent  them  embracing  one  another  with  worship  (or  ‘obei¬ 
sance’)  ,  forasmuch  as  they  have  been  held  worthy  for  their  labours  to 
become  heirs  of  these  good  things;  and  also  because  natural  passions 
have  been  loosed  (from  them),  and  all  human  nature  now  abides  in  love. 
The  spiritual  ones  also,  the  deacons,  worship,  and  go  to  meet  them, 
and  salute  [lit.  ‘receive’]  their  faces  and  their  feet8 ,  and  go  before  them, 
as  better  knowing  the  way  that  leads  to  heaven.  And  when  they  have 
brought  them  to  heaven  [=  apse]  they  (themselves)  remain  without,  not 
daring  to  enter  until  the  saints  enter,  from  whom  they  have  learned  the 
revelation  of  the  Spirit9 .  Thus  the  bishop  enters  like  Simon;  and  after 
him  his  contemporary10,  who  after  him  received  his  authority,  -  after 
his  decease. 


5It  is  not  clear  whether  the  altar  in  the  bema  (cf.  Tract  2  ch.2)  is  meant  or  that 
in  the  apse.  (It  appears,  from  what  follows  that  the  altar  in  the  apse  is  meant.) 

6Shoshepa  =  a  small  veil  for  placing  over  the  mysteries:  a  different  word 
from  that  used  for  the  screen  curtains  (=  wela) 

7I.e.  the  deacons  and  the  presbyters  (=  disciples  of  our  Lord). 

'This  means  ‘guide  them  and  carry  their  shoes:  cf.  below,  where  it  is  said 
that  the  deacons  carry  the  shoes  of  the  priests.  [But  there  as  here  it  may  only 
=  “salute”]. 

9cf.  ch.15  begin. 

!0cns*mr^  lit  ‘son  of  his  age’,  his  co-equal,  coadjutor:  there  is  a  passage 
somewhere  in  George  where  he  says  that  the  bishop  is  like  Peter  and  the 
other  bishop  like  his  disciples,  one  of  whom  is  to  receive  the  authority  after 


74 


But  he  who  shall  be  found  alive  in  the  day  of  our  Lord’s  revela- 
lt  on  shall  not  die,  but  shall  be  changed,  as  blessed  Paul  has  said:  “Not 
11  of  us”,  he  says,  “shall  sleep,  but  all  of  us  shall  be  changed”;  “sud- 
enly”,  he  says,  “as  in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye,  with  the  last  trump, 
vhen  it  calls,  and  the  dead  shall  rise  incorruptible;  and  we  shall  be 
hanged”.11  (fol.l32r°)  So  also  here,  he  who  bears  the  staff,  who  did 
tot  die12  with  the  bishop  and  the  apostles  in  the  bema  -  since  he  did 
tot  sit  upon  the  ground  -  is  changed  in  the  resurrection  without  sleep- 
ng:  another  bishop,  who  is  found  standing  in  the  place  of  Cephas  and 
tolding  his  staff,  shall  carry  it  along  with  him13 ,  and  go  after  Cephas, 
jid  shall  deliver  it  up  to  the  master14  of  the  priesthood15 :  and  they  shall 
oiswer  and  say,  “Behold  us  and  the  Son  Thou  hast  given  us,  that  by 
rhy  grace  we  have  been  preserved”  [Is.8: 1 8].  And  the  deacons  bow 
heir  heads  and  receive  [or  salute]  the  shoes  of  the  feet  of  the  priests. 
\nd  thus  the  pnests  enter  according  to  priority  of  merits,  one  by  one. 
\nd  the  bishop  first  worships  before  the  altar,  and  (then)  the  others 
who  are  about  him:  and  rightly,  for  he,  as  a  good  shepherd,  worships 
ind  hands  on  the  orders  [=  rights]  of  his  pastorship.16 

And  when  the  bearer  of  his  staff  enters,  the  archdeacon  takes  it 
from  him  and  places  it  by  the  altar.  The  archdeacon  is  appointed  over 
he  priesthood  like  an  angel:  he  takes  up  the  authority  [=  staff]  and 
Lifts  it  up  to  the  heavenly  king,  (and)  the  pastors  who  have  ruled  with 
:t  he  makes  to  rejoice  in  heaven  [=  apse].  As  the  authority  came  down 
from  heaven,  to  the  same  heaven  it  has  now  returned  with  honour. 

"1  Co. 15:51-52. 

12I.e.  did  not  sit  in  the  bema  during  the  anthem:  the  priest  who  hold  staff,  and 
stood  in  bema  during  anthem. 

13 Apparently  Cephas,  the  bishop. 

14I.e.  the  archdeacon,  who  is  said  elsewhere  the  angel  who  has  charge  of  the 
priesthood;  cf.  later  where  is  also  the  remark  about  the  archdeacon  “being 
appointed  over  the  priesthood”. 

13I.e.  Christ.  The  verse  of  Isaiah  is  quoted  again  later  on  introducing  the 
Creed  (cf.  p.77). 

116I.e.  the  others  have  no  right  to  bow  until  he  has  done  so  and  thus,  as  it  were, 
handed  on  his  privilege  to  them. 


75 


And  when  they  enter  and  inherit  the  mansions,  then  the  spiritual 
ones  [=  deacons]  enter  after  them  and  observe  one  [the]  order  of  their 
service17,  and  stand  (in)  orderly  (array);  as  is  fitting  that  they  should 
stand  before  the  king:  the  king  sitting  on  his  throne18,  and  his  vice 
gerent19 .  Cephas  standing  before  him.  According  to  the  title  that  he 
has  received,  ‘head  of  the  spiritual  phalanx20 ,  that  is  (of)  the  other,  the 
.  disciples  [=  presbyters]  and  spiritual  ones  [=  deacons],  each  one  in  his 
order  -  so  he  also  stands. 

He  [Isho’Yabh  -  as  it  seems]  also  says  that  the  subdeacons  leave 
their  places,  and  come,  and  stand  in  a  rank  [or  ‘row’]:  since  they  also 
have  been  set  free  from  inconstancy,  and  those  on  high  and  those  be¬ 
low  have  been  brought  into  our  enjoyment.  And  as  sons  of  the  royal 
stock,  the  rank  of  men21  (fol.l32v°)  rules  first22;  then,  as  being  near 
to  the  throne,  the  deacons,  who  are  the  highest  church  (of  angels);  af¬ 
ter  them  the  middle  church  [=  subdeacons];  and  on  the  qestroma  [Gk. 
Kocxaaxtpcopa],  the  readers.  And  they  stand  orderly,  as  befits  the  ses¬ 
sion  of  a  king. 


l7r^M‘\\,  perhaps  we  should  read  :u»  “each  one  the  order”,  etc. 

S  obviates  the  difficulty  by  omitting  “one”. 

,8Here  the  king  is  Chnst,  represented  by  the  mysteries  on  the  altar:  Cephas  is 
the  celebrant.  George  has  told  us  (p.70)  that  the  celebrant  sometimes  imper¬ 
sonates  Christ,  sometimes  Cephas. 

l9Lit.  “the  keeper  of  his  place”,  which  simply  =  locum  tenens. 

20This  refers  to  Cephas  =  bishop].  See  beginning  of  next  chapter. 

21I.e.  the  presbyters,  who  are  not  compared  to  angels  but  to  the  disciples. 
22I.e.  has  the  ascendency,  and  occupies  the  higher  position. 


76 


CHAPTER  17 


Creed 

Why  they  here  say  “We  believe”1  Now  that  Cephas  [=  bishop  -  as  it 
seems]  is  standing  at  the  head  of  the  church,  and  with  him  the  pastors 
and  all  the  congregation  of  the  church,  on  this  side  and  on  that:  he  with 
the  pastors,  who  are  after  him,  one  after  another,  delivers  the  flock  to 
Christ,  the  true  shepherd.  And  they  deliver  up  the  flock  saying  “Behold 
us  and  the  sons  Thou  hast  given  us  [Is.  8: 1 8]2  of  the  faith  which  Thou 
didst  teach  us.  Lo,  we  have  offered  them  before  Thee;  and  the  staff  of 
faith  with  which  we  have  ruled  them  is  this”:  -  And  he  begins  first  with 
the  true  faith;  and  then  the  whole  congregation  of  his  sons  with  him. 
That  is  to  say:  With  this  faith  I  have  taught  them  to  govern  themselves; 
and  lo,  they  shall  be  true  witnesses  to  themselves  and  to  me,  and  they 
shall  confess  the  true  word  of  faith  which  I  have  taught  them.  And  while 
those  within  say  (it),  those  without  answer  after  them3 :  forasmuch  as, 
though  in  fact4  those  within,  and  the  holy  ones  and  elect  are  of  more 
account,  yet  in  faith  they  are  (all)  equal.  And  when  Cephas  and  those 
with  him  indicate  the  confession,  rightly  do  all  those  who  have  made 
confession  of  his  truth  there  confess  collectively.  And  whatsoever  those 
who  are  within  commence,  those  without  seal.  And  thus  rightly  do  they 
shew  forth  the  confession  of  the  Father,  and  the  Son  who  joined  to  Him¬ 
self  a  man  who  is  from  us,  and  accomplished  in  him  the  dispensation5 : 
and  He,  the  same,  is  God  and  man,  in  two  natures  and  two  hypostases6 
(qenome).  And  (they  confess)  the  Holy  Spirit,  the  One  who  proceeds, 
and  one  church,  holy  and  apostolic.  And  they  seal  with  the  resurrection 
of  [our]  bodies. 

•Cf.  B  270, 1.30. 

^f.  p.75.  Nothing  similar  in  B  269f.;  the  speech  here  is  probably  ideal. 

3So  Narsai:  B  270  1L28-29  makes  the  priest  only  say  the  Creed. 

4Or,  ‘as  regards  action,  or  function’. 

5I.e.  that  relation  of  the  two  natures  which  it  is  right  to  confess:  the  word 
‘right’,  ‘straight’  practically  =  ‘orthodox*,  [the  Syr.  for  op0ro6o^o<; 
is  ‘rectae  gloriae’  (a  latin  translation  actually  found  in  Marius 

Mercator’s  version  of  one  of  Nestorius’  sermons  -  “rectam  fidei  gloriam’  - 
Loofs  Nestoriana  p.300, 1.18)]. 

6Note  of  editor:  the  exact  translation  of  u»oub  qnoma  is  not  hypostasis 
[parsopa]  but:  nature  in  the  concrete;  individual  nature  existing  by  itself, 
numerically  one,  separated  from  others,  substratum,  this  or  that  reality.  In 
Christ  are  2  qnome:  die  divine  Word,  and  the  human  qnoma  of  Jesus. 


77 


CHAPTER  18 


Diaconal  Proclamation  for  Catholici  (fol.  133r°) 

Why  the  deacon  here  approaches  the  door  of  the  apse;  and  why  he 
says,  “he  who  reads  the  “Apostle”;  and  why  four  deacons  draw  near 
to  the  altar,  two  from  this  side  and  two  from  that,  and  minister. 

Now  that  eveiything  as  far  as  the  judgment  and  retribution  has  been 
completed,  the  deacon  who  fills  the  place  of  Gabriel  [=  deacon  of  the 
Apostle]  draws  near,  inasmuch  as  he  holds  the  [New]  Testament.  That 
he  stands  in  the  door  of  the  apse  overagainst  the  king,  is  because  he  is 
the  steward  who  dispenses  before  the  master  of  the  house,  who  gives 
the  wages.  And  first  he  indicates  [lit.  ‘says’]  the  character  of  his  words. 

“Pray  you”,  he  says,  “that  peace  may  be  with  us”1 :  and  that  those 
who  are  first  may  not  be  filled  with  wrath,  according  to  the  parable  of 
the  king2 ,  and  be  angry  against  the  master  of  the  house,  thinking  that 
they  ought  to  receive  more;  and  that  envy  may  not  prevail,  if  there  be 
one  to  whom  mercy  is  shewn,  and  another  who  receives  according  to 
the  measure  of  his  labour.  For  this  disposition  is  justly  arranged  by 
the  mercy  of  the  master  of  the  house.  And  he  [the  deacon]  gives  man¬ 
sions  to  the  “bishops  and  the  presbyters  and  the  deacons  and  the 
youths”3  and  the  rest,  with  “our  sons  and  daughters”  and  “brothers” 
and  sisters  and  “fathers  who  are  deceased”,  and  the  “believing  kings”, 
who  were  the  last  to  come  to  the  vineyard.  Afterwards  to  the  “proph¬ 
ets”,  who  were  the  first  to  enter  the  vineyard;  and  to  the  “apostles  and 
martyrs”  who  (came)  after  them.  And  he  has  begun  with  the  last  and 
(come)  even  unto  the  first,  according  to  the  parable  of  our  Lord,  who 
said  to  His  steward,  “Call  the  workers,  and  give  them  their  hire;  and 
begin  from  the  last  and  (come)  even  unto  the  first”.  What  then? 


'Cf.  B271  1.19. 

"The  reference  is  here  to  the  parable  of  the  labourers. 

3r^na^^i.e.  the  choir  (?)  This  refers  to  the  diaconal  address  B  271  11.24ff. 
Note  of  the  editor:  the  word  for  choir  is  n^v^for  youth: 


78 


“This  oblation4  of  their  labours  receive,  Lord”,  he  entreats,  ac¬ 
cording  to  his  custom,  “and  sanctify  it  by  Thy  power;  and  shew  them 
an  open  face  and  make  them  to  partake  of  the  portion  and  inheritance 
of  the  saints.  And  we,  the  spiritual  ones,  may  we  be  partakers  with 
them;  and  may  there  be  to  us  in  Thy  judgment  help  and  salvation; 
and  make  us  to  rejoice  in  the  life  of  the  kingdom  of  the  grace  of  Thy 
Chnst  who  has  redeemed  us”.  The  other  deacons,  when  they  have  seen 
(fol.l33v°)  him  who  is  on  duty  draw  near,  run  also  to  minister;  and 
they  perform  their  office  until  the  Lord5  satisfies  (the  wish  of)6  them 
that  fear  Him.  And  the  cherubim  and  seraphim  stand  by  the  throne 
and  hover  (over)  and  soothe  the  king  by  their  ministry,  having  their 
faces  cast  down  and  not  daring  to  look  upon  Him. 

First  Gehanta 

The  bishop,  who  is  in  the  place  of  Cephas,  offers  prayer  for  his 
flock:  for  the  righteous  and  for  sinners7 :  and  he  “shuts  up  all  men  in 
disobedience,  that  the  mercy  of  God  may  be  done  upon  all”  [Rm.l  1 :32], 
shewing  that  our  nature  is  unworthy  to  draw  near  to  His  ministry8 . 
And  he  asks  for  mercy9  upon  himself  and  upon  his  flock.  And  he  con¬ 
cludes  his  prayer  with  an  open  voice10;  and  his  sons  of  his  flock  join 
their  prayer  with  him  by  the  seal  of  Ajnen.11 


4B  272  11.3-11. 

5I.e.  the  elements  on  the  altar. 

6The  word  v*.  means  to  satisfy,  acquiesce  in,  so  that  the  phrase  =  “until  the 
Lord  does  what  His  suppliants  ask”:  probably  referring  to  the  priest’s  ‘peti¬ 
tion'  (cf.  next  page). 

7This  evidently  refers  to  the  first  gehanta  of  ‘Addai  and  Mari’  (B  274  1.29  - 
‘albeit  we  are  sinners’).  Nothing  of  all  that  occurs  between  B  270  col.2  (after 
deacon’s  address)  and  274  1.27. 

“Cf.  B274  11.30-31. 

9Cf.  B274  1.31. 

10Cf.  B  274  1.36  (kanuna). 

nCf.  B  274  1.40. 


79 


Kiss  of  Peace 

And  he  signs  them  and  himself  with  the  sign  of  the  cross12 ,  as  is 
customary,  shewing  that  he  also,  like  them,  is  in  need  of  mercy.  When 
he  has  finished  the  petition  he  shews  them  the  sign  of  peace  and  mercy; 
and  he  utters  to  them  the  saying  which  our  Lord  used  to  His  disciples 
after  His  resurrection:  that  is,  “Peace  be  with  you”.13  And  they  pay 
the  interest  of  obedience,  as  obedient  sons14 .  Then  he  on  duty,  seeing 
that  the  prayer  of  Cephas  has  been  accepted,  and  that  he  has  used  peace 
with  his  flock,  announces  to  them:  Even  as  the  master  has  given  peace 
to  you,  do  you  sow  peace,  one  towards  another,  in  your  hearts,  and 
“give  the  peace  one  to  another  in  the  love  of  Christ”15 ;  and  as  you  have 
been  set  free  from  the  flesh  and  from  mortality,  loose  (from  you)  the 
things  that  belong  to  the  flesh,  and  leave  railing  one  against  another, 
that  now  you  may  see  the  book  of  the  First-Born16  who  has  been  wor¬ 
thy  to  enter  into  the  kingdom. 

Diptychs 

And  the  deacon  (who  is)  in  the  place  of  Gabriel  (fol.!34r°)  goes 
forth  first,  and  stands  on  the  right  side,  between  the  place  of  the  good 
and  of  the  weak  and  sinners;  and  he  commemorates  those  who  have 
been  summoned  to  the  kingdom,  and  read  their  names,  in  the  first  place 
mentioning  the  living,  whom  the  resurrection  shall  have  overtaken,  even 
those  who  are  in  this  life,  -  bishops  and  presbyters  and  deacons  and 
the  generality  of  the  church17 .  And  again  Michael,  the  earlier  gover¬ 
nor18  ,  comes  forth;  and  he  reads  the  saints  who  have  under  his  gover¬ 
norship  [=  OT  saints] 1Q  and  ministry,  whose  names  God  has  written. 


,2Cf.  B  274  1.39. 

,3Cf.  B  275  1.3. 

14Cf.  B  275  1.5  (=  “and  with  thee  and  with  thy  Spirit”). 

15Cf.  B  281  1.28  (after  the  diptychs:  whereas  here  it  is  before).  Narsai  also 
places  the  peace  before  the  diptychs. 

16I.e.  the  diptychs.  B  275-281. 

,7Cf.  B  275, 11.11-25. 

18I.e.  the  deacon  of  the  O.T. 

19Cf.  B  276, 11.1-8. 


80 


And  he  sets  in  order  first  the  fathers  of  nature20 ,  and  the  fathers  of  the 
promise21 ,  and  the  fathers  of  the  Law;  while  Gabnel  arranges  [=  reads 
an  order]  his  people  order  after  order,  with  him.  And  both  of  them  pro¬ 
ceed  [lit.  ‘come’]  with  a  list  (arranged)  according  to  priority  of  time. 
And  at  the  end  the  people  confess  collectively  the  whole  sum  of  them 
itogether.22 

But  it  remains  to  say  why  with  some  the  deacons  Gabriel  and 
Michael  together  recite  in  order  the  living  and  the  dead,  and  with  some 
Gabriel  alone  recites  the  living,  and  both  of  them  the  dead.  Those  with 
whom  Gabriel  recites  alone  say:  -  Those  who  have  been  sanctified  by 
the  New  T estament,  and  who  have  become  familiar  of  the  Lord  by  their 
faith  and  their  works,  -  these  let  Gabriel  recite,  who  is  entrusted  with 
their  testament;  and  let  not  Michael  mix  himself  up  with  him,  since 
this  testament  which  Gabriel  dispenses  is  more  exalted  that  the  charge 
of  Michael.  But  those  things  that  belong  to  Michael,  if  they  pertain  to 
nature,  -  Gabriel  also  has  authority  over  them  -  since  nature  is  one  - 
and  if  they  pertain  to  scripture,  the  Testament  of  which  Gabriel  is  dea¬ 
con  goes  along  with  this,  inasmuch  as  all  the  ancients  saw  the  Son  from 
afar,  and  longed  for  Him.  The  Son  did  not  long  for  the  Old  Testament: 
but  the  prophets  longed  to  see  Christ  and  His  time;  and  the  apostles 
did  not  long  to  see  the  time  of  the  prophets.  So  then  (fol.l34v°)  let 
Gabriel  represent  the  New  Testament,  and  let  both  of  them  take  part 
together;  and  let  not  Michael  be  deemed  worthy  to  come  forth  until 
gifts23  are  brought  for  those  who  pertain  to  Gabriel.  Just  as  he  does 
not  come  forth  to  the  bema  except  when  he  has  seen  that  those  have 
been  mentioned  who  belong  to  the  testament  which  he  administers  - 1 
mean  Abraham  and  Isaac  and  Israel  -  so  let  him  come  forth  here  until 
he  has  learned  that  those  who  belong  to  Gabriel  have  been  accepted. 


20I.e.  those  who  lived  before  Abraham. 

21I.e.  Abraham  to  Moses. 

22B  281,  11.24-25.  Cf.  p.82,  note  24  where  the  reference  is  the  same  as  here 
(to  the  people’s  response  at  end  of  diptychs). 

23I.e.  apparently,  their  commemoration  (cf.  p.82,  where  the  same  expression 
occurs). 


81 


Those  with  whom  both  of  them  recite  together  say:  -  As  Gabriel 
has  had  a  part  in  those  belonging  to  the  Old  Testament,  let  Michael  i 
also  have  a  part  in  those  of  the  New;  for  now  suspicions  and  doubts 
have  been  removed,  and  the  former  ones,  the  prophets,  and  the  latter 
ones,  the  apostles,  are  one  in  Christ;  and  both  Testaments  bear  the  same 
character.  And  though  one  was  given  as  it  were  to  children,  and  the 
other  to  full-grown  men,  -  yet  children  and  men  are  one  in  nature.  Man 
is  one  when  he  is  a  child  and  when  he  is  a  youth  and  an  old  man:  so 
let  us  not  make  a  difference  between  the  saints  of  Gabriel  and  those  of 
Michael.  And  the  idea  put  forward  by  both  parties  is  very  reasonable; 
but  the  first  ones  have  kept  the  right  rule,  because  they  have  proceeded 
in  the  natural  way. 

People’s  Response  after  Diptychs. 

And  Cephas  [=  bishop],  when  he  has  seen  that  the  gifts24  have  been 
given  out,  makes  petition  together  with  the  whole  community25  that  we 
may  partake  with  the  righteous,  -  and  sinners  also  who  have  believed; 
and  although  they  be  not  worthy  on  account  of  their  doings,  yet  for 
the  sake  of  the  Divine  mercy.  Then  they  proceed  together  in  common: 

-  “Yea  Lord,  let  this  petition  be  accepted  for  all  men26;  and  make  us 
all  worthy  of  Thy  kingdom'’.  And  they  include  in  it  [sc.  the  prayer] 
presbyters  and  deacons,  and  the  whole  covenant  of  the  faithful  who 
have  departed27  before  the  time  of  His  coming  and  (they  pray)  also 
for  all  things  that  they  need28  as  weak  men;  and  for  all  the  church  and 
(fol.l35r°)  her  sons,  that  she  may  appear  to  have  been  worthy  of  this 
communion217  of  good  things,  even  though  she  be  not  worthy.  And  for 
all  spiritual  and  corporeal  beings  may  this  our  petition  be  accepted, 
and  do  Thou,  Lord,  pardon  all  sinners. 


24Cf.  note  23. 

281, 11.24-25  (cf.  p.81,  note  22). 

~6Cf.  B  281, 1.30  -  282  1.2  to  which  what  follows  seems  to  refer,  though  it  is  in  no 
sense  a  paraphrase. 

27B  281,11.30-31. 

:8This  perhaps  refers  to  the  “crown  of  the  year”,  B  281, 1.33. 

"Cf.  B  ibid.  1.34. 


82 


CHAPTER  19 


Bows 

Why,  when  they  say  “We  believe”,  at  the  mention  of  Father  and 
Son  and  Spint  they  worship;  and  (why)  also  when  they  say  “And  for 
jiall”1 2,  and  “All  we”:  they  worship  again  towards  the  altar  and  one 
another.  Because  by  this  faith  they  have  been  made  worthy  to  inherit 
I  life,  and  (also)  through  their  confession  of  the  Father  and  Son  and  Spirit, 
when  Their  name  is  mentioned  they  worship,  rendering  thanks  that  He 
has  held  them  worthy  that  by  this  holy  Name  they  should  live.  They 
render  thanks  also  to  one  another,  inasmuch  as  they  have  been  made 
of  one  mind,  fixed  by  the  agreement  of  [=  expressed  in]  this  confes¬ 
sion:  and  they  say  thus:3  -  “We  confess  and  worship  Thee,  God,  the 
•Father  of  truth,  who  wast  pleased  to  fashion  us  in  the  beginning,  and 
when  we  sinned  didst  redeem  us  by  Thy  beloved  Son  -  a  Nature  which 
as  from  Thee  [=  who  is  of  Thy  Nature],  and  the  image  of  Thine  Es¬ 
sence  [Hb.l:3  Peschitta]  -  who  joined  to  Himself  a  man  of  our  race, 
and  dwelt  in  Him,  and  made  for  us  in  Him  a  renewal  and  life”.  And 
again:  “Blessed  are  the  mediations  who  were  sent  to  us  by  Thee,  who 
in  their  net  have  bought  us  nigh  to  this  association  with  Thy  majesty. 
Let  not  our  faith  be  vain,  even  though  it  be  without  works.  And  we 
also,  a  blessed  congregation,  who  have  been  renewed  by  the  resurrec¬ 
tion,  from  whom  thoughts  of  inconstancy  have  passed  away,  let  us  be 
at  once  in  love  and  harmony,  becbming  all  of  us  one  body  in  Christ; 
and  let  us  love  one  another  as  members  one  of  another”.  And  at  (the 
mention  of)  the  Son  also  they  say:  Blessed  is  Thy  coming  to  us,  who 
hast  renewed  us  by  Thy  dispensation  and  converted  us  and  redeemed 
us  from  death  and  made  for  us  all  one  true  body,  and  art  Thyself  our 
head”.  And:  -  “Blessed  is  the  power  of  the  Spirit,  who  has  sanctified 
the  spiritual  womb  (of  baptism)4  and  begotten  us  and  made  us 


'B  281,1.30. 

2B  293, 1.27  (deacon’s  part). 

3The  speeches  which  follow  appear  to  be  purely  ideal. 

4A  common  Syr.  idea. 


(fol.  1 3 5v°)  one  new  and  holy  lump,  which  is  worthy  to  inherit  the  heav¬ 
enly  good  things,  and  understands  all  the  honourable  things  that  have 
been  given  to  it”.  And  also  at  “the  resurrection  of  our  bodies”  (they 
say):  “Let  us  worship  Him  who  has  raised  us  up,  and  (let  us  worship) 
towards  one  another  who  have  been  brought  into  harmony  in  one  man¬ 
sion  together”. 

And  again  (at  the  words)  “For  all”,  “and  “All  we”  (let  us  wor¬ 
ship);  for  thus,  one  for  the  sake  of  another,  and  by  prayers  one  for 
another,  we  shall  become  heirs  of  the  good  things  of  the  kingdom. 
Wherefore  let  us  render  an  obeisance  [matoniya,  bow,  fiexocvoia]  to 
God  and  to  each  other,  and  let  us  understand  the  greatness  of  the  grace 
that  has  been  given  to  us;  for  the  yoke  of  the  slavery  of  the  flesh  has 
been  lifted  from  us,  and  we  are  become  spiritual  by  the  resurrection; 
and  we  have  known  the  power  of  the  Creator,  and  how  and  why,  through 
these  changes,  He  has  raised  us  up.  For  this  cause  we  offer  worship  to 
the  altar  and  to  one  another,  treating  the  altar  as  the  throne  of  God. 


84 


CHAPTER  20 

Deacon’s  proclamation  before  Anaphora  (‘Let  us  all  confess’  etc.) 

Why  he  [the  deacon]  says  now  that  the  “priest”  approaches;  and 
why  he  says  now  that  he  offers  the  oblation  of  such  an  one;  and  what 
signal  does  the  deacon  make  when  he  approaches  the  door  of  the  apse; 
and  all  things  that  are  here  observed  do  Thou  declare  to  me. 

All  things  having  been  completed  which  were  observed  from  the 
beginning  of  the  world  up  to  the  judgment  and  the  enjoyment  (of 
heaven):  now  that  this  (part  of  the)  celebration  is  finished,  the  priest 
comes  that  he  may  fill  up  completely  this  celebration  of  the  dispensa- 
tion,  and  that  those  things  which  in  the  other  offices  were  transacted 
symbolically  may  now  be  fully  known:  And  as  in  the  things  touching 
Adam  the  things  of  Christ  were  hinted  at,  and  mysteries  of  the  same 
things  were  enacted  in  connection  with  Noah,  (fol.l36r°)  and  thirdly 
in  connection  with  Abraham,  and  further  in  connection  with  Moses  and 
the  line  of  prophets,  and  then  (these  things)  were  mystically  fulfilled 
in  Christ  -  (but)  are  to  be  actually  perfected  in  the  end  of  time:  so  did 
we  also  mystically  represent  the  dispensation:  as  it  were  with  Adam 
at  the  evening  service,  with  Noah  and  Abraham  at  the  night  service, 
with  the  prophets  at  the  morning  service;  and  in  the  Mysteries  up  to 
this  point  we  have  represented  the  dispensation  of  Christ.  Now  finally 
(we  represent)  that  which  is  to  be.  And  according  as  one  is  of  more 
account  than  another,  so  do  we  shew  honour  to  one  more  than  to  an¬ 
other.  At  the  evening  service,  wherein  we  represented  the  things  of 
Adam,  we  also  shewed  forth  the  creation  of  the  world.  At  the  night 
service,  in  connection  with  Noah  and  Abraham,  we  toiled  with  greater 

labour,  according  to  the  length  of  the  life  of  Noah,  which  reached  as 

r  < 

far  as  Abraham.  At  the  morning  service*  according  as  the  prophets  rose 
up  rapidly  one  after  another,  so  did  we  set  the  psalms  one  after  an- 

*1 

other.  In  the  coming  of  our  Lord,  because  John  was  the  prelude  to  this, 
so  at  the  beginning  of  the  service  of  the  Mysteries  we  commence  with 
the  seventh  Marmitha  with  its  proper  chant,  which  signifies  the  com¬ 
ing  of  John;  and  thus  we  honour  the  mystery  which  belongs  to  this 


85 


service  [=  early  part  of  Mysteries]  more  than  the  former  ones,  inas¬ 
much  as  Christ  is  superior  to  those  who  were  before  Him. 

But  now  that  we  have  filled  up  the  glory  of  this  [service:  -  sc.  the 
early  part  of  Mysteries],  we  proceed  to  depict  an  image  of  the  reality 
that  is  to  be  revealed.  But  whereas  in  this  world  we  employ  words  and 
sentences  in  our  praise,  all  our  symbolizing  (thus  far)  was  celebrated 
at  once  with  the  sounds  of  words  and  sentences.  Now,  however,  that 
we  are  rising  from  the  graves,  we  have  no  need  of  words,  neither  of 
names:  but  then  [sc.  in  the  resurrection]  we  shall  know  even  as  we  are 
known,  according  to  the  saying  of  blessed  Paul:  “Now”,  he  says,  “I 
have  known  in  part:  Then  I  shall  know  even  as  I  am  known.  Now  we 
see  by  a  mystery  in  parables,  but  then  face  to  face”  [1  Co.  13: 12]. 

And  so,  because  from  the  beginning  he  [i.e.  Isho’Yabh]  was  cel¬ 
ebrating  this  (present)  dispensation,  up  to  this  point  in  all  the  prayers 
he  who  prays  or  reads  or  sits  has  been  styled  either  “presbyter”  or 
“bishop”;  but  now  the  name  of  presbyter  and  bishop  has  been  taken 
away,  and  he  [=  the  celebrant]  is  called  “the  priest”.  Because  now  the 
Priest,  (fol.l36v°)  Christ,  fulfils  His  ministry,  the  name  of  presbyter 
and  bishop  is  removed:  “for  he  is  pnest  and  pontiff’,  says  blessed 
Ephraim,  “and  He  it  is  that  offers  and  accepts,  also  consecrates”.  Now 
then,  “the  pnest”  approaches,  and  with  him  also  the  deacon:  that  Gabnel 
may  shew  his  [the  pnesf  s]  honour,  and  that  he  [the  priest]  may  say 
the  things  that  are  required. 

In  two  matters  did  this  blessed  man  [Isho’Yabh]  honour  this  part 
of  the  service  [lit.  ‘this  dispensation1]:  in  the  first  place  he  called  him 
who  approaches  “the  priest”;  secondly,  in  that  the  wording1  of  the  serv¬ 
ice  is  of  one  (kind),  and  is  not  (composed)  of  mixed  expressions2  from 
this  and  that  testament,  or  from  this  and  that  scripture,  such  as  were 
employed  in  [services  signifying  things  of]  the  present  world3 .  Corre- 

1  r^\o  3r\  > 

3lt  is  not  meant  that  Scripture  is  no  longer  quoted,  but  that  anthems  etc., 

composed  entirely  of  Scripture  are  not  used  in  this  central  portion  of  the 
liturgy. 


86 


spondmg  to  a  division  of  members  (of  the  body)  and  divided  minds,  so 
was  the  disposition  of  our  service  [hitherto]4 ;  but  after  we  have  be¬ 
come  all  of  one  mind  and  one  thought  and  one  soul,  the  conductor  of 
our  service  is  one,  and  he  speaks  from  one  mouth,  that  is  with  [=  em¬ 
ploying]  an  anaphora  which  is  of  one  person5 .  And  the  deacon  also 
does  not  now  make  use  of  those  former  (expressions);  but  seeing  that 
the  king  [=  the  pnest]  has  drawn  nigh  to  administer  the  service  him¬ 
self,  and  not  through  mediators,  he  changes  his  phrase.  He  approaches 
as  usual,  and  worships  as  a  slave.  He  does  not  say  “Peace”,  or  “Let 
us  pray”.  And  why  should  we  pray?  It  is  needless.  Because  he  has 
arrived  at  the  place  of  peace6  he  does  not  even  mention  peace,  for  lo, 
the  Lord  of  peace  is  performing  the  service;  but  he  commences  with 
an  address  which  teaches  a  new  state  of  things;  and  as  being  himself 
associated  with  us,  he  shews  and  says:  -  “Let  us  confess  and  make 
request  and  beseech  the  Lord,  all  of  us,  purely  and  with  groaning”  [= 
contritely]7 .  We  do  not  know,  O  you  hearers,  as  formerly,  depict  mys¬ 
teries:  for  then  there  was  place  for  forgiveness  of  sin,  (fol.l37r°)  and 
even  if  we  had  spoken  with  minds  disordered,  perchance  God  would 
have  pardoned  us.  But  now  our  minds  are  purified,  and  inconstancy 
has  passed  away  from  us  and  from  you,  and  you  have  been  set  free 
from  death. 

So  then  pray  “purely  and  with  groaning  beseech”8 ;  for  great  in  truth 
is  this  mystery  which  is  being  enacted,  and  according  to  its  greatness, 
so  is  your  fear,  “serve  Him  with  fear”  [Ps.2:2];  “with  groaning”  also, 
because  He  is  merciful,  and  will  not  withhold  His  mercy.  And  moreo- 

4I.e.  apparently,  many  took  part  in  it:  cf.  reading  of  Scripture  and  the  long 
diaconal  litanies:  now  the  priest  is  practically  the  only  minister  of  impor¬ 
tance. 

reason  lit.  “with  an  offering  of  the  oblation  [=  Syriac 

for  anaphora  or  canon]  of  one  person:  i.e.  he  uses  a  form  of  anaphora  ...  in 
the  1st  person  singular.  See  p.93. 

6This  perhaps  means  that  the  pax  has  already  been  given  in  the  congrega¬ 
tion. 

7B  282  1.7.  What  follows  is  imaginary. 

8B  282  11.9-10. 


87 


ver  “stand  with  a  fair  standing”9 ,  and  “look”  with  the  eyes  of  your 
hearts  “on  all  things  that  are  now  being  done”,  and  know  their  great¬ 
ness.  And  what  are  they,  O,  spiritual  one  [=  deacon],  who  hast  filled 
our  heart  with  terror?  “The  awful  Mysteries”,  he  says,  are  being  con¬ 
secrated”10.  “It  is  an  exceeding  fearful  thing  [lit.:  “an  exceeding  great 
fear”]  to  fall  into  the  hands  of  the  living  God”,  says  the  blessed  apos¬ 
tle.  Now  also  “the  awful  Mysteries  are  being  consecrated”:  it  is  just 
that  we  should  fear,  tremble  and  be  affrighted.  Let  us  not  be  negligent, 
for  we  are  standing  before  the  King:  “the  wrath  of  a  king  is  (as)  an¬ 
gels  of  death”,  says  the  wise  man.  “Lest  He  be  wrath  and  destroy  us” 
[Ps.2: 12],  let  us  not  refuse  to  weep:  even  though  it  be  not  with  the  voice, 
lest  He  be  stirred  up  against  us.  Let  us  “kiss  the  Son,  lest  He  be  an¬ 
gry”  says  blessed  David  [Ps.2: 12];  and  if  He  angry  “You  shall  perish 
from  His  way”,  for  “if  His  anger  bum  He  will  destroy;  but  if  He  be 
pacified  "blessed  are  all  they  that  trust  on  Him”.  Wherefore  you  also 
do  so.  And  who  is  it  that  consecrates?  Tell  us,  O  spiritual  one.  “The 
priest”,  Christ,  “has  drawn  nigh  to  pray,  that  by  His  mediation  peace 
may  be  multiplied  to  you”11 .  Be  not  then  neglectful:  if  God  has  let 
Himself  down,  and  put  on  your  body,  and  sanctified  this  and  deified 
[cTDcrAr^o]  it,  and  has  sat  on  the  right  hand  and  entreats  for  you,  be  you 
encouraged,  and  “lift  up  your  heads,  for  your  redemption  is  at  hand” 
[Lk.21:28].  “Be  you  strengthened  in  our  Lord  and  in  the  might  of  His 
power”  [Eph.6:10],  for  peace  is  being  multiplied  unto  you.  But  what? 
“Bend  your  eyes  down”12,  and  humble  yourselves,  as  men  to  whom 
good  hath  been  done,  though  they  were  unworthy.  See  that  the  Creator 
has  been  reconciled  to  you,  although  your  sins  were  multiplied:  for 
indeed  you  were  deserving  of  great  evil;  but  our  God,  who  is  rich  in 
His  mercy,  has  redeemed  you  by  His  Son,  and  has  lifted  you  up  to 
Himself  Wherefore,  because  you  have  been  treated  with  favour,  “bend 

9B  282  1.10. 

I0B  282  1.12  “in  the  fearful  mysteries  which  are  being  hallowed”.  Narsai 
[p.10],  as  George,  makes  it  the  principal  sentence:  “The  dread  Mysteries,  lo, 
are  being  consecrated”. 

nB  282  11.14-19. 

12B  282  1.17. 


88 


your  eyes  down”;  and  because  you  have  been  lifted  up  “stretch  your 
mind  to  heaven”13 .  Since  you  have  been  lifted  up  spiritually,  let  your 
thoughts  be  spiritually  uplifted;  and  “watchfully  and  diligently  beseech 
and  supplicate”14  God.  “Watchfully”,  for  as  much  as  you  have  been 
rid  of  mortality,  and  are  become  companions  of  the  watchers  [=  an¬ 
gels];  “diligently”,  since  with  diligence  the  Creator  has  visited  you. 
“Make  request”  of  [or  “seek”]  Him,  because  He  has  made  request  of 
[or  “sought’]  you;  “beseech”  Him,  because  He  has  come  down  to  you 
unmasked.  “And  let  no  man  dare  to  speak”15 .  And  why?  Because  speech 
has  been  taken  away  from  you,  and  silence  also:  you  are  become  as 
the  angels:  copy  them:  You  have  been  made  like  to  the  spiritual  ones: 
You  shall  not  speak;  but  if  you  pray  imitate  them.  You  shall  not  re¬ 
main  without  prayer,  since  even  the  spiritual  ones  pray.  You  shall  not 
pray  with  speech,  lest  you  become  strangers  to  their  assembly.  And  in 
silence  [or  “stillness”]  and  fear  be  standing”.16  In  silence  [or  “stillness”], 
because  there  is  no  motion  in  the  world  to  come:  “in  fear”,  because 
God  is  judge  [Ps.75:7]:  fear  Him  and  tremble  at  His  laws. 

And  when  the  blessed  one  [=  deacon]  addresses  the  people  with 
these  (words)  then  he  adds  also  the  customary  expression  that  he  may 
not  be  strange  and  be  unheard:  but  “Peace  be  with  us”17 ,  he  says,  not 
“Let  us  pray,  peace”:  for  now  that  Peace  is  with  us  concerning  which 
He  is  come,  even  the  Redeemer  of  all.  If  he  has  said  (lit.  says)  “by  His 
(fol.l38r°)  mediation  peace  be  multiplied  unto  you”,18  what  should  he 
pray  now  but  “Peace  be  with  us”?  And  you  shall  not  have  need  of  a 
petition,  because  peace,  the  Lord  of  peace  is  with  us.  God  has  come 
and  invited  us;  He  has  “healed  the  broken  of  heart”,  and  has  “:bound 
up  their  sicknesses”.  But  what  does  the  priest  do  -  he  who  has  been 
entrusted  as  a  steward  on  behalf  of  his  flock?  He  acquiesces  in  the 


13Ibid.  1.18. 

14Ibid.  1.20. 

15B  282  1.22. 

,6Ibid.  1.25. 

17B  282  1.26. 

18Ibid.  1.16.  (words  in  the  diaconal  address,  commented  on  just  before). 


saying  (of  the  deacon),  and  does  not  estrange  himself  from  the  com¬ 
mand,  and  does  not  become  obstinate  of  persuasion;  but  he  “draws  nigh, 
that  peace  may  be  through  his  mediation”19;  and  he  shews  a  fair  be¬ 
ginning  of  his  way. 

But  the  veil20  is  removed  before  him:  whereas  the  mystery  of  the 
kingdom  has  been  revealed,  he  is  become  heir  of  heaven  and  earth,  and 
he  knows  the  mansions21  that  have  been  prepared.  Clearly  he  is  not  a 
stranger  to  the  mysteries:  so  that  he  should  not  be  removed  from  the 
kingdom22 .  He  has  come  and  made  ready,  and  the  mansions  have  been 
revealed.  He  worships  before  the  altar  for  a  symbol  that  Christ  also  in 
His  manhood  “spent  the  night  in  the  prayer  of  God”  [Lk.6:12].  But 
after  this,  what?  The  deacons  take  up  their  ministry:  the  cherubim  with 
wings  [sc.  fans],  the  seraphim  with  lights:  for  some  of  them  take  fans 
like  the  cherubim,  and  some  of  them  lights  like  the  seraphim;  and  they 
surround  the  altar,  and  shew  honour  to  the  priests  and  the  oblation.  As 
slaves  they  minister  to  the  Master,  Christ,  the  Priest  and  Pontiff  who 
has  appeared  in  the  world.  And  they  shew  the  character  of  their  serv¬ 
ice:  for  a  deacon  approaches  the  door  of  the  apse,  to  the  middle  place 
between  heaven  and  earth23 .  And  the  presbyter  also  who  reads  [=  the 
reader  of]  the  Gospel,  prepares  himself  [or  “holds  himself  ready”]  for 
the  offering  of  the  oblation  [or  “anaphora”24];  and  he  receives  the 
thurible;  and  he  is  blessed  by  the  prelate  [lit.  ‘head’  =  bishop],  that  he 
may  not  have  the  authority  of  himself.  Even  Christ  was  sometime  bap¬ 
tized  by  John. 


19Ibid.  11.14,15. 

20Shoshepa,  the  veil  over  the  oblation.  See  B  282  1.20  (col. 2). 

2 'As  observed  earlier,  George  compares  the  eucharistic  elements  to  the  heav¬ 
enly  mansions  promised  to  the  saints. 

22I.e.  apparently,  by  having  the  oblation  covered  before  him. 

23I.e.  probably,  Paradise,  =  the  KaxaaKpcofia. 

~4See  p.87,  note  5  (rC A=ncvo  _^iarA).  See  B  282  11.28,29.  S  alters  the  sense  by 
reading  “deacon”,  tor  “Christ”  to  “and  as  a  deacon  he  for  I 

the  second  time  takes  the  thurible”:  but  what  follows  implies  that  the  presby¬ 
ter  represents  Christ  -  this  is  in  accord  with  the  author’s  symbolism. 


90 


CHAPTER  21 


.  “Gratia  Domini  nostri”  and  “Sursum  Corda” 

Why  the  priest  now  says  the  Canon  (fol.J38v°)  “The  grace”  and 
he  things  that  now  (follow).  The  priest,  having  consented  to  become 
he  representative  [lit:  “likeness”  of  his  Lord,  shews  forth  (his)  obedi¬ 
ence:  and  those  things  that  the  deacon,  Gabriel,  has  proclaimed,  he 
ihews  fully:  -  “The  grace”,  he  says,  “of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  and 
he  love  of  God  the  Father,  and  the  communion  of  the  Spirit  be  with 
is  all”1 .  That  is  to  say,  in  the  first  place:  -  Peace  is  not  perfected,  save 
i  vhen  the  grace  of  the  Trinity  is  (given):  for  neither  did  Christ  do  any- 
1  ine  of  those  things  that  were  due  to  our  nature  without  the  will  of  the 
Trinity.  Wherefore  “peace”2  should  come  before  “grace”;  smce,  if  there 
i  s  no  peace  there  is  no  grace;  and  “grace”3  comes  before  “peace”;  be- 
j  jause  grace  first  shews  favour,  and  then  peace  comes.  “And  the  love 
i  )f  God  the  Father”:  for  when  Christ  fulfilled  grace,  He  fulfilled  it  by 
|  he  love  of  God  the  Father.  And  there  is  one  will  in  the  whole  Trinity; 

I  3ut  the  descent4 5  is  by  grace;  the  good  pleasure  [or  ‘consent’]  of  the 
I  Father  is  by  love;  and  the  communicating  of  completeness  is  through 
I  :he  descent  of  the  Spirit.  And  thus  when  the  Father  willed  our  redemp- 
I  :ion,  it  was  not  accomplished  until  the  Son  consented  and  came  down; 
i  and  when  the  Son  came  down  and  visited  us  by  His  dispensation,  our 
l  redemption  was  not  perfected  save  by  the  descent  of  the  Holy  Spirit, 
who  was  communicated  to  the  apostles  and  taught  them  the  things  of 


1  ;,B  p.283, 1.4. 

« 

deferring  to  the  deacon’s  remark  at  the  end  of  the  diaconal  address  just 
I  before  (B  282  1.26).  The  text  here  has  the  order  “grace  ...  peace”:  but  the 
I  above  is  the  order  required  by  the  context. 

3This  evidently  refers  to  the  “Peace  be  with  us”  after  “t  is  meet  and  right”,  B 
283  1.20.  So  the  Canon:  “The  grace”  etc.  has  a  “peace”  before  and  after  it: 
that  is  evidently  the  meaning. 

4I.e.  the  descent  of  the  Son  at  the  incarnation:  does  George  also  think  of  a 
descent  of  the  Son  in  the  eucharist?  It  would  seem  so. 

5I.e.  with  ‘Amen’:  B  283  1.8. 


91 


the  Son:  even  as  He  said:  “He  shall  put  you  in  remembrance  of  all  that 
I  say  to  you,  and  He  shall  teach  you  the  truth”  [Jo.  14:26].  And  if  this 
truth  is  not  shewn  forth  by  the  Trinity,  it  is  then  idle  that  at  His  bap¬ 
tism  the  Father  cried  out  from  on  high,  and  the  Spirit  came  down  like 
the  body  of  a  dove  [Lk.3:22  Peschitta  version],  and  the  Son  was  bap¬ 
tized  and  accomplished  His  dispensation. 

When  the  people  have  concurred  in  the  will  of  the  priest5  and  his 
command,  according  to  what  he  has  said  to  them,  associating  them  (with 
himself)6,  then  he  shews  forth  another  utterance:  -  Now,  O  mortals, 
(fol.l39r°)  that  you  have  become  partakers  in  the  human  passions  of 
the  Son,  and  have  believed  His  dispensation,  which  is  on  your  behalf, 
you  have  been  lifted  up  aloft.  And  indeed  to  this  end  He  came,  that  He 
might  lift  up  you  up.  Be  strengthened,  be  encouraged,  rejoice  in  the 
Lord;  praise  Him  and  confess  to  Him;  lift  up  your  treasures  into  heaven, 
where  neither  moth  nor  rust  corrupteth:  “aloft  “  then,  and  on  high  your 
minds  be7 .  Where  the  whole  abide  is  pure,  and  the  dwellers  thereof 
are  glorious  -  where  the  angels  in  the  awful  place  cease  not  from  fly¬ 
ing  and  honouring  the  nature  of  the  Godhead,  and  with  plaudits  [Syr. 
hullalle]  praise  and  sing  to  His  Majesty,  and  with  pleasant  utterances 
[r^uLA=>  r^K^icn]  with  honour  please  the  Lord  -  there,  as  men  who  have 
been  shaken  free  of  death  and  have  become  companions  of  the  spir¬ 
itual  beings  [let  your  minds  be]”8 .  Behold  I  have  gone  and  I  go  before 
you  and  prepare  a  place;  wherefore  in  purity  and  holiness  come  and 
approach  the  mysteries;  and  when  you  have  seen  them  on  earth,  con¬ 
sider  that  they  are  in  heaven;  and  “there  in  heaven  let  your  minds  be”.9 


6I.e.  by  saying  “be  with  us”. 

7B  283  1.10. 

8This  is  clearly  taken  either  from  the  Liturgy  of  .‘Theodore’  or  that  of 
‘Nestorius’  [‘Theodore’  and  ‘Nestorius’  agree  here],  which  are  alone  in  hav¬ 
ing  a  very  long  and  elaborate  Sursum  Corda.  But  it  wiill  presently  appear 
that  this  expanded  form  was  not  in  the  liturgy  commented  on  by  George  (cf. 
next  footnote);  so  that  it  is  only  utilized  here  by  way  of  commentary. 

9The  sursum  corda  in  ‘Theodore’  and  ‘Nestorius’  ends  “let  there  your  minds 
be”  (cf.  previous  footnote). 


92 


And  the  people,  as  sons  of  the  household  of  the  faith,  assent  to  the 
saying  of  the  true  pastor  who,  (chosen)  from  them,  has  been  appointed 
mediator.  And  they  answer  him:  -  Truly,  as  thou  hast  commanded,  (so) 
will  we  do.  And  as  he  said  “aloft”10,  and  did  not  explain11 ,  then  they, 
as  knowing  the  truth  and  perfect,  say  whither  “aloft”:  that  is:  -  “Unto 
Thee,  the  God  of  Abraham  and  Isaac”12  and  the  rest;  as  much  as  to 
say:  We  know  the  meaning  of  what  thou  hast  asked  of  us,  though  thou 
has  not  explained  to  us.  And  lo,  we  have  been  lifted  up  unto  Him  who 
is  eternally  alone:  and  He  is  the  God  of  the  first  and  the  last.  And  though 
He  has  made  a  change  of  laws  according  to  the  (acquirements  of)  our 
education,  yet  He  is  not  changed;  and  as  a  father  who  loves  his  sons 
He  also  educates  us  from  law  to  law.  And  He  also  who  has  given  us 
the  New  Covenant  is  the  God  of  the  former  fathers.  (fol.l39v°) 

And  the  priest  seeing  that  the  sons  are  become  obedient  to  him, 
and  have  been  lifted  up  in  thought,  forthwith  reveals  to  them  concern¬ 
ing  his  ministry  also:  -  Now  that  you  are  in  heaven,  know  that  “this 
oblation  is  offered  to  God”  by  the  hand  of  a  mediator,  a  son  of  your 
race13 .  And  the  people  duly  and  gladly  say  with  him:  Very  justly  is 
this  oblation  performed  if  to  Him  it  is  (offered),  and  “it  is  meet  and 
right”14 .  But  what  next? 


,0Cf.  infra  p.l  18. 

"This  shows  that  the  utilization  of  ‘Theodore’  or  ‘Nestorius’  above  was  only 
by  way  of  commentary,  as  in  those  liturgies  it  is  fully  explained  where  “aloft” 

is  (cf.  chap. 25,  fol.150  r,  begin.). 

,2B  283, 1.12. 

,3B  283, 1.15. 

14Ibid.  1.17. 


93 


CHAPTER  22 


Deacon:  -’’peace  be  with  us”. 

Why  now  the  deacon  in  the  bema  says  “Peace  be  with  us”;  and 
(why)  he  (Isho’ Yabh)  does  not  say  that  the  deacon  who  made  the  proc¬ 
lamation1  says  (this);  while  we  say  that  the  deacon  who  made  the  proc¬ 
lamation  says  (it). 

Glory  to  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord  -  how  wise  He  has  made  this  blessed 
man  [Isho’  Yabh]  to  depict  a  fair  image  of  this  ministry!  What  then? 
“The  deacon  in  the  bema  says  'Peace  be  with  us’.”2  But  let  us  examine 
first  why  he  does  not  say  that  the  deacon  goes  to  the  bema  and  then  says 
“Peace”,  -  as  everywhere  else  he  has  said  “the  deacon  ascends”,  and  the 
like:  but  here  “the  deacon  in  the  bema”.  This  is  Michael,  who  still  sits 
outside  [or  “beyond”  the  apse,  as  he  sat  at  the  feet  of  Jesus  in  the  tomb. 
But  when  Michael  has  heard  that  the  God  who  is  proclaimed  is  He  of 
Whom  he  himself  spoke  to  Moses,  he  runs  in  haste  to  Jerusalem  [= 
bema]  wherein  he  taught  His  laws,  and  announces  to  the  people  of  the 
Old  Testament  peace  and  tranquillity:  as  who  should  day,  Be  encour¬ 
aged,  O  fathers  of  the  Law,  for  this  Christ  is  He  whom  I  was  preaching 
to  you  in  His  Godhead.  And  He  has  taken  a  garment  [=  body]  from  you, 
and  He  has  substituted  (new)  commandments,  such  as  are  suitable  for 
you;  and  lo,  He  has  made  (this)  known  to  us,  inasmuch  as  He  is  “the 
God  of  Abraham  and  Isaac  and  of  Jacob”.3  Wherefore  arise  in  the  might 
of  our  God;  and  also  lift  up  your  heads  and  stand  up  in  the  (fol .  140r°) 
freedom  of  the  New  (Testament),  and  be  not  bowed  down  any  move 
under  the  yoke  of  the  Law.  This  is  the  Messiah,  whose  name  I  continu¬ 
ally  declared  to  the  prophets  when  I  was  in  charge. 

And  he  [Isho’Yabh]  did  not  say  that  the  deacon  went,  inasmuch  as 
Michael  has  not  deserted  the  appointed  canon  of  his  ministry.  And  he 
appears  continually  with  Gabriel:  he  was  with  him  at  the  birth;  and 

'This  refers  to  the  address  “Let  us  all"  (B  282,  1.7)  which  was  made  by 
“Gabriel”,  (cf.  earlier) 

2B  283,  1.20. 

3B  283,  1.12. 


94 


when  our  Lord  vanquished  Satan;  he  was  with  him  when  they  came  and 
ministered  to  our  Lord;  and  at  the  resurrection  he  was  with  him.  Where¬ 
fore  it  is  unnecessary  to  say  that  he  goes  up  to  the  bema,  since  he  has  not 
actually  departed  from  it.* * 4  And  lo,  although  with  us  the  deacon  who 
makes  the  proclamation5  says  this  “Peace”,  yet  as  I  have  already  said, 
the  blessed  [Isho’Yabh]  in  all  thins  that  he  sets  forth  proclaims  some 
type  of  the  kingdom,  without  being  careful  that  everything  that  he  has 
said  should  be  fully  carried  out  without  addition  or  diminution.  And 
when  the  two  angels,  Gabriel  and  Michael,  stand  up  and  announce  in 
the  world  what  is  due,  -  I  mean,  making  preparation  for  him  [=  the 
priest],  then  he  begins  the  glorious  service. 


Evidently  the  other  deacon  -  who  made  the  address  just  before  the  Sursum 

Corda,  ending  with  “peace  be  with  us”  (B  p.282, 1.26)  is  supposed  to  be  still 

in  the  bema. 

5B  282  11.7ff. 


95 


CHAPTER  23 


First  gehanta 

Why  the  priest  now  begins  quietly  [=  secretly],  and  what  this 
gehanta1  signifies.  This  gehanta  signifies  the  Old  Dispensation,  and 
the  first  creation,  because  the  people  have  said  to  him  [the  priest]  that 
“to  the  God  of  Abraham”  their  minds  were  uplifted;  and  Michael  also 
announced  to  the  sons  of  the  Law  the  Gospel  of  peace.  As  indicating2 
that:  I  am  He  who  was  spoken  of  from  of  old,  and  who  am  come  forth 
from  God,  and  have  gathered  you  unto  Him:  He  [the  priest]  begins  to 
shew  how  He  also  created  creation  from  nothing3 ;  and  how  He  ap¬ 
pointed  to  it  the  spiritual  beings  as  ministers;  and  how  He  created  the 
old  man;  and  how  He  created  him  without  a  law,  and  then  introduced 
him  to  the  Law,  and  shewed  him  (fol.J40v°)  also  concerning  his  reno¬ 
vation  [lit.  “change”],  making  known  the  greatness  of  His  goodness; 
who,  when  He  was  attended  and  applauded  by  angels,  was  not  indif¬ 
ferent  to  the  ruin  of  Adam’s  house.  And  whereas  two  prophets  shewed 
that  He  is  praised  by  the  spiritual  beings,  - 1  mean  Isaiah  and  Daniel: 
Isaiah  (saying):  “I  saw  the  Lord  sitting  on  a  high  throne,  and  sera¬ 
phim  standing  over  it”,  and  the  rest;  Daniel  saying,  “A  thousand  thou¬ 
sands  stand  before  Him  and  ten  thousand  times  ten  thousand  minis¬ 
ters  unto  Him”  -  so  the  priest,  Christ,  shews  now  the  glory  of  God 
Most  High:  that,  as  the  former  prophets  said,  so  He  is;  and  that  when 
He  had  no  need  of  creation  He  created  it,  that  it  might  possess  beauty. 
And  this  is  known  from  the  fact  that  when  He  had  no  need  to  be  united 
with  our  nature,  He  emptied  Himself  for  our  sake  and  took  our  form, 
and,  though  He  was  God,  was  found  in  the  form  of  men,  and  was  in 
fashion  a  men.  Wherefore,  that  I  may  shew  you  His  mercy  and  His 


'Gehanta  originally  meant  a  bowing  of  the  body  (It  is  so  by  Narsai  -  Liturgi¬ 
cal  Homilies  of  Narsai  p.  22:  “two  bows”).  Later  it  came  to  have  the  techni¬ 
cal  meaning  of  a  secret  prayer  -  probably  said  bowing. 

2This  refers  to  the  priest  (impersonating  Christ). 

3cf.  B  283  1.32  -  284  1.5.  But  George’s  analysis  of  the  Preface  would  lead  us 
to  think  that  his  text  was  considerably  longer  than  that  in  B.  Yet  he  often 
expands  greatly,  and  perhaps  his  Preface  =  that  in  B;  c.  later  where  it  is  said  > 
that  both  Isaiah  and  Daniel  are  quoted  in  it.  Note  that  George  says  nothing  of  ( 
the  “Cushapa”  in  B  283  11.23-26. 


96 


goodness,  how  great  it  is,  -  now  that  you  have  been  freed  from  the 
grossness  of  the  flesh,  ascend  like  Paul  without  the  body,  and  see  the 
spiritual  beings,  troops  upon  troops,  how  they  praise  Him,  and  what 
they  say,  who  declare  the  name  of  the  Holy  Trinity. 

Sanctus 

Moreover  he  begins  quietly  [secretly]  because  all  that  was  said  with 
the  prophets  was  said  secretly.  Yet  the  prophet  (=  Isaiah?]  himself, 
though  he  learned  in  secret  shewed  those  things  openly  which  the  chil¬ 
dren  of  Israel  were  able  to  hear.  And  upon  blessed  Moses  also  there 
lay  a  veil  to  hinder  the  people  from  seeing  him;  and  our  Lord  God, 
when  He  came  and  visited  us,  -  not  all  men  recognized  His  coming, 
but  the  angels  and  holy  men,  who  were  distinguished  for  (their)  labours. 
So  the  gehanta  is  said  quietly,  that  the  spiritual  ones  may  hear  it,  and 
the  elect  whom  He  has  chosen  and  lifted  up  to  His  kingdom;  but  that 
the  people  (foil 41  r°)  may  not  hear  it  -  as  those  who  have  not  been 
sanctified  by  labours  -  and  that  they  may  not  forget  His  word  and  (thus) 
in  any  case  (or  after  all)  remain  without  hearing4 .  But  that  they  may 
not  be  estranged  from  him  -  since  they  have  the  faith  -  when  he  has 
recited  those  things  that  have  to  do  with  the  old  order  and  the  first  crea¬ 
tion,  and  wishes  to  shew  that  He  [God]  was  eternally  praised  by  the 
spiritual  beings,  he  makes  his  voice  audible  in  the  midst  of  his  gehanta, 
(at)  that  (part)  which  shews  the  praise  of  the  angels:  not  that  the  gehanta 
is  ended,  -  but  inasmuch  as  we  are  become  today  one  holy  church,  an¬ 
gels  and  men,  and  they  have  become  one  flock  in  Christ,  as  the  heav¬ 
enly  apostle  has  said,  He  willed  that  we  also  should  be  brought  into 
agreement  with  the  watchers5 6 ,  and  should  praise  Him  with  their  praises: 
for  though  in  the  body,  and  because  of  the  fleshly  conditions,  blessed 
Paul  heard  words  that  might  not  be  uttered,  and  was  not  himself  per¬ 
mitted  to  say  them,  yet  we  today,  having  been  (lifted  up)  above  the  flesh 
by  the  resurrection,  and  having  ascended  to  heaven  and  come  into  the 
church  of  the  angels,  -  we  have  authority  to  utter  their  praises. 

4i.e.  as  if  they  had  not  heard. 

5Text  “according  to  custom”,  which  gives  no  sense.  I  correct  to 

kT-wsw  “with  the  watchers”  which  from  the  similarity  of  the  words  in 
Syriac  may  be  taken  as  fairly  certain. 

6The  concluding  words  of  Preface  (said  aloud)  are  called  a  “canon”:  cf.  B  284 
1.6. 


97 


And  he  shews  before  them  the  canon6  which  Isaiah  the  prophet 
spoke  concerning  them  [the  angels]:  for  the  prophets  spoke  the  truth 
and  prophesied  and  saw  visions  of  all  degrees  and  of  all  forms  [cf. 
Hb.l:l  Syr.  version].  And  when  he  utters  the  formula  with  which  the 
spiritual  ones  were  praising:  that  is,  “Holy,  holy,  holy,  Lord  almighty7, 
of  whose  glories  [or  “praises”]  the  heaven  and  all  the  earth  are  full”8 . 
That  is:  now  heaven  and  earth  are  become  one  church;  and  heaven  is 
not  heaven,  not  is  earth  earth;  for  time  and  material  place  have  been 
removed;  for  heaven  is  the  heaven  of  earth,  and  earth  is  the  earth  of 
heaven:  for  unless  there  were  a  heaven  above,  there  would  not  be  an 
earth  beneath;  and  unless  there  were  an  earth  beneath,  there  would  not 
be  a  heaven  above.  (fol.J41v°)  But  now  that  those  above  and  those 
beneath  are  become  one  church,  there  is  no  more  “above”  and  “be¬ 
neath”.  Moreover  God  has  appeared  on  earth,  and  our  nature  has  gone 
up  to  heaven.  And  since  God  has  come  down  to  us,  earth  is  become 
heaven;  and  since  a  son  of  our  race  has  been  lifted  up  on  high,  heaven 
is  become  earth.  Wherefore  heaven  and  earth  are  become  one,  and  there 
is  no  more  earth  and  heaven.  And  we  (who)  are  now  become  (one)  with 
the  angels  repeat  their  sanctification  [=  “Holy”],  as  having  been  made 
perfect  by  the  resurrection. 

From  Sanctus  to  Canon  after  Institution 

But  when  they  finish  the  sanctification  of  the  seraphim,  then  the 
priest  proceeds  to  fill  up  his  service.  And  he  returns  to  the  course  of 
his  gehanta  quietly.  And  he  shews  how  God  put  on  a  man;  how,  when 
He  was  high,  He  lowered  Himself,  that  He  might  redeem  us.  And 
whereas  the  gehanta  began  in  its  beginning  with  the  Old  (Testament), 
now  he  closes  it  with  the  New,  that  he  may  make  the  Old  and  the  New 
one,  and  unite  the  laws  together. 


7or  “of  hosts”:  Syr. 

8B  284  11.10-17.  George,  like  Narsai,  says  nothing  of  the  expansions  in  B 
11.11-17. 

9On  this  passage  see  Liturgical  Homilies  of  Narsai  pp.383-384.  It  implies  a 
recital  of  the  history  (if  not  of  the  words)  of  the  Institution,  unlike  anything 
in  B. 

|(  George  several  times  elsewehere  uses  in  sense  of  “up  to  and  includ- 

mg  . 


98 


And  he  shews9  by  his  recital  the  whole  scope  of  the  dispensation 
of  our  Lord;  and  he  proclaims  the  praises  [or  “glorious  things”]  that 
were  (uttered)  at  His  birth  and  His  epiphany,  and  as  far  as10  His  pas¬ 
sion,  recounting  in  this  gehanta  that  one  voluntary  passion:  that  is,  until 
cf.  former  footnote].  He  delivered  His  body  and  His  blood, 
and  sacrificed  Himself  voluntary:  so  that  by  the  other  gehanta11  he  may 
signify  His  death  and  our  death,  also  His  resurrection  and  our  resur¬ 
rection;  that  when  we  rise  from  the  dust,  we  may  be  worthy  to  enter 
into  the  mansions  [=  receive  communion]  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven, 
and  enjoy  the  good  things  that  shall  not  be  taken  away,  whereof  the 
body  and  the  blood  are  the  symbol.  And  when  he  arrives  at  the  end  of 
the  account  of  the  sacrifice,  -  that  is  after  He  has  delivered  His  body 
and  His  blood  -  then  he  makes  an  end  of  the  gehanta  with  the  seal  of 
the  Trinity12 .  And  the  people,  as  knowing  the  secret  of  the  priest,  as 
perfect  man,  answer  after  him  “Amen”13 ,  expressing  belief  in  the  great¬ 
ness  of  his  familiar  association  (with  God). 

Second  Part  of  Gehanta.  Deacon’s  Salutation  before  Invocation 

And  the  deacon  also  who  is  appointed  over  (fol.l42r°)  this  service 
[commands]  that  they  pray  continually  and  cease  not  from  asking  mercy. 
So  our  Lord  also  at  the  time  of  His  passion  said  to  His  disciples:  “Be 
wakeful  and  pray  and  cease  not”  [Lk.18  compared  with  Mt.26:41  and 
parallels].  Amd  though  He  had  no  need  of  prayer,  not  only  did  He  pray 
Himself,  but  He  commanded  them  also  to  help  Him  with  prayer.  And 
they  [the  people],  even  as  the  angel  has  commanded  them  that  they 
should  pray  in  the  heart14  -  since  they  have  no  need  of  words  now  that 
they  have  been  purified  from  the  grossness  of  the  flesh  -  with  prayer 
of  the  heart  they  occupy  themselves. 


ni.e.  part  of  the  prayer  which  comes  after  the  recital  (account)  of  the  Institu¬ 
tion,  as  presently  appears. 

12The  kanuna  in  B  285  11.21-23  makes  no  mention  of  the  Trinity,  but  that  in 
‘Nestorius’  at  the  same  point  does  so. 

,3B  285  1.25. 

,4B  285  1.27. 


99 


CHAPTER  24 


Why  the  deacon  on  the  bema  says  now  “In  your  minds  pray”1 , 
and  then  [later]  “In  silence  and  fear”2 ,  and  why  this  gehanta  has  two 
“peaces”.  When  the  priest  has  represented  the  dispensation  up  to  this 
point  in  his  gehanta,  he  now  comes  to  depict  the  death.  And  he  shews 
that  though  (He  had)  no  fear3 .  And  he  shews  His  death  and  His  resur¬ 
rection  [in  the  prayer]  as  far  as  the  descent  [of  the  H.  Spirit].4  But  at 
the  time  of  the  descent  he  represents  His  resurrection  and  our  death. 
He  died  while  we  were  in  the  world;  and  He  arose,  and  we  are  to  die; 
and  He  is  coming  at  the  end  of  times  to  rise  us  up.  So  also  the  gehanta 
shews:  as  far  as  the  middle,  it  typifies  His  death;  from  the  middle,  His 
resurrection  and  our  death;  and  at  the  end,  our  resurrection. 

But  that  “peace”  is  twice  said5  in  it  [sc.  the  gehanta],  is  because  it 
depicts  two  deaths:  the  first  “peace”  His  death,  and  the  second  “peace” 
our  death.  For  when  our  death  and  His  death  shall  have  been  united 
together,  and  our  resurrection  and  His  resurrection,  we  shall  be  ac¬ 
counted  worthy  to  enjoy  the  heavenly  good  things  with  Him.  And  that 
our  death  and  His  do  not  take  place  together,  is  because  He  also  is  in 
a  manner  different  from  us,  and  in  a  manner  shares  with  us.  He  is  dif¬ 
ferent  from  us,  in  that  He  came  from  heaven,  and  is  (both)  God  and 
man,  was  conceived  without  wedlock,  was  not  tempted  in  [or  “with”] 
the  sin  of  (fol.l42v°)  our  nature.  His  death  also  is  different  from  ours: 


'B  285  1.27. 

:B  285  11.29-30. 

•'Text:  r<r\  \o  We  should  perhaps  read  r<?\x*  rOk  “though  He 

had  not  sinned  ’,  as  the  text  is  ungrammatical  and  the  thought  inexpected. 

4It  is  curious  that  George  says  not  a  word  in  his  comment  about  the  interces¬ 
sion,  though  elsewhere  (Tract  2,  chap. 3)  he  quotes  the  intercession  of  Nestorius 
(see:  Liturgical  Homilies  ofNarsai ,  p.83).  George  seems  to  know  nothing  of 
the  cushapa  (B  285).  It  looks  as  if  Addai  and  Mari  had  no  intercession  here  at 
all.  Narsai  appears  to  have  compiled  one  on  the  model  of  ‘Nestorius’. 

i.e.  just  after  the  “canon'  following  the  Institution,  and  just  before  the  Invo¬ 
cation  (B  pp.285  1.28;  287  1.30).  The  gehanta  referred  to  is  that  which  begins 
after  the  institution  (cf.  above). 


100 


]  He  died  and  rose  up  the  third  day;  but  we  do  not  rise  as  He  did.  He  is 
j  united  with  us,  in  that  He  is  a  man,  and  that  He  was  tempted  in  all 
j  :hings  that  are  ours,  and  also  in  that  He  possessed  a  nature  and  hypos- 
j  tasis  [qenoma]  like  ours;  and  (He  is)  one  of  those  who  cannot  be  sev- 
3  ered6 .  So  then  the  depicting  of  His  death  is  united  with  that  of  ours 
|  [lit.  “with  us”,  a  mere  Syr.  idiom],  His  and  ours  being  typified  in  one 
j  gehanta:  but  He  is  different  from  us,  in  that  he  [=  the  priest]  first  of 
j  all  depicts  His  death  and  His  resurrection,  and  then  depicts  our  death 
j  and  our  resurrection. 

'  #  ,  i 

Also  with  two  “peaces”  the  angel  Michael  crowns7  this  gehanta: 

|  one  the  peace  of  His  death,  and  one  the  “peace”  of  our  death.  And  when 
|  ihe  depicts  His  death,  he  commands  us  to  “pray  with  the  mind”8 ;  that 
i  ris,  when  one  dies,  all  of  us  die  by  a  mystery;  and  when  one  rises,  we 
(  have  all  risen  by  a  mystery .>  Wherefore  at  His  death  let  us  “pray  with 
the  mind”.  (But)  at  our  death  let  silence  reign  over  us,  with  the  lapsing 
•  of  nature:  as  much  as  to  say,  now  that  your  death  is  being  represented, 
be  ye  dying  voluntarily;  and  “be  ye  in  silence”,  as  men  who  have  died; 
“and  in  fear”9 ,  on  account  of  the  time  of  death  which  is  terrible.  And 
when  he  indicates  the  “mind”  and  “silence”,  and  the  like:  these  things 
are  ours  apart  from  the  spiritual  ones,  and  he  does  not  mingle  himself 
with  us10,  but  teaches  us  how  we  should  conduct  ourselves  for  they 
[angels:  i.e.  deacons]  are  appointed  over  our  service,  and  that  they 
should  have  care  of  us  even  to  (our)  last  breath. 

(But)  in  the  “peace”  he  mingled  himself  with  us.  See  now,  if  this 
were  not  the  case,  he  ought  to  say  “with  your  minds  pray  ye:  peace  be 
with  you”:  but  he  commands  us:  “Let  us  pray  in  mind”:  in  the  “peace” 
he  makes  us  and  himself  equal  [i.e.  says:  “peace  be  with  us”]:  as  who 

6Syr.  KLirLcn^ki*  rd  ^  We  should  perhaps  read  r<:*\n  r<\=> 

...’’without  divisibility”,  i.e.  indivisibly”.  But  the  phrase  maybe  a  philosophical 
one  (cf.  Facciolati  “insecabilis”). 

7This  does  not  necessarily  imply  that  they  came  at  the  end  (which  is  not  the 
case  here). 

8B  285, 1.28. 

*B  287  11.29-30. 

10i.e.  he  uses  the  2nd  person  “in  mind  pray  ye”. 

101 


should  say:  Although  in  death  we  are  not  partakers  with  you,  yet  as 
regards  the  passions  of  inconstancy  which  wage  war  and  contend  (with 
us)  every  moment,  and  separate  us  from  “peace"  that  those  passions 
be  loosed  from  us.  But  they  [=  the  passions]  are  not  loosed  (from  us) 
(j'ol.l43r°)  save  when  mortality  is  removed  from  you.  And  when  you 
are  freed  from  death,  you  are  also  freed  from  the  passions  of  incon¬ 
stancy:  and  when  you  are  freed  from  inconstancy,  we  are  also  freed 
with  you;  and  there  is  “peace  with  us",  because  passions  are  abolished 
from  us.  And  as  peace  is  not  achieved  among  men  save  by  previous 
suffering,  so  also  this  present  peace  comes  by  reason  of  previous  pas¬ 
sions.  Wherefore  let  us  be  together  in  the  “peace":  let  us  be  different 
from  You  in  the  matter  of  mortality;  and  let  us  be  joined  (with  You)  in 
the  matter  of  inconstancy:  let  us  be  with  God  in  the  matter  of  life  and 
reason;  let  us  be  different  from  Him  in  the  matter  of  creativeness  and 
createdness.  So  that,  when  w  e  partake  with  one  another  in  one  defini¬ 
tion,  we  are  found  to  be  in  one  accord:  so  that  as  we  have  become  one 
with  You  in  the  resurrection  -  in  that  we  are  partakers  in  passions  -  we 
become  one  with  God  also  in  the  matter  of  life  and  reason,  and  “know- 
even  as  we  are  known".  -And  as  now  we  know  in  part,  so  there  [=  in 
the  resurrection]  we  shall  be  perfected  in  all  fullness  of  knowledge,  and 
“God  also  shall  become  all  in  all"  [1  Co.l5:2S],  since  all  shall  know 
God  fully,  even  as  He  known  them.  -And  here  the  word  of  blessed  Paul 
receives  its  fulfilment,  wherein  he  said  “Then  I  shall  know  even  as  I 
am  known"  [1  Co. 13:12]. 

But  it  remains  to  say  why  the  deacon  who  is  on  the  bema  says 
these  things,  and  not  Gabnel.  Whereas  Gabriel  has  received  authority 
over  the  things  ot  the  world  to  come,  but  Michael  over  those  of  the 
present  world;  and  whereas  Gabnel  announced  the  conception  of  the 
“Father  ot  the  world  (to  come)"  and  His  kingdom  which  is  not  of  this 
world:  so  Michael  speaks  more  things  which  depict  death.  -And  also 
[tor  this  reason]:  that  he  takes  part  by  his  words  with  the  people  [= 
Jews]  as  well  as  with  the  peoples;  and  because  again,  Michael  appears 
in  Jerusalem  [=  bema],  which  is  this  world,  but  Gabnel  is  in  heaven 
[=  apse];  and  in  place  of  him  Michael  speaks  to  us,  as  (fol.l43v°)  be¬ 
ing  now  nearer  at  hand. 


102 


But  when  he  says  “In  silence  and  fear”11 ,  the  people  also  shew  forth 
a  death,  according  to  his  command,  and  die  mystically.  And  they  wor¬ 
ship  upon  the  ground,  which  typifies  death,  and  they  fall  down  with 
the  falling  of  the  first  Adam,  that  they  may  rise  up  with  the  resurrec¬ 
tion  of  the  second  Adam.  And  if  there  were  no  death,  there  would  be 
no  resurrection:  wherefore,  it  is  because  we  die  that  we  shall  rise.  So 
now  also  the  people  worship  upon  the  ground,  and  are  silent,  praying 
neither  in  mind  not  with  the  mouth. 

But  there  are  some  who  say  that  when  the  deacon  says  earlier12 
“let  no  man  dare  to  speak”,  he  utters  an  anathema  upon  those  who 
speak:  not  perceiving  that  (there)  the  deacon  is  not  concerned  to  speak 
of  the  things  of  the  world  [=  of  actual  things],  but  signifies  some  mys¬ 
tery.  Otherwise  the  whole  church  would  be  included  under  this  rule, 
when  he  says  “whoso  prays,  in  his  heart  let  him  pray”.  And  so  it  would 
not  be  right  for  us  again  to  pray  any  prayer;  and  now  he  would  be 
even  emphasising  this  (former)  word  by  saying  further  thus:  “In  mind 
pray  ye”13 :  so  that  even  the  priest,  who  prays  and  blesses  with  the  voice, 
would  come  under  this  rule!  But  this  is  not  true.  He  [the  deacon]  did 
not  forbid  speech  by  his  injunction  [Syr.  “canon”],  but  signified  a  mys¬ 
tery  of  death.  And  so  (now)  Michael14  also  in  what  he  says  does  not 
depart  from  the  character  of  what  Gabriel  said.  There,  above,  Gabriel 
said15  “Let  no  man  dare  to  speak;  and  whoso  prays,  in  his  heart  let 
him  pray.  And  in  silence  and  fear  be  standing”.  Now  Michael  -  since 
they  have  both  one  will  and  one  aim  -  recites  the  same  word:  “In  your 
minds  pray  ye”16 .  There  (it  was  said)  “in  the  heart  pray  ye”:  and  “heart” 
and  “mind”  are  made  one.  And  there  (it  was  said)  “in  silence  and  fear 
be  ye  standing”:  and  here  he  [Michael]  says  the  very  same  phrase17. 
For  when  Mary  saw  the  two  angels  sitting,  the  evangelist  says  that  both 

nB  287  11.29-30. 

12cf.  the  deacon’s  address  B  282  11.22-23. 

,3B  285  1.27. 

14It  was  Gabriel  who  made  the  address  in  B  282. 

,5B  282, 11.23-25. 

,6B  285, 1.29. 

l7This  refers  to  Michael’s  second  remark  (at  the  Invocation)  B  287, 11.29-30. 


103 


(fol.  144r°)  of  them  spoke  to  her  one  word  concerning  the  resurrection. 
Thus  it  says:  “She  saw  two  angels  in  white  sitting,  one  at  His  head  - 
Gabriel  -  one  at  His  feet  -  Michael  -  and  they  say  to  her”,  etc.  So  here 
also,  though  the  angels  are  two,  their  word  has  one  and  the  same  char¬ 
acter;  and  what  Gabriel  said  connectedly  Michael  says  in  (two)  parts, 
according  as  (each)  is  suitable18 . 

But  when  the  dispensation  is  completed,  and  our  Lord  has  died  and 
risen,  and  we  also  have  died  and  risen,  then  the  priest  utters  words  that 
are  suitable  to  the  judgment  -  whereas  he  has  not  mentioned  the  judg¬ 
ment  and  retribution  in  his  canon  [=  words  said  aloud]  up  to  this  point. 
And  as  the  Interpreter  [=  Theodore  of  Mopsuestia]  says,  so  is  his  canon: 
“And  here  and  there  may  we  all  together  alike”,  etc.;  or  as  Nestorius 
says:  “That  when  we  stand  before  Thee  in  that  terrible  and  glorious 
place  of  judgment”19 :  and  both  (canons)  proclaim  the  idea  of  the  res¬ 
urrection.  The  priest  shews  the  future  judgment,  and  that  all  of  us  here 
need  mercy,  as  the  heavenly  apostle  says  “For  God  shut  up  all  in  diso¬ 
bedience,  that  He  might  have  mercy  on  all”  [Rm.  11:32]:  that  is,  He 
bound  them  with  the  passibility  of  inconstancy,  so  that  their  nature 
should  not  be  able  to  escape  from  sin. 

And  when  the  priest  delivers  the  canon  of  the  judgment  -  as  trans¬ 
acting  in  the  service  the  whole  dispensation  -  and  (when)  he  has  en¬ 
acted  our  death  and  his  death,  and  the  resurrection  of  our  Lord  and 
our  resurrection,  he  comes  at  once  [rC:ui2*>  =  quite  strictly  “at  once”]  to 
seal20  what  he  has  laboured  (in);  and  he  does  not  leave  those  things 
that  were  (done)  by  him  with  the  labour  of  supplication  and  prayers 
without  the  true  seal.  As  every  picture  that  is  drawn  needs  the  seal  of 
colours  which  shall  perfectly  depict  it,  so  now  the  priest  depicts  and 


l8B  pp.285  1.2;  287,  11.29-30. 

|l)The  words  quoted  are  from  the  present  liturgies  of  ‘Theodore’  and 
‘Nestorius’  in  the  Canon  after  the  Invocation:  but  here  (as  above,  pp.92f.) 
these  liturgies  may  be  quoted  only  in  support  of  the  author’s  interpretation,  i 
The  kanuna  in  B  288  1.5  makes  no  allusion  to  the  judgment. 

20B  288,  1.10  -  289  1.30  (inch)  is  not  represented  by  either  George  or  Narsai 
(cf.  below). 


104 


represents  completely  the  picture  which  he  began;  and  he  unites  the 
Mysteries  one  with  another,  and  he  breaks  and  signs21 . 

But  perhaps  someone  will  say:  If  the  Mysteries  have  been  conse¬ 
crated  by  the  death  of  our  Lord,  and  the  Spirit  has  come  down  and 
consecrated  them,  and  they  have  been  completed  with  all  true  complete¬ 
ness.  What  is  this  that  he  should  break  and  sign?  Moreover  our  Lord 
also,  when  He  blessed,  broke  only.  But  we  say  that  up  to  this  point 
they  have  been  consecrated,  and  have  become  the  body  and  blood.  But 
now  that  they  have  become  the  body  and  the  blood,  it  is  right  that  they 
should  be  united,  that  the  body  may  be  of  the  blood  and  the  blood  of 
the  body.  And  if  they  are  not  united,  the  oblation  is  not  one.  But  now 
that  they  have  been  consecrated  and  blessed,  and  have  become  (that) 
Bread  and  Wine  which  (were  given)  by  the  hands  of  our  Lord22,  the 
priest  associates  them  together:  not  that  they  are  not  consecrated,  or 
that  they  are  in  need  of  consecration,  but  that  they  may  have  a  seal. 
And  as  we  complete  all  our  services  with  the  names  of  the  Trinity,  so 
also  is  this  seal  -  with  the  Trinity  he  seals  it:  and  he  shews  by  his  words 
that  they  have  no  need  to  become  an  oblation,  but  (that)  they  are  con¬ 
secrated  Mysteries;  and  he  says:  “The  mercifulness  of  Thy  grace,  O 
our  Lord  and  our  God,  brings  us  near”  -  shewing  that  by  His  grace  we 
have  become  what  we  are;  and  He  brings  us  into  an  intimate  associa¬ 
tion  with  Himself  by  His  grace  -  “unto  these  glorious  and  holy  and 
divine  Mysteries”23 .  And  he  gives  glory  to  Christ  who  performs  them. 
And  he  shews  that  from  heaven  He  came  down,  the  heavenly  Bread, 
even  as  He  said  in  the  Gospel:  “I  am  the  heavenly  Bread,  who  am  come 
down”24 ;  and  again,  “My  body  is  meat  indeed”,  and  the  rest.  And  he 
says  again  “We  draw  nigh  and  break  and  sign”.  What?  “The  body  and 


21cf.  B  290, 1.36;  cf.  below,  where  it  seems  to  be  implied  that  the  fraction  and 
uniting  were  performed  while  the  prayer  “The  mercifulness  of  Thy  grace”  (B 
289,  1.30)  was  being  said  -  but  other  prayers  also  are  implied  -  so  that  this 
(“The  mercifulness”)  probably  came  just  before,  as  in  B. 

22I  cannot  otherwise  translate  rt? *73 n  r^r^>Aacu»o 

23Cf.  B  289  11.30-33;  (col.l),  see  p.104,  note  20. 

24Cf.  B  290  l.lff.  (col.l).  But  in  B  this  is  given  to  the  deacon. 


105 


blood  of  Thy  Beloved,  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ”25 ,  the  heavenly  Bread 
which  came  down  from  heaven,  and  gave  life  to  the  whole  world26 . 
And  again  he  signs  the  body  in  the  cup:  forasmuch  as  the  blood  sub¬ 
sists  in  the  body,  and  if  there  were  no  body  neither  would  there  be  blood, 
and  we  do  not  conceive  of  blood  without  body.  We  do  (indeed)  con¬ 
ceive  of  body  without  blood,  since  when  the  body  is  taken  away  the 
blood  is  taken  away,  (but)  (fol.  I45r°)  the  body  is  not  taken  away  when 
the  blood  is  taken  away.  And  again  he  signs  the  blood  over  the  body27 : 
forasmuch  as  the  life  of  the  body  is  in  the  blood,  and  it  cannot  come 
into  existence  or  become  living  while  it  is  without  blood:  but  this  is 
preserved  in  that,  and  this  preserves  that.  And  when  he  signs  both  with 
the  sign  of  the  cross,  it  is  forasmuch  as  this  salvation  was  effected  by 
the  crucifixion.  He  signs  with  the  names  of  the  Trinity28 ,  forasmuch 
as  [or  “as  though”]  the  whole  Godhead  dwelt  in  our  body.  And  then 
he  shews  by  his  words  the  fulfilling  of  his  work.  What  then? 

“These  glorious  and  holy  and  divine  Mysteries  have  been  set  apart 
and  consecrated  and  completed”30;  while  with  this  saying 
he  cursorily  goes  over  the  whole  dispensation.  They  were  “set  apart” 
when  they  were  set  upon  the  altar:  they  were  “consecrated”  when  the 
whole  dispensation  was  pronounced  over  them:  they  were  “completed” 
when  they  received  the  seal  of  the  signing.  And  they  became,  what? 
“these  glorious  and  holy  and  divine  Mysteries”. 

But  certain  godly  men  have  said  that  these  Mysteries  are  strictly 
the  body  and  blood  of  Christ,  and  not  a  mystery  of  His  body  and  blood. 
But  we  say  to  them,  that  some  things  are  by  nature,  and  some  are  (only) 
adjuncts  [lit.  “things  united”],  which  are  (united)  with  the  nature.  Those 
that  are  by  nature  cannot  be  received  into  a  union,  but  the  nature  itself 
makes  them  its  own  by  appropriation.31  The  eyes  and  the  hands  in  a 


25B  290,  11.24-30  (col.2). 

26Cf.  B  290,  1.1  (col.  1 ). 

27Cf.  B  291,  1.36. 

28Cf.  B  291,  11.26  and  38. 

29i.e.  ordained,  set  apart  for  this  purpose. 

30B  292  1.5ff. 

“domestice”,  or  Gr.  oikottjc;  +  onceux. 


106 


man  belong  to  him  by  nature,  and  a  man  is  not  said  to  be  that  which  is 
united  with  [i.e.  has  the  adjunct  of]  hands.  But  if  you  divide  up  the 
whole  body  into  parts,  since  the  man  is  (now)  without  hands  and  with¬ 
out  head  and  eyes  and  feet  and  back,  where  then  is  the  man?  So  then 
these  things  belong  to  him  by  nature.  But  he  has  things  that  are  (only) 
adjuncts,  as  the  being  a  smith  or  a  physician,  and  any  kind  of  craft.  A 
man  is  a  physician:  it  is  possible  that  he  be  not  a  physician;  he  is  a 
carpenter:  it  is  possible  that  he  be  (fol.l45v°)  not  a  carpenter.  But  he 
is  named  “physician”  and  “carpenter”  by  his  craft  being  united  with 
him.  But  though  (men)  do  not  know  him  for  a  physician,  it  is  impossi¬ 
ble  that  they  do  not  know  him  for  a  man.  When  they  see  him  they  know 
that  he  is  a  man  without  asking;  and  he  is  not  asked  “Are  you  a  man?” 
(but)  he  is  asked  whether  he  is  a  physician  or  not,  because  he  has  not 
by  nature  the  quality  of  being  a  physician. 

And  so  too  we  call  Christ  one  Son,  one  Christ:  but  when  we  are 
pressed  concerning  the  manner  of  His  being32,  we  divide  Him  into  two 
natures  and  hypostases  [qenome]:  not  that  we  regard  Christ  as  two  - 
whether  natures  or  hypostases  -  but  that  the  truth  of  His  natures  may 
be  confessed.  For  we  even  say  that  God  became  man,  and  man  became 
God;  but  being  aware  that  the  natures  are  not  changed,  we  say  that 
God  remained  God  and  the  man  man;  and  God  did  not  become  man  in 
nature,  nor  did  man  become  God  in  nature:  but  by  a  union  God  be¬ 
came  man,  and  man  God.  And  if  these  things  are  so,  the  bread  and 
wine  also  have  become  the  body  and  blood,  not  by  nature,  but  by  un¬ 
ion.  And  when  we  call  them  body  and  blood  after  a  manner,  we  also 
style  them  “Mysteries”,  that  they  may  be  recognized  to  be  mysteries 
of  the  body  and  the  blood  -  since  by  nature  they  are  distinct.  But  if 
they  are  strictly  body  and  blood,  they  are  not  mysteries:  and  if  they 
are  mysteries  they  are  not  body  and  blood,  -  since  by  a  mystery  is  rep¬ 
resented  some  attribute33  that  it  [the  thing  which  represents]  has  not 
by  nature.  No  natural  things  are  mysteries,  and  no  mysteries  are  natu- 

32m*\o .  .r<  1^:  lit.  “His  howness”. 

33  rr^  .  v 

34I.e.  a  thing  is  not  a  symbol  of  its  own  nature  or  essence,  and  a  thing  that  is 
a  symbol  has  not  the  nature  or  essence  of  that  which  it  symbolizes. 


107 


ral  things34 .  For  as  we  take  a  deacon  to  be  the  mystery  of  an  angel, 
the  apse  of  heaven,  the  altar  of  the  throne  of  Christ,  the  bema  of  Jeru¬ 
salem,  and  so  forth;  and  they  are  not  by  nature  the  actual  things  of 
which  they  are  accepted  (as  symbols)  -  (fol.l46r°)  nor  yet  because  they 
are  not  so  by  nature,  do  we  (altogether)  deny  that  they  are  (these  things), 
but  (say  that)  they  are  (so)  by  a  union:  nor  yet  because  they  are  (so 
only)  by  union,  do  we  say  that  they  are  not  (so)  truly,  since  by  faith 
they  are  so  accepted  -  so  the  bread  and  wine  are  the  body  and  blood  of 
Christ  by  a  union  and  by  a  mystery:  by  nature  (they  are)  bread  and 

wine.  If  on  account  of  the  union  we  lose  sight  of  the  natures,  why  are 

* 

Arius  and  Cyril  and  Apollinaris  and  Severus  blamed,  who,  seeing  the 
union,  were  lured  from  the  truth,  and  called  Christ  one  nature,  com¬ 
pounded  of  God  and  man,  and  introduced  compositeness  into  the  Sim¬ 
ple,  and  shut  up  the  Creator  under  the  creature.  But  it  behoves  us  to 
preserve  the  natures,  and  to  perform  mysteries  by  means  of  a  union. 
But  if  it  be  not  mysteries  that  we  perform,  what  then  is  it  that  we  ac¬ 
complish?35  But  if  we  accomplish  mysteries,  then  we  accomplish  (mys¬ 
teries)  of  something  that  is  not.  For  lo,  we  keep  the  very  name  “mys¬ 
teries”  in  order  that  we  may  not  fall  into  this  error.  The  bread  and  wine 
are  not  therefore  the  body  and  blood  by  nature,  but  a  mystery  of  the 
body  and  blood;  and  they  are  moreover  mysteries  of  the  kingdom  and 
of  the  joy  of  heaven.  Even  then  as  we  have  died  in  baptism  and  risen  - 
inasmuch  as  we  have  died  and  risen  by  a  mystery  -  and  even  as  we 
say  that  we  are  become  immortal:  not  because  we  are  not  to  die,  but 
because  we  depict  a  mystery  of  immortality:  so  the  mysteries  which 
we  celebrate  resemble  these  matters  which  touch  ourselves.  And  as  we 
do  not  doubt  that,  even  though  we  are  mortal,  we  are  nevertheless 
immortal  in  this,  that  we  were  baptised  into  the  faith  of  Christ:  and 
inasmuch  as  He  rose  as  a  hostage,  we  have  all  risen  -  not  as  though 
we  were  today  immortal  -  so  we  do  not  doubt  that  these  mysteries  are 
the  body  and  blood  of  Christ  by  a  union:  -  by  a  mystery  however,  and 
consequently  not  so  by  nature.  So  much  for  these  matters.  But  let  us 
return  to  the  course  of  our  exposition. 


,<5I.e.  accomplish  by  the  consecration:  the  Syr.  word  is  sometimes  in  the  sense 
of  “conficere”  (mysteria). 


108 


“These  mysteries  have  been  consecrated  and  sealed  one  with  an¬ 
other",  says  the  pnest,  (fol.l46v°)  in  the  name  of  the  Trinity,  that  they 
may  be  for  pardoning  of  debts  and  forgiveness  of  sms  to  the  holy  church 
of  Christ  our  Lord".36  And  lo,  even  in  the  sealing  he  calls  them  “mys¬ 
teries",  and  not  the  body  and  blood:  except  (only)  inasmuch  as  they 
have  been  given  and  consecrated  for  pardoning.  And  here  the  business 
[r<:hScc<^\]  of  the  consecration  [quddasha]  is  ended.  And  he  has  sealed 
them:  even  as  to  all  matters  we  make  a  sealing.37  Even  a  carpenter, 
when  he  has  fashioned  out  a  door  or  a  chair,  makes  a  seal  for  it  by 
carving;  a  smith  also,  as  a  seal  for  the  gold  and  silver,  takes  away  from 
it  the  rust.  And  everything  in  the  world  has  a  beginning  and  a  middle 
and  an  end.  And  the  beginning  of  the  mysteries  is  the  bringing  them 
up  upon  the  altar;  the  middle  is  the  consecration;  the  end  is  the  seal. 
And  if  there  were  no  seal,  and  [...]38  the  consecration  would  not  be  the 
middle.  Thus  then  concerning  the  mysteries. 


36B  292,,1.6ff. 

37“Seal”  is  used  vaguely  in  Syr.  for  anything  that  adds  the  finishing  touch. 

38Some  words  appear  to  have  fallen  out:  perhaps  to  this  effect:  “And  if  the 
end  were  not  the  seal". 


109 


CHAPTER  25 


Why  the  priest  says  here  again  once  more  “The  grace  of  our 
Lord”1 ;  and  what  is  this  proclamation  “Let  us  all”2 ,  which  the  deacon 
proclaims;  and  why  he  who  is  on  the  bema  does  not  proclaim  it:  and 
on  all  matters  that  are  here  observed  do  Thou  enlighten  me. 

When  the  priest’s  part  [r^So^^]  is  ended,  he  comes  back  to  (that) 
former  saying;  which  shews  that,  what  we  began  is  accomplished,  - 
and  the  contest  into  which  1  entered  I  have  fought  out,  and  I  have  con¬ 
quered;  and  now  I  make  (this)  known  to  you;  and  with  the  name  of  the 
Trinity  I  sign  you;  and  I  make  known  to  you  His  goodness  (or  grace); 
and  the  word  which  formerly  I  spoke3 ,  the  same  I  have  performed.  Then 
I  depicted  to  you  by  a  mystery  the  things  that  were  to  be:  but  what  I 
said  at  first  in  a  mystery  is  now  done  in  fact.  And  you  must  not  sup¬ 
pose  that  there  is  any  change  [or  “difference”]  between  the  things  of 
the  mystery  and  the  things  of  the  performance:  the  mystery  and  the 
performance  are  one.  Wherefore,  receive  the  blessing  and  be  prepared 
for  the  enjoyment  [sc.  communion].  Whereas  by  the  former  blessing 
you  were  (fol.l47r°)  made  ready  to  depict  the  glorious  mysteries,  now 
again  I  sign  you,  and  make  you  ready  to  enjoy  the  Mysteries  them¬ 
selves. 

What  then?  The  deacon  on  the  bema,  that  is  Michael,  seeing  that 
the  dispensation  is  completed,  and  that  death  has  been  undone,  and  that 
our  nature  has  been  renewed  by  the  resurrection,  now  gladly  departs 
to  heaven  [=  apse];  and  the  things  that  he  does  here4  now  plainly  ap¬ 
pear.  But  Gabriel,  as  he  who  holds  the  New  Testament,  does  not  cease 
from  the  office  that  he  holds  until,  together  with  the  king,  [=  priest]  he 
causes  the  guests  to  have  the  enjoyment5 .  And  here  also  he  prepares 

'B  293  1.17. 

2Ibid.  1.28. 

?Sc.  “The  grace”,  etc.,  just  before  the  Sursum  Corda.  B  283  1.4. 

4"Here”  would  seem  to  be  the  bema,  the  earth,  Jerusalem.  What  he  enacted 
there  is  now  seen  in  its  fulfilment,  for  the  resurrection  has  come  about  by  the 
consecration. 

5I.e.  he  makes  this  announcement  inviting  the  people  to  communion. 


110 


the  people  for  the  communion  of  the  Mysteries;  and  he  shews  that  the 
enjoyment  of  the  kingdom  of  heaven  is  alike  for  angels  and  men  to¬ 
gether6  ,  and  (that)  now  there  is  neither  slave  nor  free-born,  neither 
spiritual  beings  nor  corporeal,  but  (that)  we  are  all  one.  But  what  does 
he  say?  “Let  us  all7  with  fear  and  honour  approach  the  mystery  of  the 
body  of  the  precious  blood  of  our  Saviour”.  “With  fear”,  because  they 
are  a  devouring  fire;  “with  honour”,  because  the  giver  of  them  has 
honoured  us  exceedingly.  “Let  us  approach”,  to  what?  Not  to  “the  body 
and  blood”,  but  to  “the  mystery  of  the  body  and  of  the  precious  blood”. 
Thou  seest  that  this  blessed  man  [Isho1  Yabh]  did  not  give  an  occasion 
to  those  who  speak  pratings8 .  But  what? 

“With  a  pure  heart  and  with  true  faith  let  us  remember  His  pas¬ 
sion  and  consider  His  resurrection”.  That  is:  let  us  cause  our  heart  to 
posses  purity  which  is  uplifted  above  the  flesh  and  let  us  not  look  upon 
these  things  in  bodily,  but  in  spiritual  wise  and  let  us  not  regard  [A: 
“rejoice  in”]  the  bread  and  wine,  but  let  us  regard  the  mystery  which 
is  accomplished  in  them,  and  with  faith  let  us  consider  them.  As  though 
it  [sc.  the  Mystery]  were  in  heaven9,  let  us  direct  our  mind  aloft  and 
all  the  ceremonies10  that  we  see  here,  let  us  regard  as  heavenly.  And 
the  world  that  is  waited  for  [=  future  life]  and  all  these  [=  such]  things 
by  faith  are  realized.  And  “remembering  the  passion  and  death”  of  our 
Lord  and  depicting  on  our  heart  “His  (fol.l47v°)  resurrection”,  let  us 
know  who  He  is:  and  let  us  not  know  Him  for  a  bare11  man  -  “for 
vain  is  the  saving  of  a  man”  [Ps.]  -  nor  yet  for  God  without  man,  that 
we  may  not  bring  under  passions  God  who  is  impassible.  But  let  us 
know  Him,  that  of  His  goodness,  for  the  sake  of  our  redemption,  “the 


6I.e.  by  saying  “Let  us  all”  etc. 

7B  293  11.28ff. 

8I.e.  did  not  fail  to  refute  those  who  assert  a  real  presence. 

9r<^ t->  am  lit.  “as  that  which  is  in  heaven”.  The  meaning 

is  that  us  are  to  treat  the  mystery  as  though  it  were  the  real  body  of  Christ 
which  is  in  heaven  -  even  though,  as  George  holds,  it  is  only  the  symbol 
thereof. 

l0Or  “orders”,  i.e.  different  classes  of  ministers. 

1 1  r^viVr  «?a 


111 


Only-begotten  of  God  came  down  from  heaven  and  took  from  us  a 
mortal  body  and  a  reasonable  and  intelligent  and  immortal  soul  and 
by  holy  commandments  and  divine  laws  He  turned  us  from  the  error 
of  darkness  and  brought  us  nigh  to  His  kingdom”.  And  after  that  He 
had  completed  His  dispensation,  He  suffered  and  was  crucified  and  rose 
and  ascended  to  heaven  as  a  hostage  from  our  race  and  He  has  deliv¬ 
ered  to  us  these  Mysteries,  that  by  them  we  may  recall  all  His  grace 
towards  us”.  But  what  then? 

“Let  us  with  a  right  heart  and  without  [=  free  from]  mortality,  and 
with  a  humble  spirit,  like  His  who  for  our  sake  humbled  Himself  and 
was  made  obedient  unto  death,  even  the  death  of  the  cross,  -  let  us  also 
walk  in  His  spirit  and  let  us  receive  of  Him  with  sincerity  of  heart  this 
gift,  which  is  life  everlasting  and  with  pure  prayer,  uplifted  above  ca¬ 
nal  doubtings  and  with  manifold  grief,  let  us  partake  of  the  mysteries 
of  the  Church  in  penitent  hope”.-  And  everywhere,  as  a  reproof  to  those 
who  do  not  take  cognizance  of  the  Mysteries  he  flsho’  Yabh]  calls  them 
“mysteries”  -  “And  let  us  be  penitent  for  the  offences  which  we  have 
committed  by  our  works”:  as  though  we  were  already  in  the  kingdom 
of  heaven. 

Here  also  we  put  on  [grief]  for  our  sins,  that  we  may  also  depict 
before  us  the  grief  [or  “suffering”]  of  torment.  And  doing  these  things 
let  us  not  despair:  our  God  is  merciful  and  compassionate;  let  us  “ask 
of  Him  mercy  and  forgiveness  of  sins”.  And  let  us  before  (making)  our 
petition  to  Him  “condone  the  transgression  of  our  fellow-servants”.12 

And  while  we  perform  these  things  (fol.l48r°)  that  concern  us  [lit. 
“these  our  things”],  and  shew  kindness  to  our  fellow-servants  He  “par¬ 
dons  our  sins  and  offences”13 .  And  he  [=  the  deacon]  as  at  all  (other) 
times,  whence  and  from  whom  we  ask;  but  while  he  recites  in  order 
our  matters,  the  people,  assenting  to  his  word,  answer  and  say,  “Yea, 

l2This  and  what  follows  refers  to  something  like  B  294  1.30-295  1.10:  but  it  is 
not  clear  whether  the  petitions  took  the  form  of  a  litany,  or  whether  they  were 
said  straight  on  by  the  deacon.  It  would  seem  from  what  follows  that  the 
people  made  the  response.  In  Narsai  the  whole  is  said  straight  on  by  the  people. 
13Cf.  B  294  11.31,34  =  response. 


112 


O  wise  teacher,  we  perform  what  thou  teachest  us;  and  we  know  that 
when  we  do  this  “the  Lord  pardons  our  sins  and  transgressions”.  And 
as  men  who  pray  for,  all  of  them  pray  for  one  another  [sic,  though  not 
elegant]:  “Lord,  pardon  the  sms  and  transgressions  of  Thy  servants”: 
and  there  is  none  among  them  who  makes  petition  for  himself14. 

And  Gabriel  also,  as  having  been  brought  into  agreement  with  us 
-  and  the  company  of  demons,  who  are  of  his  race  and  who  stand  in 
need  of  mercy15  -  does  not  exclude  himself  from  the  midst,  but  associ¬ 
ates  together  himself  and  us,  in  that  we  are  all  in  need  of  mercy;  for 
[lit.  “and”]  there  is  no  creature  without  sins,  whether  of  thoughts  or 
deeds. 

And  when  these  things  are  performed,  he  shews  at  the  end  that  when 
we  perform  these  things  we  shall  receive  a  fulfilling  of  them  in  “the 
resurrection  of  our  bodies  and  the  salvation  of  our  souls”16 .  Now  you 
have  seen  the  resurrection  by  a  mystery  and  the  joy  (of  heaven)  and 
the  judgement  and  the  retribution  by  a  foretaste:  pardon  one  another, 
that  you  may  reign  in  the  kingdom  in  reality.  And  the  people  answer: 
“For  ever  [>LsJ]17  may  we  have  this  disposition  of  true  faith  and  for 
ever  [_^w\]18  may  we  reign  in  the  kingdom”19  -  together  with 
“Amen”20,  which  is  the  seal. 


14The  commas  denote  passages  taken  fairly  closely  from  the  deacon’s  address 
B  293  1.27-295  1.10. 

15It  is  not  clear  whether  this  goes  with  the  preceding  or  the  following.  It 
appears  to  mean  that  angels,  men  and  demons  are  all  here  joined  together  in 
the  petition  for  mercy.  George  elsewhere  teaches  that  even  the  demons  will 
fmd  some  sort  of  mercy,  and  that  only  the  “Son  of  perdition”  (=  Antichrist) 
will  be  utterly  extinguished:  see  Tract  1  ch.23  the  heading  of  which  asks  the 
question  “Why  he  (Antichrist)  will  not  find  that  mercy  which  shall  be  ac¬ 
corded  even  to  demons  and  wicked  men? 

,6Cf.  B  295  1.8,  where  however  this  remark  is  given  to  the  people. 

,7=  “in  saeculum”  (sing.). 

18=  “in  saecula”  (plur.). 

19Cf.  B  295  1.9:  evidently  with  George  the  people  answered  “world  without 
end,  amen”.  Only  [=  probably  “in  saeculum  saeculorum]”. 

20No  “Amen”  here  in  B  295  1.9. 


113 


But  thou  must  know,  O  brother,  that  this  proclamation21  is  not  of 
the  prescribing  of  the  ancients  and  the  apostles22 ,  but  blessed  Isho  Yabh 
himself  ordered  and  prescribed  it  by  (his)  Codex;  so  that  with  diffi¬ 
culty  and  trouble  it  has  been  accepted  by  those  who  resist  the  truth 
and  the  doctors23 ;  and  many  Churches  also  continued  for  a  long  time 
not  to  say  it.  And  some  say  that  to  this  day  there  are  Churches  that  do 
not  proclaim  it;  but  (they  say)  that  formerly,  (fol.l48v°)  when  the  priest 
said  the  last  [canon]  ‘The  grace  of,24  he  used  to  proceed,  “and  make 
us  worthy,  Lord”,25  as  we  do  in  the  days  of  the  fast,  when  we  do  not 
consecrate  the  Mysteries.  But  when  it  seemed  fitting  to  this  blessed  man 
[Isho’  Yabh]  that  before  the  reception  of  the  mysteries  also  we  should 
typify  over  again  the  undoing  of  tribulations  -  even  as  he  also  renewed 
the  dispensation  again26  -  he  instituted  this  proclamation.27 

But  the  priest,  when  he  has  seen  that  the  angels  have  been  brought 
into  perfect  concord  with  the  people,  and  that  the  whole  community 


:iThis  seems  to  refer  to  the  whole  of  B  293  1.27-295  1.10. 

;:Is  this  an  allusion  to  the  Liturgy  of  the  ‘Apostles  Addai  and  Mari’? 
;3There  is  a  difference  of  reading  here  in  the  Mss:  A  has  r ^ 
n?  ;  S  has  rdxalixna  rrinar  v  The  latter  is  better. 

24B  293  11.17-19. 

:5B  295  1.25  (the  middle  of  the  prayer  beginning  “Make  Thy  tranquillity”). 
Narsai  p.25  seems,  like  George,  to  point  to  a  prayer  here  beginning  “Make  us 
worthy”:  he  says,  "that  He  will  sanctify  us  and  make  us  all  worthy  to  stand 
before  Him  without  blemish",  etc.;  cf.  p.l  15,  note  29. 

~T.e.  said  for  the  second  time  the  canon  “The  grace”  etc.,  see  above  (pp.  109f.). 
‘On  this  whole  passage  see  Liturgical  Homilies  of  Narsai  pp. 80-82.  All  we 
can  gather  from  George  is  that  Isho'  Yabh  III  had  the  diaconal  address  and 
the  following  litany,  and  that  many  rejected  it  as  not  part  of  the  liturgy  [of 
Apostles'  (?)  cf.  p.84,  note  *].  Narsai  has  the  address  of  the  deacon  and 
something  like  the  litany  diat  follows:  but  he  gives  the  deacon’s  part  to  the 
people  as  a  continuous  prayer.  I  have  carefully  examined  Narsai’s  paraphrase 
ot  this  diaconal  address,  and  am  convinced  that  it  is  by  the  same  hand  as  the 
rest  ot  the  homily:  e.g.  the  exact  Syriac  words  “let  us  confess  [or  ‘give  thanks’] 
and  worship  and  glorify"  (_qsl_>c\  k^o_i)  occur  again  on  p.30  1.4  (also 

in  a  diaconal  address,  p.31  1.10  where  he  is  not  paraphrasing  any  text). 


114 


;  as  asked  for  pardon,  forthwith,  as  a  true  mediator  he  makes  suppli- 
ation  for  his  flock:  “Pardon,  Lord,  by  Thy  compassion  the  sins  and 
ansgressions  of  Thy  servants  and  sanctify  our  lips  wherewith  Thy 
•eople  have  asked  for  pardon  of  debts,  that  they  [i.e.  the  lips:  femi- 
ine]  may  now  yield  in  Thy  kingdom  the  fruits  of  praise  to  Thy  glori- 
»us  Trinity28  •  And  make  us  worthy29  by  Thy  grace,  O  our  merciful 
■ather,  that  we  may  be  to  Thee  beloved  and  blameless  sons  and  may 
ve  stand30  before  Thee  as  with  Thou  hast  taught  us,  with  a  pure  heart 
,nd  open  countenance,  while  with  that  confidence  which  Thou  hast 
.hewn  us  -  who,  when  we  were  prostrate  in  our  sms,  didst  stoop  down 
rom  Thy  holy  heaven  to  redeem  us,  and  in  Thy  mercy  Thou  hast 
wrought  us  nigh  unto  Thee;  and  Thou  hast  named  us  sons  of  Thy  Lord¬ 
ship  -  we  also  now,  as  Thou  hast  taught  us  in  Thy  Gospel31  ,  always 
when  we  stand  before  Thee  praying  to  Thee  and  making  request  of 
rhee,  make  use  here  of  those  words  which  Thou  taughtest  us”. 

Then  the  people,  since  all  the  truth  has  been  revealed  to  them  by 
he  resurrection  [=  consecration  of  the  Mysteries],  know  what  is  due; 
md  having  heard  from  the  mediator  [=  priest]  who,  has  risen  up  for 
them  that  he  says  beseeching  God  “Let  us  all  together  call  Thee,  and 
;hus  let  us  say”32  -  they  cry  out  “Our  Father  who  art  in  heaven,  sanc¬ 
tify  us  with  the  holiness  of  Thy  name,  and  reveal  that  kingdom  of  Thine 
which  is  (fol.l49r°)  (to  be)  in  the  resurrection;  and  let  us  behave  ac- 


28Thus  far  the  prayer  represents  B  295  11.14-17. 

29This  =  B  295  1.25ff.  Clearly  11.21-24  are  not  contemplated  in  George’s  ex¬ 
position,  any  more  than  in  Narsai  (p.25);  see  p.  1 14,  note  25. 

30Narsai  also  has  “stand”  (p.25).  B  has  “pray”.  After  this  point  George  seems 
to  give  merely  pious  commentary. 

3,Cf.  B  295  11.28-29. 

32This  is  clearly  part  of  the  prayer  in  George’s  liturgy:  the  words  are  quoted 
again  (on  p.  1 19)  in  exactly  the  same  form.  There  is  nothing  quite  like  them 
in  B  (295  11.28f.):  there  the  Pater  Noster  is  introduced  with  a  quotation  from 
the  Gospel:  “Whensoever  you  pray  after  this  manner,  pray  and  confess  and 
say”.  Narsai  (  p.25)  seems  to  imply  a  formula  similar  to  that  of  George  “and 
call  Him,  all  of  us”. 


115 


cording  to  Thy  will  and  let  it  [=  Thy  will]33  be  done.  Even  as  we  are 
now  upon  earth,  and  have  by  our  mysteries  depicted  a  type  of  heaven, 
let  our  thoughts  be  in  heaven.  And  give  us  the  need  of  [=  what  is  nec¬ 
essary  for]  our  weak  body;  and  set  us  free  from  temptations;  and  de¬ 
liver  us  from  the  Evil  One.  For  Thine  is  the  kingdom  and  the  power 
and  the  glory,  from  the  beginning,  and  before  the  beginning,  and  in  this 
(kingdom)  Thou  abidest  for  ever.  Amen”.34 

Then  the  priest  again,  -  having  seen  his  flock  stretch  forth  their 
hands  and  their  hearts  towards  their  Lord,  according  to  His-command, 
and  ask  of  Him  mercy  and  compassion,  as  He  taught  them,  and  con¬ 
done  the  sins  one  of  another,  and  then  ask  forgiveness  of  Him  -  forth¬ 
with  takes  up  their  petitions,  and  offer  them  before  Him  as  gifts.  And 
as,  when  a  king’s  people  bring  Him  gifts  and  honours,  they  have  need 
of  a  mediator  also  to  bring  them  in  unto  the  king  and  make  an  address 
[or,  “apology”,  n«vyj  for  them:  so  now  also,  (when)  the  people 

have  brought  in  gifts,  a  mediator,  who  is  (one)  of  them,  offers  them 
before  the’  King:  - 

“Yea,  our  Lord  and  our  God,  we  beseech  Thee,  according  to  Thy 
promise  to  us,  and  we  entreat  of  Thee,  bring  us  not  into  temptation, 
but  deliver  us  from  the  Evil  One  and  his  hosts  [or  “powers”]35 .  Thou 
knowest,  Lord  of  glory,  what  Thy  flock  has  asked,  whereof  they  have 
need  by  nature.  And  Thou  hast  commanded  them  to  forgive  the  sins 
(they  have  committed)  one  against  another,  and  they  have  done  what 
Thou  hast  commanded  them.  And  me  Thou  hast  set  as  a  mediator  be¬ 
tween  Thee  and  them.  Wherefore  deal  graciously  with  them  according 
to  Thy  grace,  and  through  my  mediation  let  their  prayers  be  accepted. 
But  if  I  am  unworthy,  for  their  own  sake  accept;  and  if  they  be  not 

3?Some  words  seem  to  be  omitted  here:  perhaps  the  clause  “et  fiat  [voluntas 
tua  sicut  in  caelo  et  in  terra]”. 

34B  295  1.31-296  1.4. 

35Cf.  B  296  11.14-19,  the  second  of  2  alternative  prayers  to  be  said  after  the 
Pater  Noster.  Narsai  (p.26)  seems  not  to  contemplate  any  prayer  of  the  priest 
immediately  after  the  Pater  Noster,  but  says  at  once,  “Then  the  priest  says  to 
the  people:  “Peace  be  with  you’.”  What  follows  is  merely  the  pious  effusion 
of  George. 


116 


worthy,  accept  for  the  sake  of  the  good  who  are  among  them;  and  if 
our  works  be  not  worthy,  yet  for  our  faith’s  sake  do  Thou  accept;  and 
if  they  are  not  worthy,  for  the  sake  of  my  mediation  accept,  and  an¬ 
swer  (them)”.  And  thus,  (fol.l49v°)  accounting  [himself]  as  one  who 
has  received  compassion,  and  has  as  a  favour  been  accepted,  he  utters 
[lit.  “shews”]  the  words  of  the  seal  secretly:  forasmuch  as  this  mys¬ 
tery  is  hidden:  and  he  utters  aloud  ‘‘and  world  without  end”.36 

$ 

But  Gabriel,  who  knows  hidden  mysteries,  having  been  with  him 
[=  the  priest]  from  the  beginning,  answers  after  him37 .  But  the  people, 
because  they  have  not  heard  the  name  of  the  Trinity,  are  silent;  for  it 
is  not  fitting  that  they  should  answer  “Amen”38  to  a  saying  that  has 
not  the  Trinity  in  it.  And  so  the  priest  -  since  be  constantly  recites  in 
order  the  Trinity,  and  his  flock  (answer)  with  the  seal,  and  (since)  they 
have  already  been  associated  (with  him)  wills  now  that  they  should 
confess  the  Trinity  -  even  as  they  have  received  what  he  has  taught 
them  -  and  that  before  the  heavenly  King  should  be  revealed  his  own 
and  His  flock’s  glorious  confession  of  the  Trinity39 . 

And  first  he  invites  them  to  peace:-  “Peace  be  with  you”,40  -  know 
ye  that  the  mystery  of  the  peace  which  I  preached  to  you  in  the  begin¬ 
ning41  ,  concerning  which  I  have  taught  you,  is  now  accomplished42 , 
and  the  peace  which  up  to  the  present  was  given  by  a  mystery  has  now 
been  (given)  fully,  in  asmuch  as  the  sins  of  us  all  have  been  pardoned; 

i 

36Cf.  B  296  11.20-21. 

37Sc.  “Amen”  cf.  postea 

38B  296, 1.22:  but  there  the  people  (cf.  1.21),  not  the  deacon,  answer  “Amen”. 
39This  refers  to  B  296  11.32-34. 

40B  296, 1.26. 

i 

l 

41That  is,  the  .peace  which  he  announced  just  before  the  deacon  told  the  peo¬ 
ple  to  give  the  peace  one  to  another.  In  both  Narsai  and  George  comes  the 
kiss  of  peace  before  diptychs,  in  B  after. 

42Narsai  also  says  (p.26)  concerning  this  peace,  it  would  seem  (at  least  just 
after  he  has  said  that  the  priest  says  “Peace  be  with  you”)  “With  the  prayer  of 
our  Lord  the  priest  began  in  the  beginning  of  the  Mysteries,  and  with  it  he 
makes  an  end  now  that  the  Mysteries  are  completed. 


117 


and  I  have  brought  in  your  petitions  and  brought  out  to  you  the  gifts 
of  pardon.  “Rejoice  in  the  Lord,  and  in  the  might  of  His  power” 
[Eph.6: 10]  and  be  ye  strengthened  in  the  abundant  peace  which  by  [or 
“from”]  Him  has  been  preached  to  you.  And  when  they  answer  him 
according  as  it  is  customary43 ,  then  he  says  before  them  “The  holy 
(thing)44  [or  “holiness”]  to  the  holy  (ones)  is  fitting  in  perfection”45 . 

Some  have  thought  that  here,  with  this  (word)  “holy  (thing)”  [or 
“holiness”-  qudhsha],  he  says  concerning  the  Sacrament  [qudhsha:  see 
note]  that  is  on  the  altar  that  it  “is  fitting  in  perfection”  because  it  is 
right  that  we  should  receive  it  “in  perfection”46  of  conscience,  and  it 
“is  fitting  to  the  holy  ones”  [or  “saints”].  But  they  have  not  understood47 
that  the  Sacrament  [qudhsha]  has  been  given  to  sinners48 ,  and  for  the 


43B  296  1.28. 

44B  296  1.30. 

45The  word  is  qudhsha,  which  can  mean  either  “holiness”,  or  “holy 

thing”,  i.e.  the  sacrament.  The  latter  is  of  course  the  meaning  in  the  liturgy; 
and  the  “holy  (ones)”  (n^tm,  qaddisha)  means  the  communicants:  as  Narsai 
rightly  explains:  “In  all  the  holy  ones,  sanctified  by  the  Spirit  of  adoption  of 
sons  [=  baptism],  is  the  Holy  [thing]  fitting”.  But  George  wrongly  interprets 
qudhsha  as  “holiness”,  and  qaddisha  as  the  Trinity,  the  Father,  Son  and  H. 
Spirit  mentioned  in  the  people’s  answer.  Hence  in  what  follows  I  translated 
(according  to  his  view)  qudhsha  “holiness”,  when  he  understands  it  in  this  sense. 
46The  word  is  r^*\ar*Ax,  shalmutha,  or  shalmutha.  With  long  a  it  would  natu¬ 
rally  =  “agreement”,  “consensus”  [S:  which  gives  some  meaning  as 

the  correction  suggested]:  and  this  is  how  Narsai  interprets  it  (p.26,  note  3): 
“by  the  consensus  of  the  fathers”.  Narsai  means  that  according  to  church 
tradition  and  law  only  the  baptized  can  communicate.  This  is  clearly  the 
early  and  literal  meaning  of  the  words.  But  to  George  this  view  does  not 
appeal,  doubtless  because  now  the  catechumen  discipline  is  a  thing  of  the 
past.  Narsai’s  clearly  is  the  earlier  point  of  view. 

47I  read  r<lo  for  “but  understand  ye”,  which  gives  no 

sense  (the  connection  involves  the  change  of  only  a  single  letter)  (o  for  rC). 
48Note  also  that  Narsai  understands  qaddisha  “holy  (ones)”  as  =  baptized 
persons,  a  very  early  technical  use  in  Syriac  (from  Aphraates  on):  whereas 
George  seems  to  know  nothing  of  this  use,  and  simply  makes  it  =  “good”, 
“saints”,  as  opposed  to  sinners  (see  note  45). 


118 


pardoning  of  debts.  But  Christ,  when  He  delivered  it,  spoke  to  His  dis¬ 
ciples  thus:  This  is  my  body  which  for  your  sake  is  broken  [1  Co.l  1 :24, 
Syr.  version]  for  the  remission  of  sins”  [Mt.26:28:  at  the  chalice]49. 

But  whenever  the  priest  says  a  thing  (fol.  1 50r°)  without  explana¬ 
tion,  thou  shouldst  go  to  the  people,  who  explain  (it)  and  as,  when  he 
said  Let  your  minds  be  aloft”  [B283  1.10],  it  was  not  known  where 
“aloft”  is  until  it  was  said  by  the  people,  “To  Thee,  the  God  of 
Abraham”  and  (as)  when  he  said  “Crying  out  and  praising”  [B284  1.7: 
at  end  of  Preface],  it  was  not  known  what  until  the  people  said50  “Holy” 
and  (as)  again,  when  he  said  “Make  us  worthy”  [B  295  1.25],  at  the 
end  of  which  he  said  “let  us  call  Thee,  and  thus  let  us  say”  [B295  1.28- 
9:  but  different  here  from  George]51 ,  it  was  not  known  (what)  until  the 
people  said  “Our  Father  who  art  in  heaven”:  so  here  also  -  when  he 
has  said  “Holiness  (qudhsha)  to  the  Holies”  without  explanation,  the 
people  as  usual  become  the  interpreter  thereof.  As  I  have  already  said, 
now  that  the  time  of  the  reception  of  the  Mysteries  is  arrived,  he  [= 
the  priest]  wishes  that  they  should  confess  the  formula  of  the  Trinity 
and  praise  It;  wherefore,  when  he  has  said  “Holiness  to  the  Holies  is 
fitting  in  perfection  ,  the  people  declare  who  those  Holy  ones  are  of 
whom  he  has  spoken.  And  the  people  say:  “One  holy  Father,  one  holy 
Son,  one  holy  Spirit”.52  And  when  the  people  recite  them  in  order,  then 
they  end  up  “Glory”53  to  them;  that  by  the  first  recital  their  faith  may 
be  known;  (and)  by  the  “glory”  which  follows  (they  may  shew)  that 
they  have  known  Them  and  honoured  Them.  This  is  the  meaning  of 
the  Holiness  to  the  Holies”  which  the  priest  says. 


49These  words  are  found  in  exactly  the  same  form  in  the  Liturgy  of ‘Nestorius’ 
(see  Lit.  Horn.  ofNarsai ,  p.83).  The  Syr.  is 

rdAoacvxA  S  adds :  “And,  this  is  My  blood  of  the  Testament, 

which  for  many  is  shed  for  the  remission  of  sins”. 

^For  this  see  above,  pp.92f. 

51see  above  p.l  15,  note  32. 

2B  296,  1.32.  Us  might  translate  “One  Father,  Holy;  One  Son,  Holy;  One 
Spirit,  Holy”,  which  would  be  “The  one  Father  is  a  holy  One”,  etc.  or  “One 
Father,  a  holy  One”,  etc.  or  “One  is  the  Father,  a  holy  One”,  etc. 

53B  296  1.33. 


119 


y 


But  now,  when  the  whole  function  [dubbara]  is  completed,  and 
the  priest  has  put  them  in  mind  of  everything  that  is  seemly  and  they 
have  confessed  the  confession  that  he  has  taught  them:-  then  he  ap¬ 
proaches,  that  he  may  dwell  in  bliss  [=  receive  communion];  and  he 
first  receives  the  Sacrament54 :  even  as  one  who  has  laboured  is  first 
nourished  from  his  fruits.  And  as  Saint  Nestorius  teaches  in  his  lit¬ 
urgy  [quddasha],  our  Lord  also,  when  He  broke  His  body,  Himself 
first  ate;  (and)  thus  he  says:  “He  blessed  and  broke  and  ate,  (fol.l50v°) 
and  gave  to  His  disciples  and  said:  Take,  eat  of  it,  all  of  you:  this  is 
My  body.  And  again  the  cup  He  mingled  and  blessed,  and  drank,  and 
gave  to  His  disciples”.55  Wherefore  now  also  the  priest,  as  being  in 
our  Lord’s  place,  himself  eats,  like  our  Lord.  It  was  just  and  right  that 
our  Lord  should  eat,  that  even  as  He  shared  with  us  in  all  lowly  things, 
so  He  should  partake  with  us  -  in  His  human  nature  -  also  in  the  break¬ 
ing  of  His  body  and  He  ate  the  flesh  of  that  dumb  lamb  of  the  passover, 
He  should  eat  also  of  the  flesh  of  the  reasonable  Lamb. 

That  another  priest  approaches  and  gives  to  him  who  has  conse¬ 
crated:  (this  is)  because  he  [=  the  celebrant]  is  a  mediator  and  repre¬ 
sentative  of  our  Lord,  and  not  our  Lord  Himself  and  he  may  not  dare 
to  approach  the  Mysteries  of  his  Lord  without  a  mediator;  nor  because 
he  has  been  accounted  worthy  of  this  honour  [i.e.  of  consecrating]  may 
be  lightly  esteem  the  oblation  of  His  Lord.  And  as  redemption  was  not 
given  without  a  mediator,  so  neither  is  it  right  that  even  the  priest,  who 

^Note  that  George  says  nothing  here  about  the  kanuna  “Terrible  art  Thou”  B 
297  11.4-6  or  the  “Verses  of  the  Sanctuary”  B  297  11.10-26.  He  tells  us  later 
(ch.26  pp.l29ff.)  that  this  formed  no  part  of  the  ordinary  Sunday  service, 
and  was  only  said  on  festivals. 

550n  this  see  Liturgical  Homilies  ofNarsai  p.83.  The  Syr.  is: 

:  (Tlx^cvn— )  tn  SrvN^  m  \ 

c\m :  m-\\^ 

A_^rCo  n^na  rrf  \~\m 

c\ ~icn  .zjcn_.c\ 

_.V^  cnm  C71A5D  ciV^rC 

-.Kxrcfo  rr^sax  _=3a Vva 

_.C7X\0_^AirvA  -=3C71_.C\ 


120 


is  a  mediator  between  us  and  the  Creator,  should  approach  the  Mys¬ 
teries  without  a  mediator.  And  when  he  receives,  then  he  associates  with 
him  those  who  are  more  or  less  equal  to  him  in  the  [celebration  of  the] 
Mysteries:  I  mean,  (first)  him  who  reads  the  Gospel,  that  his 
paranymphus 50  may  thus  share  the  enjoyment  with  him.  This  one  [= 
the  paranymphus ]  is  in  the  place  of  Cephas,  who  was  our  Lord’s  sub¬ 
stitute57  with  regard  to  the  apostles. 

Then  the  people  communicate,  each  one  in  his  order:  as  there  are 
some  among  them  who  on  account  of  their  labours  [i.e.  taking  part  in 
the  liturgy]  are  worthy  to  receive  the  mansions  that  are  in  the  heaven 
[=  apse]58 .  And  when  all  the  presbyters  receive,  as  holy  men  of  Adam’s 
race,  then  the  spiritual  ones  [=  deacons]  also  are  set  free  from  the  pas¬ 
sions  of  inconstancy,  and  are  communicated  with  the  holy  Mysteries. 
And  first  of  them  all  Gabriel  approaches,  as  the  head  of  the  spiritual 
ones,  and  as  he  who  has  been  entrusted  with  the  [New]  Testament.  But 
after  him  Michael,  who  is  the  deacon  (foL151r°)  who  proclaimed  the 
‘‘peace”  on  the  bema;  and  afterwards  [the  other  deacons]  in  order.  The 
subdeacons,  who  are  the  middle  church  (of  angels),  cannot  by  the  can¬ 
ons  of  their  order  come  so  far  as  the  seat  of  the  higher  church  [=  dea¬ 
cons];  wherefore  they  wait  until  Christ  is  brought  to  them  from  heaven 
[=  apse],  and  sets  them  free  from  passions  and  grants  them  the  enjoy¬ 
ment. 

And  whereas  the  deacon  who  consecrated59  -  that  is  to  say,  Gabriel 
-  receives  the  cup60 ,  it  is  because  he  has  been  made  the  minister  of  the 
[New]  Testament.  He  it  is  who  distributes  the  gifts  of  his  Lord.  Only 
he  does  not  receive  the  cup  until  the  priest  himself  gives  (it)  to  him: 
which  shews  that  Christ  has  given  him  the  authority  over  His  treasure. 
For  neither  do  those  deacons  who  are  by  the  altar  dare  to  approach  to 

56Syr.  “amicus  sponsi”. 

58This  evidently  means,  communicate  in  the  apse.  As  already  observed  “man- 

«• 

sions”  is  a  common  word  with  George  for  the  Eucharist. 

59I.e.,  I  suppose,  assisted  the  priest  while  he  was  engaged  with  the  anaphora. 

297-8:  but  here  the  deacon  of  the  Apostle  receives  the  paten,  and  the  cup 
is  given  to  the  deacon  of  the  Pax. 


121 


the  business  of  the  fans  until  the  priest  allows  them:  shewing  that  they 
are  servants  and  have  not  authority  over  any  one  of  the  matters  of  the 
Kingdom.  And  so  Gabriel,  receiving  the  cup,  stands  at  the  door  of  the 
apse,  which  is  heaven  and  he  announces  to  those  who  have  lived  in  a 
middle  position61  :  “Lo  the  King  is  about  to  come  to  you,  and  in  His 

•  r 

mercy  He  will  pardon  your  sms,  and  as  a  favour  He  will  make  you  to 
enjoy  (the  mysteries),  on  account  of  the  good  quality  of  your  faith”.62 

And  those  first  ones  - 1  mean  those  who  are  within  [=  ministers]63 , 
as  being  worthy  because  of  the  strenuousness  of  their  labours64 .  But 
those  middle  ones  - 1  mean  the  faithful  in  the  nave  -  who  are  without 
labours,  wait  till  the  end,  as  those  on  whom  mercy  has  been  done65 . 
And  he  [the  priest;  or  Christ,  i.e..,  the  Sacrament]  goes  forth  to  them, 
while  they  are  filled  with  reverence  for  Him.  And  first  the  deacon, 
Gabriel,  suppliantly  begs  the  priest,  Christ,  that  he  will  bless66  His  peo¬ 
ple  and  pardon  their  sins.  And  as  it  is  not  possible  that  they  enjoy  (com¬ 
munion)  unless  (their)  sins  are  first  pardoned,  he  [=  the  priest)  then 
shews  his  goodness,  and  accedes  to  the  request  of  Gabriel,  and  he  sends 
before  him  his  mercy  by  what  he  (fol.l51v°)  says.  What  then? 

“The  gift  of  the  grace  of  our  Lifegiver,  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  be 
fulfilled  in  mercy  with  us  all”67 .  That  is:  By  mercy  you  have  been  made 
worthy  of  this  gift,  not  by  labours.  And  “the  grace  of  Christ”:  He  who 
clothed  Himself  in  a  garment  (taken)  from  you,  and  suffered  and  was 

61  In  chap.  13  of  this  Tract  it  has  been  said  that  the  faithful  in  the  nave  occupy 
a  “middle  position”:  so  it  is  these  who  are  meant  here.  He  does  mean  the 
faithful  here:  cf.  postea.  For  the  ceremony  of  communion  in  Addai  and  Mari 
at  the  present  day:  see  B  pp.298f. 

62cf.  B  298  11.5-1 1,  to  which  this  may  correspond:  there  is  there  a  mention  of 
“pardon”. 

63S  supplies:  “as  those  who  by  labours  are  worthy  of  the  kingdom,  approach 
to  [Him?]  with  openness  of  face,  and  receive  their  gifts”,  - 
64"Labours”  here  means  taking  part  as  ministers  in  the  service. 

65I.e.  like  the  last  comers  in  the  parable  of*the  labourers. 

^B  298  1.17 

67B  298  11.20-1;  cf.  Narsai  p.27  “The  grace  of  our  Lord  Jesus  be  with  you”. 
George  and  Narsai  say  nothing  of  the  preliminary  blessing  in  B  297  1.3 1  -  298 
(col. 2)  1.15. 


122 


tempted,  and  is  able  to  help  those  who  are  tempted,  -  lo,  He  has  shewn 
mercy  upon  you,  and  has  “fulfilled  with  you  His  grace”,  and  has  given 
you  the  gift  of  His  kingdom.  And  so  the  people  also,  having  seen  the 
mercy  that,  lo,  lights  down  upon  them  from  the  Judge,  Christ,  answer: 
:0  Lord,  for  ever  and  ever.  Amen.”68  Let  thy  mercy  be  upon  us;  and 
let  us  not  for  our  sins  be  depnved  of  the  enjoyment  of  Thee;  since  Thou 
art  good,  and  a  Master  that  is  kind  to  His  servants.  But  Gabriel  goes 
forth,  as  one  who  knows  the  way:  for  it  is  he  also  who  will  bear  the 
cross  of  our  Lord  and  come  before  Him  in  the  resurrection.  And  here 
you  are  to  consider  the  cup  as  in  place  of  the  cross,  which  in  the  hand 
of  Gabriel  is  to  appear  before  our  Lord  at  His  coming.  The  cup  also  is 
[=  represents]  blood;  and  it  is  shed  first,  before  the  sacrifice.  But  that 
(interpretation)  of  the  cross  of  our  Lord69 ,  which  is  to  come  before  Him 
in  the  hand  of  Gabriel,  is  the  more  exact. 

But  perhaps  someone  will  ask:  why  does  not  one  of  the  presbyters 
take  the  cup,  if  the  body  and  blood  are  one?  We  answer  that  all  the 
presbyters  are  now  in  the  state  of  bliss70 ,  and  as  it  were  free  from  [lit. 
“without”]  labours,  and  in  a  state  of  joy  and  peace.  But  this  deacon, 
as  a  steward  of  Christ,  is  associated  with  our  Lord  [=  priest]  until  He 
has  made  an  end  of  distributing  the  mansions  [=  Eucharist]:  until  mercy 
has  been  done  on  all  Adam’s  house,  and  they  receive  the  mansions. 
Then  he  also  shall  rest. 

But  the  doors  of  the  nave  are  shut,  (for)  a  type  of  the  doors  of  the 
kingdom,  which  are  shut  before  the  gainsayers71 ;  and  they  knock  at 
the  doors,  but  they  are  answered  [...]72.  For  thus  says  blessed  Isho' 
Yabh:  “The  (fol.l52r°)  subdeacons  shut  the  doors  of  the  nave  after  the 
saying  ‘Go  ye  hearers,  see  to  the  doors’.  And  the  daughters  of  the  con¬ 
venient73  (shut)  the  women’s  door.  And  they  do  not  open  them  until 

68B  298  1.23. 

69I.e.  that  explanation  which  refers  the  cup  to  the  cross. 

70I.e.  of  having  received  communion. 

71Or  “unbelievers”;  lit  “deniers”  (rOicvj^) 

72See  next  page  -  “I  know  you  not”. 

73I.e.  religious  women  of  some  sort:  George  earlier  equates  them  with  the 
deaconesses,  cf.  pp.61,  64. 


123 


the  people  receive  the  sacrament,  and  they  set  the  mysteries  in  order74 , 
and  the  service  begins;  and  the  doors  of  the  kingdom  are  shut  before 
the  gainsayers;  and  when  they  knock  the  bridegroom,  the  priest,  an¬ 
swers  them  I  know  you  not”.75 

The  table76  also  Michael  receives77 .  As  servants  they  [sc.  the  2 
deacons]  bow  their  necks  to  the  service  before  Christ  their  master;  and 
while  he  distributes,  they  are  the  bearers  of  the  mansions;  shewing  by 
this  that  the  whole  service  of  the  resurrection  is  performed  by  angels. 
And  our  Lord  said  in  the  parable  of  the  tares  and  the  field  that  the 
harvest  is  the  end  of  the  world,  but  the  reapers  are  the  angels;  and  all 
the  tares  that  are  in  the  nave  at  the  beginning  the  angels  come  and  sepa¬ 
rate  out  at  the  resurrection  -  when  Christ  has  willed  to  ascend  with  the 
four  deacons78  -  at  the  anthem79 ,  and  at  the  saying  “Whoso  has  not 
received  baptism”,  and  the  rest.  That  is  a  type  of  the  separating  out  of 
the  bad,  who  are  the  tares.  And  so  they  separate  and  drive  out  the 
tares80,  but  leave  the  wheat,  the  sons  of  the  faith.  And  if  there  be  any 
who,  while  he  is  worthy  of  the  faith,  lives  in  the  evil  of  divers  sins, 

74This  refers  to  the  setting  of  the  Mysteries  on  the  altar  after  the  dismissals. 
7SThe  words  with  which  the  quotation  from  Isho’  Yabh  was  introduced  imply 
that  Isho’  Yabh  made  this  allusion:  and  so  the  quotation  clearly  extends  as 
far  as  this:  Moreover  the  MS  has  the  extra  large  stop  here,  which  is  some¬ 
times  used  for  making  the  limits  of  a  quotation. 

76Sc.  the  tray,  or  Paten:  cf.  infra,  pp.126,  136. 

77Cf.  B  298  11. 3f.  (2nd  col.):  where  it  is  the  other  deacon  (‘of  the  Apostle’  = 
Gabriel)  who  takes  the  paten. 

7sI.e.  when  the  cross  and  Gospel  book  go  from  bema  to  apse  ( the  Bishop  etc. 
signified  death  by  sitting  on  the  ground  during  the  anthem,  resurrection  by 
standing  up,  ascension  by  going  to  the  apse).  See  earlier  (p.60)  for  4  deacons 
with  cross  and  Gospel. 

7;See  pp.68f.. 

’On  pp.65f.  it  is  implied,  in  fact  stated,  that  the  dismissals  were  no  longer 
taken  literally  in  George’s  day.  What  we  have  here  would  seem  to  imply  that 
they  were  taken  literally,  that  the  catechum'ens  were  actually  driven  out.  But 
note  that  he  says  the  dismissals  are  a  type  of  the  separation  of  good  and  bad: 
and  it  will  presently  appear  that  what  is  said  here  is  only  metaphorical.  George 
often  interprets  Isho’  Yabh’s  directions  even  when  obsolete  as  if  they  were 
still  in  force,  [see  p.  1 25  note  85  below]. 


124 


and  has  not  attained  to  one  of  the  things  of  faith  in  any  of  his  senses, 
it  is  shewn  by  the  saying  “Whoso  receivith  not  the  sacrament  let  him 
depart”  that  he  is  driven  away  from  the  enjoyment  (of  the  Mysteries), 
as  one  who  has  not  upon  him  garments  worthy  of  the  marriage  supper. 
And81  even  if  there  be  here82  one  who,  on  account  of  accidental  (causes 
or  sms)  that  happen  to  him,  does  not  receive  the  Sacrament,  let  him 
also  depict  a  likeness  of  him  who  had  not  (fitting)  garments,  and  let 
him  go  forth  without83 .  And  whereas  up  to  that  (point)84  all  were  stand¬ 
ing  together:  (this  means)  that  even  so  all  men  alike  come  into  the  world, 
and  go  forth  equally  by  death  -  the  righteous  and  the  wicked  -  and  rise 
from  the  grave  in  the  resurrection  equally,  and  (are  equal)  until  the 
judgment,  when  the  sheep  are  separated  from  the  goats.  And  so  at  the 
mysteries  also:  (fol.l52v°)  they  have  stood  together  until  the  judgment 
and  retribution  -  baptized  (and)  unbaptized,  and  those  who  receive  and 
those  who  do  not  receive85 .  And  at  the  end  those  who  have  laboured 
are  exalted,  and  those  who  have  not  labours  are  driven  away.  And  that 
saying  of  the  parable  of  our  Lord  is  fulfilled  in  them  which  He  said  to 

8 ‘There  is  a  full  stop  here:  so  we  must  read  for^rCn 

82Note  that  George  is  now  contemplating  the  actual  time  of  Communion. 

83Here  again  George  seems  to  be  speaking  literally  of  going  out  of  church: 
but  he  really  has  in  mind  the  going  forth  from  the  wedding  supper,  which  is 
typified  by  abstention  from  communion.  (See  note  85  below). 

84"That  point”  i.e.  at  the  wedding  supper,  when  just  before  the  man  without 
the  wedding  garment  was  cast  out. 

85Here  it  is  quite  clear  that  the  non  communicants  have  remained  in  church 
up  to  the  time  of  communion.  On  pp.65f.  the  opinion  of  “some”  that  in  early 
times  the  catechumens  left  the  Church  after  the  dismissals,  was  refuted  by 
George;  and  in  the  pages  preceding  he  openly  assumed  that  the  persons  ad¬ 
dressed  as  unbaptised  in  the  dismissal  formulas  have  (or  may  have)  been 
baptized,  signed,  etc.  (cf.  Liturgical  Homilies  of  Narsai ,  pp. 77-79)  But  on 
pp.l24ff.  it  appears  to  be  stated  categorically  that  the  unbaptized  and  non¬ 
communicants  did  in  fact  leave  the  church  after  the  dismissals.  The  question 
rises:  is  George  in  these  last-mentioned  pages  speaking  literally,  or  is  he 
speaking  metaphorically?  Observe  first  of  all  that  if  the  catechumens  or  non¬ 
communicants  are  not  in  church  at  the  time  of  communion  [about  which  he 
is  speaking],  there  is  no  obvious  reason  why  he  should  here  introduce  them 
at  all. 


125 


them:  “Depart  from  me,  ye  cursed,  into  everlasting  fire”:  and  this  also 
comes  to  pass. 

But  the  people,  seeing  the  mercy  (that  has  been  done)  upon  them, 
joyfully  approach  to  our  Lord  and  the  table  [=  tray,  or  paten]86 .  And 
they  come  thronging  forward,  as  men  in  haste,  who  are  afraid  of  miss¬ 
ing  the  enjoyment.  And  all  of  them,  O  brother,  depict  a  type  of  the  res- 
urrection.  And  if  thou  seek  to  see  the  beginning  of  the  world  and  the 
end  thereof,  the  judgment  and  retribution87  that  is  after  the  resurrec- 


Note  next  that  he  introduces  the  subject  by  comparing  the  communion  at 
which  the  deacons  [=  angels  in  his  symbolism]  assist  to  the  separation,  at  the 
end  of  the  world,  of  the  bad  from  the  good,  of  the  tares  from  the  wheat:  “And 
while  he  (the  priest)  distributes  they  (the  deacons)  are  the  bearers  of  the 
mansions  [=  Eucharist]:  shewing  by  this  that  the  whole  service  of  the  resur¬ 
rection  is  performed  by  angels.  And  our  Lord  said  in  the  parable  of  the  tares 
and  the  field  that  the  harvest  is  the  end  of  the  world,  but  the  reapers  are  the 
angels”.  [Surely  by  the  “end  of  the  world”  he  means  the  end  of  the  mysteries, 
the  communion].  Then  he  says  that  the  separation  took  place  at  the  dismiss¬ 
als;  but  adds:  “That  is  a  type  of  the  separating  out  of  the  bad,  who  are  the 
tares”;  which  may  only  mean  that  it  foreshews  the  separation  which  is  really 
effected  at  the  time  of  communion.  That  this,  and  what  he  further  says  on 
p.125  of  non-communicants  “going  forth  without”  is  mercy  metaphorical, 
that  the  going  forth  really  means  abstention  from  communion,  is  beyond 
reasonable  doubt  [quite  apart  from  what  he  said  in  ch.13,  p.64ff.]  by  what  he 
says  on  pp.l25ff.  He  says,  that  as  all  come  into  the  world  alike  and  die  and 
rise  in  the  resurrection  and  stand  together  in  judgment,  when  the  sheep  are 
separated  from  the  goats  “so  at  the  mysteries  also:  they  have  stood  together 
until  the  judgment  and  retribution  -  baptized  (and)  unbaptized,  those  who 
receive  and  those  who  do  not  receive.  And  at  the  end  those  who  have  la¬ 
boured  are  exalted,  and  those  who  have  not  labours  are  driven  away”  (cf. 
similar  language  in  ch.13;  Lit.  Horn,  of  Narsai  p.79).  Now  George  tells  us 
(p.  100)  that  our  death  is  represented  by  the  descent  of  the  H.  Ghost,  and  our 
resurrection  (i.e.  the  general  judgment)  by  the  part  of  the  service  after  the 
descent  of  the  H.  Ghost.  So  in  the  last  passage  the  judgment  and  retribution 
=  the  communion  when  we  either  receive  or  do  not  receive  the  heavenly 
mansions  by  which  George  always  denotes  communion.  And  so  here  he  clearly 
states,  in  accord  with  what  he  said  in  ch.  1 3,  p.65  etc.  that  the  non-communicants 
stand  in  church  together  with  communicants  up  to  the  very  time  of  communion. 

86cf.  p.  1 24  above  and  p.  1 36  below. 


126 


tion,  and  the  enjoyment  and  the  torment  and  those  to  whom  mercy  shall 
be  shewn,  and  those  who  are  not  worthy  of  mercy,  and  all  things  that 
are  to  be:  examine  the  service  of  the  Mysteries* *  picture  these  things 
before  your  eyes,  while  you  read  the  ceremonies88  which  blessed  Isho’ 
Yabh  has  set  forth  -  even  though  they  be  not  carried  out89  -  and  you 
will  learn  from  them  all  that  you  seek.  And  as  a  man  who  desires  to 
see  the  image  of  a  king  -  when  his  portrait  is  displayed  on  a  tablet  and 
he  sees  all  the  portrayings  of  him  [=  the  king] ,  and  how  he  commands 
and  how  he  is  obeyed,  and  how  he  distributes  gifts,  and  how  he  slays: 
and  the  mind  of  the  beholder  is  satisfied,  and  he  reckons  these 
portrayings  to  be  little  short  of  the  (actual)  sight  of  him  [=  the  king]  - 
even  so  in  the  case  of  the  mysteries  also,  wherein  are  depicted  all  the 

institutions  of  the  kingdom:  whose  wishes  to  know  the  things  that  are 

>  » 

to  be,  when  he  sees  them  [=  the  mysteries]  he  is  satisfied;  and  if  he  be 
good  he  rejoices,  and  if  he  be  evil  he  even  now  suffers  torment. 

And  for  this  cause  are  these  likenesses  depicted  in  the  church,  O 
brother,  that  the  beholders  may  see  them  openly90,  and  fear  the  judg¬ 
ment  to  come.  And  as  the  Scriptures  have  shewn  us  torment  and  bless, 
and  by  (foil 5 3r°)  nature  also  our  dissolution  and  our  re-formation  and 
our  resuscitation  are  depicted  before  our  minds,  so  it  has  seemed  good 
to  the  Apostles91  and  Fathers  to  set  forth  by  means  of  the  Mysteries 
the  judgment  and  the  retribution,  and  the  enjoyment  and  the  torment; 
that  when  the  beholders  see  they  may  fear  and  repent.  And  Christian 


87I.e.  the  part  of  the  service  which  comes  after  the  invocation  of  the  H.  Spirit 
(see  above,  note  85).  ' 

* 

r<\  This  may  refer  to  the  dismissal  formulas,  of  which 

George  has  just  been  speaking.  Cf.  what  he  said  in  ch.13,  p.66  above  in 
reference  to  the  same  matter:  “but,  as  I  have  already  said,  blessed  Isho’  Yabh 
set  down  ...  such  things  as  should  signify  mysteries,  and  did  not  so  much  care 

about  the  (actual)  things”  (cf.  note  ad  loc.). 

^I.e.  see  clearly  what  is  meant  -  see  the  realities  that  lie  behind. 

91Not  improbably  an  allusion  to  the  Liturgy  of  ‘Apostles’  Addai  and  Mari 
(see  above). 


127 


ought  through  all  the  reading  [or  “lections”]  and  all  the  [other]  serv¬ 
ices  to  approach  to  the  light  of  the  Mysteries,  which  teach  them  by  an 
orderly  representation92  all  those  things  which  the  Scriptures  teach  col¬ 
lectively 93 

But  negligent  priests  and  believers  have  left  those  things  that  ought 
to  be  done;  nor  do  they  search  out  for  what  cause  Isho’  Yabh  prescribed 
them;  and  it  does  not  please  them  to  depict  all  the  representations  of 
the  Mysteries:  but  if  he  has  commanded  that  the  presbyters  should  sit, 
they  set  (this)  at  naught,  supposing94  that  it  is  for  laziness  that  they  sit 
in  the  bema;  and  they  despise  the  canon  [=  in  effect  'rubric']  and  do 
not  sit.  And  hence  they  make  void  all  the  canons  [here  =  miles  of  in¬ 
terpretation]  touching  the  resurrection95 .  And  the  faithful  also  do  not 
worship  and  stand  as  they  ought;  but  as  if  they  had  no  law  “their  ways 
are  undone  continually”  [Ps.l0:5  -  Syr.],  and  they  understand  none  of 
the  ecclesiastically  proprieties96,  and  by  them  [sc.  the  mysteries]  he  de¬ 
picts  all  the  things  that  are  these  [=  in  the  resurrection];  and  then  when 
he  receives  the  Sacrament  and  goes  to  his  house,  he  rejoices  as  one 
who  sees  Christ  and  His  judgment  and  His  mercy  and  His  retribution. 
But  since  this  matter  by  reason  of  its  greatness  has  been  prolonged  - 
for  many  are  the  types  and  the  explanations  (thereof)  that  are  in  it  -  let 
us  close  this  (discourse)  and  explain  other  matters  of  this  great  and 
divine  service;  that  we  may  rest  in  the  goodly  harbour  of  the  end  of 
our  words. 


92So<_  seems  to  mean  “pictorially”,  or  “dramatically”.  The  expansion  is 

of  the  same  type  and  construction  as  k*  \  r<\^=>  and  rC±=>\  The  idea 

seems  to  be  that  the  Mysteries  present  graphically  and  in  order  all  that  the 
Scriptures  give  “collectively”,  i.e.  all  together,  without  orderly  arrangement. 

93See  last  note. 

94Reading  for  _ cn~l~73  (text). 

95Sc.  as  they  do  not  signify  death  by  sitting  they  cannot  signify  the  resurrec¬ 
tion  by  standing  up  again. 

96Translate  according  to  S:  “But  there  is  one  who  both  rejoices  and  grieves, 
and  sees  all  the  things  that  are  to  be:  who,  when  he  stands  at  the  mysteries, 
has  his  mind  on  the  resurrection”,  etc. 


128 


CHAPTER  26 


Why  they  say  ‘Terrible  art  Thou”  on  festivals1,  and  on  the 
Epiphany  a  Hullala2 ;  and  why  they  do  not  say  it  [i.e.  probably,  either) 
on  (foL153v°)  all  Sundays;  and  why  the  deacon  says,  “Praise  Ye”3  and 
they  say  a  responsory  f unnaya ]  in  the  bema4 5 ;  and  what  is  the  mystery 
contained  in  the  responsory  [ unnaya ]  and  the  sides  [bate]  and  “Thy 
body  and  Thy  blood”,  and  all  things  that  in  these  are  set  down.  We 
have  already  said  that  the  festivals  [sc.  feasts  of  our  Lord]  are  more 
especially  assimilated  to  [or  “represent]  the  dispensation  of  our  Lord; 
and  when  we  keep  a  festival,  beside  [=  in  addition  to]  the  commemo¬ 
ration  of  the  death  and  resurrection  we  honour  also  the  festival  itself3 . 
And  since  from  the  beginning  of  the  Mysteries  we  typify  the  death  and 
resurrection,  and  we  cannot  [here  (?)]  make  any  difference,  by  way  of 
addition,  between  the  Nativity  and  the  mysteries  of  the  Epiphany  and 
the  Ascension6 :  now  that  the  consecration  is  completed,  we  return  to 
shew  forth  the  honour  of  the  festival,  treating  the  mysteries  as  Christ, 
and  the  priests  and  deacons  as  the  disciples  and  angels;  and  we  stand 
in  order  as  servants  before  a  master  and  repeat  the  praise  [or  “recount 
the  glories”7  ]  of  the  King.  And  whereas  at  the  Nativity  there  appeared 
to  the  shepherds  angels  saying  “Glory”,  and  the  shepherds  also  returned 
glorifying  and  blessing  God,  and  the  Magi  too,  when  they  had  seen 
the  star,  “rejoiced  with  an  exceeding  great  joy”:  even  so  now  also,  all 
glorify  “God  most  High”8 .  And  since  the  glory  which  those  former 


■B.297  11.4  ff.  (See  p.120,  note  54). 

2I.e.  a  division  (1/20)  of  the  Psalter  (usually);  cf.  p.132,  note  24. 

3B  298  1.2  (col.l);  cf.  p.132,  note  24. 

4cf.  B  298  1.30;  cf.  p.132,  note  24. 

5I.e.,  evidently  -  us  have  some  special  feature  in  the  service  to  mark  the 
festival. 

6nlnWna  ^  i.e.  apparently, 

no  difference  between  our  feast  and  another  can  b$  marked  by  adding  any- 

•  * 

thing  to  the  liturgy  in  the  central  (anaphoral)  portion  -  the  “consecration”. 
The  same  word  in  Syr  (nlxoca,  Shubhha)  may  mean  either  ‘praise’  or  ‘glory’. 

8B  297  1.4. 


129 


prophets  saw  - 1  mean  Isaiah  and  Daniel  -  was  celebrated  in  the  Canon 
“crying”9,  above:  they  [sc.  the  people]  come  now  again  with  their 
plaudits,  giving  praise  from  two  other  prophets,  Daniel  and  Ezekiel, 
and  they  bring  forth  those  lofty  utterances  that  are  in  them:  “Terrible 
art  Thou,  God  most  High,  from  Thy  sanctuary10,  of  David  [Ps.68:35]: 
Blessed  is  the  honour  of  the  Lord  from  His  place”11,  of  Ezekiel 
[Ez.3: 12].  And  they  applaud  with  these  sayings,  adducing  the  testimony 
of  the  prophets,  which  were  fulfilled  in  Christ  when  He  was  [lit.  “who 
was”)  bom.  Even  so  the  Gospel  applies  to  each  one  of  the  incidents  of 
our  Lord’s  dispensation  a  saying  of  the  prophets. 

That  they  recite  secretly  it  first12  and  then  raise  their  voice13*:  (that 
means)  that  the  dispensation' of  our  Lord  was  hidden  from  the  general¬ 
ity,  but  the  angels  knew  it.  (fol.l54r°)  And  that  the  lesser  people14  lift 
up  their  voices:  (that  is)  that  our  Lord  has  now  been  revealed  and  made 
known.  And  (that)  thou  in  the  nave  answer  these15,  (this  signifies)  the 
nations  who  were  converted  and  received  the  faith  of  Christ.  That  those 
within  [the  apse  (?)]16  say  the  verses  [pethgame ]  from  the  Old  (Testa¬ 
ment):  (that  is)  because  they  are,  as  it  were,  better  acquainted  with  the 
prophets  and  their  testimonies,  and  they  bring  forward  (those  of)  their 
testimonies  which  have  been  fulfilled  on  the  same  [=  present]  festival; 
since  they  do  not  say  any  but  suitable  verses  [pethgame ].  That  they 
add  after  every  two  verses  [pethgame ]  “Terrible  art  Thou”:  (that  is) 
they  write  prophecy  with  the  dispensation  of  our  Lord.  That  the  peo¬ 
ple  answer  “Terrible  art  Thou”  only,  and  do  not  say  the  verses:  (that 
is)  all  the  peoples  having  been  baptized,  the  yoke  of  the  commandments 

of  the  Old  (Testament)  was  not  laid  upon  them;  but  as  the  apostles  wrote 
■'  . ■■  —  ■■■■■  - -  ■  *  ~~  ■■■ . ■■■■—■ 

9I.e.  The  concluding  words  (or  Canon)  of  the  Preface,  “Crying”  etc. 

I0B  297  1.4. 

"B  295  1.5. 

l2Cf.  B.  297  1.2  “in  a  low  voice”. 
l3Cf.  B.  297  1.7  “in  a  loud  voice”. 

l4I.e.  perhaps  the  singer.  Possibly  translation:  “a  few  people”:  i.e.  those  in 
the  bema  (cf.  infra). 
l5See  B  297  1.7  ' 
l6See  below  p.  133. 


130 


to  them  -  as  the  Acts  shew  -  that  they  should  abstain  from  things  stran¬ 
gled  and  from  fornication  and  from  things  sacrificed  and  from  blood 
[Acts  15:20,27],  but  apart  from  these  things  they  might  eat  anything. 
And  so  now  also  these  say  the  verses  of  the  dispensation:  that  is  “Ter¬ 
rible  art  Thou”. 

By  the  continuation17 ,  which  they  say  afterwards,  they  shew  that 
the  expectation  of  the  prophets  has  been  fulfilled,  and  that  they  [= 
prophets]  have  been  satisfied.  And  that  they  mingle  the  continuation 
with  the  response  [i unnaya]1 8 :  (this  signifies)  the  union  which  has  come 
about  of  the  people  [=  Israel]  with  the  peoples  through  the  Gospel  of 
Christ.  The  deacon  who  says  “Praise  [or  “glorify”]  ye”19  is  Gabriel 
who  announces  the  peace  to  those  who  lived  under  the  Old  (Law)  and 
saw  Christ  from  afar  - 1  mean  all  the  prophets  -  (those)  in  the  bema  - 
were  walking  in  the  Law  in  Jerusalem:  whence  Isho’  Yabh  says: 
“ Shahare 20  ascend  the  bema  and  say  the  response”  [unnaya]. 

That  they  ascend  to  the  bema:  that  is  to  Jerusalem  and  that  they 
are  also  blind21 :  (i.e.)  that  those  who  have  been  diligent  in  labours,  but 
have  not  partaken  of  baptism22  do  not  fully  become  enjoyers  [of  the 
N.T.  dispensation],  but  are  as  blind  men  in  the  enjoyment;  and  they 
fulfil  the  words  which  are  Lord  spoke,  that  “Whoso  is  not  bom  of  water 
and  the  Spirit  is  not  (fol.  154v°)  able  to  see  the  kingdom  of  God  (John 
3:5).  So  even  the  blind  who  are  under  the  Law  are  comforted;  and  when 
they  see  that  they  have  been  called  to  the  mercy  of  the  ministry,  which 


17See  B  297  1.18  (r^x-aar^)  See  p.132,  note  24. 

,8Probably  =  “Terrible  art  Thou”:  cf.  B  297  1.21. 

,9B  298  1.2.  The  order  probably  means  “Say  the  ‘Gloria  Patri’  etc.”. 

20KTScn*  lit  “vigilatores”  See  Brockelmann  Lex.  Syr.  s.v.  r^vnx  “presbyter,  qui 
noctumo  praesertim  officio  decantando  praeesf  ’  B.O.  3,  2,  820.  These  Shahre 
are  probably  the  same  as  the  KXqpoi  (choir)  who  receive  communion  at  the 
bema:  cf.  p.136,  note  48. 

2 'What  follows  will  help  to  explain  the  meaning.  These  “Shahare”  represent 
the  Old  Testament  worthies,  who  had  not,  like  Simeon,  “seen”  God’s  mercy. 

22He  does  not  mean  that  those  who  go  up  to  the  bema  are  really  unbaptized, 
but  that  they  represent  the  prophets  who  were  unbaptized  (see  before). 


131 


is  in  our  Lord,  with  joy  they  “give  glory”23  [or  they  “praise”  -  cf.  the 
deacon’s  remark  “Praise  ye”,  above):  shewing  thereby  on  this  wise:  We 
were  not  even  worthy  to  see  this  goodly  hope,  but  we  were  expecting 
it  and  we  desired  to  see  it;  and  by  similitudes  it  was  in  some  small 
part  depicted  before  us;  and  we  were  satisfied,  according  to  that  which 
our  Lord  Himself  has  said  in  the  Gospel:  “Abraham  your  father  was 
eager  to  see  My  day,  and  he  saw  and  was  glad”  (John  8:56).  Even  so 
we  were  desirous  to  see  him:  as  our  Lord  has  said  again  also:  “Many 
prophets  and  righteous  were  desirous  to  see  one  of  the  days  of  the  Son 
of  Man  and  they  saw  not”  (Mt.l3:7).  But  they,  which  they  joyfully  “give 
glory”  [or  “praise”],  depict  a  type  of  those  who  ministered  under  the 
Old  (Testament). 

And  when  the  response  [unnaya]  is  ended,  and  our  Lord  [=  priest] 
goes  forth,  then  they  return  again  and  introduce  their  witness  from  the 
versicles  [bate]  which  take  the  place  of  the  verses  [pethgame]  of  their 
prophecy:  Lo  my  eyes  have  seen  Thy  mercy,  which  Thou  hast  prepared 
for  all  the  peoples:  a  light  for  the  revelation  of  the  gentiles,  and  glory 
for  thy  people  Israel”  (Lk.2:30-2)  -  the  word  which  Zachary  (sic)  spoke 
-  and  each  of  the  versicles  [bate]  they  unite  with  the  response24 
[unnaya]:  as  though  each  one  of  the  prophets  should  shew  his  own 
(prophecies)  and  unite  his  prophecy  to  Christ  who  has  appeared. 


23I.e.  probably  “They  say  the  “Gloria”  (Patri  etc.):  cf.:  notes  19  and  24. 

24It  is  possible  that  their  response  was  something  different  from  “Terrible” 
etc.  This  seems  to  be  implied  above  (end:  “and  when  the  response  is  ended”) 
and  on  p.  1 35,  see  also  note  there.  There  is  no  sign  of  this  in  B  297-8.  George’s 
arrangement  compared  with  B  297-8  seems  to  have  this  (1)  “Terrible  art 
Thou”  (=B  297  11.4-17);  (2)  “Continuation”  (=B  297  11.19-26.  probably);  (3) 
Omit:  “Let  us  pray.  Peace  be  with  you”  to  end  of  page;  (4)  Deacon  says  “Give 
Ye  Glory”  [=  (?)  B  298  1.2];  (5)  They  say  “glory  [to  the  Father”  etc.  (cf.  notes 
above)]:  This  is  not  in  B;  (6)  Then  verses  of  Nunc  dimittis  with  a  response 
[see  note  above  and  later]  [not  in  B  ]:  this  is  said  when  the  priest  goes  forth  to 
give  communion  (cf.  above);  and  would  come  naturally  after  the  blessing  (B 
298  11.17-21);  (7)  a  new  anthem  “Thy  body  and  Thy  blood”  which  appears  to 
be  something  like  col.l  of  B  pp.298  1.5-299  1.30. 


132 


And  whereas,  while  the  response  is  one  the  versicles  [bate]  are 
many  [=  more  than  one]:  (that  is:)  though  Christ  is  one,  the  prophets 
were  many.  And  blessed  Ephraim  also  set  to  every  response  versicles 
according  to  the  letters  [of  the  alphabet].  That  he  set  (them)  to  the  let¬ 
ters  shews  that  by  the  Scriptures25  we  have  known  the  power  of  God. 
That  he  set  (them)  to  all  the  letters  shews  that  the  prophets  are  many, 
and  that  all  their  prophecies  have  received  fulfilment.  And  whereas, 
the  versicles  are  each  and  all  necessarily  coupled  (sic)26  ]  to 

the  response:  (that  is)  all  the  prophets  adhered  to  one  Christ.  (fol.l55r°). 
That  the  versicles  resemble  the  continuation27  of  the  response:  (that  is) 
their  prophecy  corresponds  to  those  things  which  were  done  by  our  Lord 
in  His  dispensation. 

That  those  (who  are)  by  the  Mysteries  now  change,  (saying)  Thy 
body  and  Thy  blood28 :  (signifies)  the  thanksgiving  of  all  reasonable 
beings,  who  render  glory  [or  “praise”]  to  Him  who  gives  the  enjoy¬ 
ment.  That  those  by  the  Mysteries  recite,  then  those  in  the  bema  an¬ 
swer:  (that  is)  that  “the  dead  who  are  in  Christ  shall  rise  first”  (1 
Th.4:16);  and  they  also  shall  begin  the  enjoyment  and  the  giving  of 
thanks.  That  the  others  answer  after  them,  is  because  they  also  through 
the  mercy  shewn  to  them  shall  have  received  the  enjoyment.  And  those 
who  say  the  last  versicles29  are,  as  it  were,  those  who  on  account  of 
their  labours  have  authority  over  the  holy  mysteries  and  the  mansions 
of  the  kingdom:  and  their  mansions  are  many. 

That  the  people  answer  the  first  clause  [tara]30 :  (that  is)  that  they, 
on  account  of  the  mercy  which  they  have  received,  have  been  held  wor- 


25The  writer  probably  equated  (on  some  system)  the  number  of  the  books  of 
scripture  with  that  of  the  letters  of  the  Syriac  alphabet. 

26S  has  the  right  reading  which  a  marginal  note  explains  as  = 

27The  “versicles”  (bate)  were  said  (pp.  132ff.)  to  the  verses  of  the  Nunc  dimittis. 
The  “continuation”  in  B  297  11.19f.  =  a  verse  of  the  Acts.  The  resemblance 
probably  lies  in  the  fact  that  both  are  of  the  New  Testament. 

28cf.  B298  1.5  ff  A  new  anthem  evidently  begins  here:  cf.  note  33. 

29These  last  versicles  may  correspond  to  the  “verses  of  the  anthem”  B  298 11.24f. 
30rd^*\  lit.  “door”;  this  and  baita  (rtfX^=>)  plur.  bate  (rCk=>)  are  technical  ex¬ 
pressions,  used  also  in  Arabic  poetry;  cf.  B  299  11.12-17. 


133 


thy  of  one  mansion;  but  though  they  have  been  accounted  worthy  of 
mercy  they  shall  not  be  made  like  to  those  who  have  laboured.  As  a 
man,  when  he  makes  a  supper,  sends  and  calls  his  friends  joyfully,  (but) 
drives  away  his  enemies  from  him,  (and)  of  his  goodness  brings  in  some 
who  have  not  transgressed  badly,  but  (have  committed)  small  sins;  and 
(as)  these  when  they  enter  are  not  granted  enjoyment  with  openness  of 
face  [=  familiarly,  confidently]  like  his  friends,  but  lesser  dainties  are 
set  before  them  -  while  his  friends,  though  they  are  with  them  [=  the 
others]  in  the  enjoyment,  he  holds  worthy  of  many  honours  -  even  so 
shall  it  be  done  in  our  Lord’s  judgment:  the  righteous  by  their  labours 
shall  inherit  the  mansions  of  the  Father’s  house:  sinners  who  receive 
mercy  shall  inherit  lesser  mansions.  And  so  by  (the  response,  or  an¬ 
them)  “Thy  body  and  Thy  blood”  all  these  things  are  depicted:  the  peo¬ 
ple  by  the  mercy  shewn  to  them  (always)  answering  the  same  clause 
[ tara ]31 :  those  and  others,  who  are  (more)  exalted,  saying  the  last 
versicles32  [bate]. 

But  that  “Terrible  art  Thou”  and  “Thy  body  and  Thy  blood”33  are 
not  said  on  any  Sunday,  is  because  on  Sundays  we  signify  only  the 
resurrection;  (but)  on  festivals  the  resurrection  and  the  (special)  solem¬ 
nity34  of  the  festival.  To  the  festivals  we  assign  (fol.l55v°)  “Terrible 
art  Thou”  and  “Thy  body  and  Thy  blood”;  to  the  resurrection  only  the 
response  [unnaya]  and  the  versicles  [bate]35 .  Concerning  these  things 
then  let  (this)  explanation  suffice. 


31  See  former  note. 

32See  note  29. 

33George  evidently  means  that  these  are  2  separate  anthems  (cf.  p.  1 33  where  it 
is  said  that  those  “by  the  Mysteries  (=  in  apse)  change  (to)  “Thy  Godly”  etc. 

34r^\o*i 

35I.e.  the  two  anthems  beginning  “Terrible”,  and  “Thy  body”  are  interpreted 
in  connection  with  the  particular  act  of  our  Lord’s  dispensation  which  is 
being  celebrated  on  this  or  that  festival:  to  the  resurrection  only  the  versicles 
with  their  response,  i.e.  it  would  seem  the  verses  of  the  Nunc  dimittis  with 
some  other  response  than  “Terrible”  (see  notes  on  pp.!32f.)  are  applied. 


134 


Moreover  they36  also  add  a  (hymn  of)  praise  [teshbohta]31 ,  which 
is  a  common  thanksgiving  of  good  and  bad;  of  the  wise  and  the  fool¬ 
ish;  and  so  to  each  of  the  senses  mentioned  in  it38  they  give  (its)  grati¬ 
fication.  He  who  is  sanctified  in  all  his  senses  becomes  perfect  in  the 
kingdom;  and  presenting  ten  pounds,  ten  cities39  are  given  to  him;  and 
he  who  (offers)  less  (receives)  in  amount  according  to  (the  number  of) 
his  senses.  Because  also  the  senses  are  both  of  body  and  soul40 ,  our 
Lord,  when  He  made  the  parable  declared  that  a  pound  gained  ten 
pounds:  the  pound  that  was  given  by  the  master  being  intelligence.  In 
that  the  spoke  of  ten  servants,  he  indicated  the  completeness  of  (this) 
number;  since  there  is  no  number  above  ten41 .  That  (He  spoke  of)  10 
ponds,  (indicates)  that  He  ^ave  to  all  of  them  intelligence.  The  trading 
is  done  by  means  of  the  senses:  if  a  man  has  been  sanctified  in  one 
sense,  he  gains  one  pound,  if  in  five  he  is  sanctified  he  has  gained  5 
pounds  and  so  on. 

And  so  this  (hymn  of)  praise  [teshbohta]  says42 :  “Strengthen,  O 
Lord,  the  hands  that  are  stretched  out”.  And  it  enumerates  the  hands 
and  the  eye  and  the  ear  and  the  mouth  and  the  tongue  and  the  feet  “and 
the  bodies  that  have  eaten”.  And  “great  love”  which  is  the  fulfilling 
that  (takes  place)  in  the  soul.  And  when  this  thanksgiving  of  each  of 
the  senses  is  fulfilled,  then  they43  turn  to  another44 ,  which  is  “our  Lord 

36It  seems  clear  that  George  has  now  come  to  the  end  of  those  things  said 
only  on  festivals,  and  that  he  here  takes  up  the  general  exposition  left  off  in 
ch.24.  Cf.  the  heading  of  the  present  chapter.  B  says:  “sung  alternately  verse 
by  verse  by  those  in  the  nave  and  those  in  the  sanctuary”. 

37B  300  1.3-36. 

38This  refers  to  the  terms  of  the  teshbohta,  cf.  B  300  11.3-25. 

39Reading:  “cities”  (as  in  the  Gospel  -  Peschitta  Lk.l9:17)  for 

“talents”  (text).  So  S. 

^I.e.  five  of  each. 

4,In  Syriac  10  is  the  last  number  expressed  by  a  single  sign  [i.e.  ^judh  (jod)]. 
After  10  two  or  more  signs  are  used  (e.g.  r<_ijudh-alaf  =11,  and  so  on).  So,  as 
with  us  9  is  the  highest  digit,  with  the  Syrians  10  is. 

42B  300  11.3ff. 

43Cf.  7  notes  earlier. 

^Sc.  another  teshbohta:  the  feminine  shews  that  this  is  meant. 


135 


Jesus”45 :  and  this  is  more  particularly  a  common  (or  “congregational”) 
(prayer).  And  thus  in  many  ways  they  celebrate  the  reception  of  mys¬ 
teries46,  which  is  the  enjoyment  (of  heaven).  As  when  men  are  feast¬ 
ing,  each  one  of  them  intones  [lit.!  “brings”]  a  joyful  verse  [ qinta ]  of 
song,  and  when  one  sings  the  verse,  all  rejoice  and  answer  after  him: 
so  also  is  it  here  -  when  they  praise  the  Lord  who  has  come  “with  every 
breath”47  and  with  all  the  verses  [qinatha].  And  they  accompany  Christ 
[=  priest]  until  He  distributes  [-  has  distributed]  the  Mysteries  and 
enters  (the  apse). 

*  t  . 

Wherefore  Isho’  Yabh  has  said  that  the  priest  comes  with  the  ta¬ 
ble  [=  paten,  tray:  cf.  pp.124,  126]  (fol.l56r°)  to  the  bema,  and  gives 
to  those  who  are  by  [or  “at,  apud”)  the  bema:  that  is  the  clerics 
(K^ripoi)48 :  which  shews  that  our  Lord  pours  forth  His  mercy  on  those 
who  were  set  under  the  Law,  and  He  comes  to  them  in  mercy.  Even  as 
He  descended  to  Jerusalem,  so  now  also  He  stoops  to  come  to  them. 
And  even  if  it  be  not  thus  done  in  all  places,  yet  the  blessed  (man)  [= 
Isho’  Yabh)  himself  so  commanded  that  we  [or  “he”]  might  bring  out 
the  glorious  significations  of  the  Mysteries.  And  when  the  priest  has 
fulfilled  all  things,  and  imitated  his  Lord  in  the  whole  of  His  dispensa¬ 
tion  -  that  which  has  been  fulfilled  that  which  is  to  be  -  then  with  the 
trains  of  spiritual  beings  [=  deacons]  and  with  His  elect  and  saints  [= 
presbyters:  as  stated  elsewhere],  who  by  their  labours  have  inherited 
the  (higher)  grades  and  mansions,  he  enters  in,  his  own  throne,  heaven 
[=  apse]  and  he  sits  upon  his  throne;  and  those  saints  and  spiritual  ones 
rejoice  with  Him  for  ever  and  receive  the  enjoyment  [=  heavenly  bliss]. 


45B  300  1.37:  for  the  beginning  “our  Lord  Jesus”  see  B  299,  note:  Narsai  also 
gives  this  with  the  same  beginning  (“O  our  Lord  Jesus”),  but  says  nothing  of 
the  preceding  teshbohta.  In  George  and  B  this  is  sung  in  parts  during  commun¬ 
ion.  In  Narsai  it  is  said  after  communion  as  a  continuous  prayer  of  the  people. 

46S  is  perhaps  better:  “And  thus  in  many  ways  they  (sing)  praise  during  the 
reception  of  the  mysteries”. 

47B  301  1.21  “at  every  season”.  The  word  here  is  -  perhaps  B  has  a 
mistranslation. 

48Apparently  the  singers,  choir:  cf.  p.132,  note  20. 


136 


CHAPTER  27 


Why  now  again  the  deacon  proclaims  at  the  door  of  the  apse,  “Let 
us  all  then”,  and  what  the  prayers  of  the  priest  signify  and  all  things 
that  are  here  observed,  to  the  end  of  the  Mysteries.  After  the  king  [= 
priest,  representing  Christ]  has  completed  the  dispensation  of  his  judge¬ 
ment  and  has  gone  up  with  his  saints  to  heaven,  and  the  men  to  whom 
mercy  has  been  shewn  [=  congregation]  have  remained  (on  earth)  , 
having  received  the  enjoyment  of  Him  -  for  though  they  were  far  [= 
different]  from  him,  yet  they  have  certainly  been  rejoiced  -  then,  when 
we  have  become  our  church  and  have  all  shared  in  the  removal  of  pas¬ 
sions  of  inconstancy,  and  have  together  received  the  enjoyment  of  the 
kingdom:  Gabriel  shews  and  says:  “Let  us  all  then,  who  by  the  gift  of 
the  grace  of  the  Holy  Spirit  have  drawn  nigh  and  have  been  accounted 
worthy”,  and  the  rest.1 

We  now  who  have  been  accounted  worthy  of  all  this  grace,  and 
have  been  set  free  from  the  passions  of  sin,  and  have  become  heirs  of 
the  heavenly  kingdom  -  “let  us  confess  [or  “give  thanks”]  to  Him  now 
and  praise  Him”2  who,  when  we  were  unworthy  by  reason  of  our  sins, 
turned  to  us  in  His  many  mercies  and  redeemed  us  from  death  and  in¬ 
constancy,  so  that  we  are  heirs  of  his  good  things.  (fol.l56v°)  What 
then?  “Let  us  confess  [or  “give  thanks”]  to  Him  and  praise  Him”. 

Then  the  people,  obedient  to  their  director  Gabriel,  render  glory 
[or  “praise”]  and  say  in  common:  “Glory  to  Him  for  the  greatness  of 
His  gift,  of  which  mortals  are  not  sufficient  to  speak,  which  now  has 
been  poured  upon  us”3 .  But  when  he  [=  the  deacon]  has  seen  that  the 
people  have  fully  rendered  thanks,  then  he  also  makes  request  and  com¬ 
mands:  “Pray  ye  now,  that  peace  may  be  with  us”4 . 


•B  301, 11.28-32. 

2B  301  11.31f. 

3Cf.  B  301  11.34f. 

4B  301  1.37. 


137 


Then  the  priest,  rejoicing  in  his  people,  that  they  have  been  ac¬ 
counted  worthy  of  his  enjoyment5 ,  and  beholding  all  the  glorious  things 
that  have  been  performed  towards  his  people,  renders  thanks  to  the 
Creator,  God,  through  the  Man  (taken)  from  us:  “It  is  fitting6 ,  Lord, 
daily  to  confess  to  Thy  Godhead,  and  to  worship  Thy  Majesty  [or 
“Lordship”],  who  hast  raised  up  our  race  from  the  dust  and  hast  made 
it  of  the  same  nature  as  [lit.  “a  son  of  the  nature  of’7  ]  the  spiritual 
beings:  and  in  one  Church  (with  us)  they  shall  glorify  Thee  with  a  new 
glory;  and  Thou  hast  given  them  the  enjoyment  of  Thy  kingdom,  and 
hast  taught  them  the  pleasantness  of  Thy  praises,  that  without  cease 
continually  they  may  confess  [or  “give  thanks”]  to  Thee:  even  to  Thy 
glorious  Trinity,  with  voices  of  praise  and  confession”.  And  then  the 
people,  after  their  custom,  worshipping  on  the  earth,  as  though  ashamed 
before  their  Creator  and  the  greatness  of  His  honour,  render  glory  with 
the  seal  of  Amen:  and  they  ask  of  Him  that  He  will  bless  them.8 

And  having  heard  what  they  ask,  he  turns  his  speech  to  them  say¬ 
ing:  “Lo,  in  Christ9 ,  who  is  a  son  of  your  race,  you  have  taken  refuge: 
He  it  is  that  has  made  you  worthy  of  all  these  honours  which  are  in 
His  enjoyment  -  which  (enjoyment)  His  body  and  His  blood  is  after 
the  manner  of  an  earnest10 .  May  He  grant  to  all  reasonable  beings  in 
common  to  praise  Him  with  all  (their)  senses  -  when  this  earnest  of 
the  Mysteries  which  we  have  received  shall  have  been  fulfilled  for  us 
in  the  kingdom  of  heaven,  when  the  resurrection  comes  in  the  end  - 
together  with  all  His  elect,  by  His  grace  and  His  mercy”11 . 


5I.e.  given  by  him  (=  communion). 

6B  302  11. Iff. 

7  A  phrase  used  often  in  Syriac  to  render  opooooioq 

8B  302, 11.12f. 

’B  302 11. 1 5ff.  [Narsai,  p.30,  represents  this  prayer  only  as  far  as  1.20:  “thoughts 
and  words  and  deeds”].  George  represents  the  whole  -  see  references  infra. 

,0Ibid.  1.20. 

nB  302  11.24f.  are  clearly  in  view  here. 


138 


Then  he  [Isho’  Yabh]  says  that  the  deacon  announces  the  peace 
secretly;  and  those  in  the  apse  give  the  peace  to  one  another  in  secret, 
forasmuch  as  they  [=  those  in  the  apse]  have  been  accounted  worthy 
of  this  gift  more  especially  (fol.!57r°)  than  the  people  on  whom  mercy 
has  been  done,  they  have  the  enjoyment  with  Christ  secretly12 .  By  the 
“peace”  which  they  give  one  to  another,  (they  signify)  that  passions  of 
inconstancy,  wherein  wrath  is  hidden,  have  passed  away  from  them. 
That  they  stand  in  order,  (signifies)  that  all  things  that  are  there  [=  in 
heaven,  the  apse]  are  in  comely  order.  That  others  apart  from  him  who 
has  consecrated,  pray13 :  (that  is)  that  the  saints  are  accounted  worthy 
to  sit  with  Christ.  That  he  finally  blesses14,  (is)  because  it  is  he  who 
has  made  them  to  enjoy  the  mysteries. 

And  then,  after  that  the  saints  have  had  the  enjoyment  secretly,  the 

t 

priest  goes  forth  that  he  may  again  be  seen  of  those  upon  mercy  has 
been  done  [=  the  people]  and  bless  them  also.  And  whereas  those  within 
have  the  enjoyment  with  him  continually,  those  without  (have  it  also) 
in  part.  And  he  goes  forth15 ,  and  with  him  Gabriel  and  the  train  of  his 
companions  also,  as  it  were  for  the  honouring  of  a  king.  And  he  [=  the 
deacon]  cries  before  him  suppliantly  that  he  will  bless  the  people  who 
have  confessed  Him  [the  priest  as  impersonating  Christ].  And  he  blesses 
them  and  says:  “He  who  now  has  associated  our  whole  race  in  all  per¬ 
fect  things  through  the  Mediator  Jesus  Christ,  may  He  bless  you  and 
renew  you  and  add  to  you  abundant  honour16  ”.  But  again  blessed  Timo¬ 
thy17  has  added  here  to  the  canons  of  Isho’  Yabh  that  they  should  say 
“Our  Father  who  art  in  heaven”18,  which  is  the  prayer  of  our  Lord’s 


12Cf.  B  302  11.26-28. 

* 

,3Can  this  refer  to  the  psalms  etc.  in  B  302  1.29-303  1.16?  At  any  rate  some 
sort  of  prayers  were  said  here  in  the  sanctuary. 

14This  seems  to  refer  to  a  spiritual  blessing  for  those  in  the  apse. 

,5B  303  lL21ff 

, *  *  }  . 

16Cf.  B  303  11.23 ff. 

17This  was  Timothy  I  Nestorian  Catholicus  died  c.821. 

18See  Liturgical  Homilies  of  Narsai ,  p.82. 


139 


(own)  teaching,  which  fills  up  the  enjoyment19,  and  those  within  and 
those  without  [pray]  it  together:  that  is,  all  of  them  have  been  deliv¬ 
ered  from  the  passion  of  inconstancy,  and  have  become  enjoyers  of  the 
body  and  the  blood,  which  are  an  earnest  of  the  kingdom. 

But  when  everything  has  been  completed,  the  veils  which  were  di¬ 
vided  are  closed  on  high20  between  the  perfect  saints  and  the -men  to 
whom  mercy  was  shewn.  And  now  they  shut  the  doors  of  the 
bridechamber  [=  apse],  because  the  redemption  has  been  completed. 
Moreover  those  saints  who  are  within,  have  another  honour  set  apart 
for  them,  (/b/./57v°)  and  they  also  receive  a  certain  mark  of  distinc¬ 
tion  [purshana ]21  which  is  [=  signifies]  perfect  love.  And  when  the 
purshana  is  presented  [or  “brought  nigh”],  the  priest  who  consecrated 
blesses  [it  (?)]:  for  everything  is  completed  by  Christ.  Then  all,  as 
having  been  accounted  worthy  of  great  honours,  set  out  with  joy  for 
their  homes  and  (there)  they  prepare  a  further  banquet,  that  that  goodly 
joy  of  theirs  may  be  completed  by  the  partaking  [lit.  ‘intercourse’]  of 
bodily  things.  And  they  also  prepare  entertainment  for  one  another  and 
feasts  and  banquets;  that  as  Christ  has  united  them  by  His  dispensa¬ 
tion,  and  made  them  one  body  and  one  spirit,  so  they  may  associate 
one  with  another  as  disciples. 

Now  to  God  the  Father,  who  has  redeemed  us  all  from  error,  and 
to  His  only  Son,  Jesus  Christ,  who  has  brought  us  near  to  the  familiar 
association  of  the  mysteries,  and  to  the  Holy  Spirit,  who  has  made  us 
wise  with  all  the  wisdom  of  His  teaching  and  has  shewn  us  the  paths 
that  bring  us  unto  the  kingdom,  be  glory  and  honour  for  every  and  ever. 


19Sc.  the  bliss  of  heaven,  signified  by  reception  of  communion,  as  frequently 

•  * 

in  this  tract. 

“I.e.  in  front  of  the  apse  (which  symbolizes  heaven). 

21  Lit.  “difference”.  But  the  word  seems  to  be  used  in  a  technical  concrete 
sense;  and  it  perhaps  refers  to  the  eulogia  (B  304  1.13)  given  after  the  service 
(?) 


140 


CHAPTER  28 


Why  the  deacons  in  the  apse  do  not  bend  the  knee  throughout  the 
Mysteries.  We  have  already  said  that  a  genuflexion  everywhere  signi- 
fies  death,  whether  they  genuflect  without  (the  apse)  or  within:  and  sit- 
ting  upon  the  ground  also  signifies  the  same  thing. 

And  the  priest  bends  the  knee  in  the  apse  because  he  is  the  repre¬ 
sentative  of  Christ,  and  typifies  His  death  and  His  resurrection.  Christ 
died  in  His  humanity:  justly  then  does  He  [=*.  the  priest]  bend  the  knee 
and  typify  death.  But  the  deacons,  inasmuch  as  they  typify  the  spir¬ 
itual  beings  -  and  spiritual  beings  do  not  die  at  all,  and  are  not  clothed 
in  a  mortal  body  -  it  is  right  that  thy  should  typify  according  to  the 
order  of  their  nature.  And  (so)  they  do  not  bend  the  knee;  but  thy  stand 
upon  their  feet,  because  the  spiritual  beings  stand  before  the  judgment 
seat  continually,  And  you  may  take  a  proof  (of  this)  from  Gabriel,  who 
said  to  Zachary  “I  am  Gabriel,  (fol .  158r°)  who  stand  before  God”.  And 
again  Isaiah  said,  “And  the  seraphim  were  standing  above  it”;  and 
Daniel  said,  “A  thousand  thousands  stand  before  Him  and  ten  thou¬ 
sand  times  ten  thousand  minister  to  His  honour”.  And  thus  it  is  right 
for  the  deacons,  who  are  a  type  of  the  spiritual  beings,  only  to  stand 
in  their  ministrations.  Wherefore  they  do  not  bend  the  knee1 . 


'S  adds  “in  the  apse”. 


141 


CHAPTER  29 


Why  in  the  passion  and  the  fast  the  deacon  does  not  say  before 
the  Gospel  “Let  us  stand  ready”,  but  “Be  ye  in  silence”;  and  why  they 
do  not  read  the  lessons  of  the  Law  and  the  Prophets  at  baptism  and  in 
the  Mysteries  of  Saturday.  Whereas  the  Gospel  is  read  on  Sundays  and 
festivals,  it  is  here  not  death,  but  the  dispensation  that  is  celebrated. 
And  when  it  is  the  dispensation  (that  is  signified),  the  angel  [=  dea¬ 
con]  mingles  himself  with  us1 ,  on  account  of  reason  and  life.  But  this 

matter  has  been  treated  by  us  earlier2 . 

*  *  •  * 

But  when  we  signify  the  passion  or  the  fast:  since  they  [the  an¬ 
gels]  do  not  hunger  or  thirst  or  fast  or  die,  the  angel  removes  himself 
from  us3 ,  attributing  to  us  death  and  suffering,  saying:  Now  that  you 
are  fasting  the  fast  -  whereas  our  nature  neither  fast s  nor  eats  -  “Be  ye 
[in  stillness]  and  be  silent”4 :  fulfil  the  service  that  belongs  property  to 
your  own  nature.  Again,  when  we  are  signifying  the  passion  and  death 
he  says  the  same  thing.  And  when  we  perform  baptism,  (since)  this 
belongs  property  to  us,  and  therein  also  we  signify  death,  he  does  not 
mingle  himself  with  us5 . 

Moreover,  (as  regards)  the  lessons  of  the  prophets:  that  they  are 
not  read  at  baptism  and  in  the  Mysteries  of  Saturday,  belongs  to  their 
special  character;  for  whenever  we  read  the  Old  (Testament  we  de¬ 
pict  that  ancient  dispensation  that  was  before  the  Law,  and  that  of  the 
Law  itself.  But  in  Baptism  we  have  (already)  depicted  the  ancient  dis¬ 
pensation  by  the  signings  and  the  things  that  come  before  that  point, 
and  we  have  entered  the  beginning  of  the  New  (dispensation)  by  the 
(diaconal)  proclamation  [karozutha]6 .  (fol.l58v°)  It  is  not  right  (there- 

'I.e.  he  uses  the  first  person  plural  -  “Let  us  stand”. 

2Cf.  chap.  9  foil 23 v°. 

3Sc.  uses  second  person  “Be  ye”  etc. 

4The  formula  is  cAxa  ac^  r<r  lit.  “be  ye  in  silence  and  be  silent”  (see 
heading  to  chap. 9). 

5I.e.  uses  the  first  person  plural  “Let  us”  etc. 

6I.e.  the  diaconal  litanies. 


142 


fore)  that  we  should  read  the  Old  (Testament),  which  signifies  the  old 
dispensation;  but  let  us  travel  in  the  way  of  our  canons  and  read  the 
Apostle,  which  signifies  the  carnal  birth  of  our  Lord,  and  the  hymn 
[Zummara]1 ,  which  signifies  the  baptism  of  John,  and  the  Gospel  which 
signifies  the  baptism  of  our  Lord;  and  then  let  us  come  (and)  ourselves 
be  baptized  with  His  baptism. 

Moreover  on  the  evening  of  the  Sabbath  [=  Saturday]7 8  -  because, 
when  the  baptism  is  finished,  we  say  that  our  Lord  rose  together  with9 
those  baptized  persons  who  stand  forth  from  Jordan10 ;  and  now  the 
whole  of  the  old  (dispensation)  has  lapsed  and  passed  away,  for  we 
see  a  new  law,  even  Christ,  who  fulfilled  His  dispensation  and  died 
and  rose  -  rightly  do  us  omit  the  lessons  of  the  Old  (Testament),  which 
bring  in  only  death  to  nature,  but  read  lessons  which  shews  forth  the 
dispensation  of  our  Lord.  Finally  [we  omit  O.T]  because  the  old  world 
has  passed  away,  and  we  are  representing  a  new  one:  that  is,  the  state 
of  things  (which  is  to  be)  after  the  resurrection. 


7Cf.  p.46  above. 

8The  Saturday  was  probably  Holy  Saturday,  as  it  appears  from  Tract  5  (that 
on  Baptism)  chap.l.  That  in  George’s  day  baptism  was  then  given.  This  was 
probably  followed  immediately  by  the  Liturgy  of  Easter  Sunday,  which  was 
celebrated  on  Saturday  night  -  see  above  chap.l,  p.27,  note  9. 

9I.e.  at  the  same  time  as. 

I0I.e.  the  baptismal  font. 


143 


CHAPTER  30 


Why  we  go  forth  on  the  morning  of  the  Sunday  of  the  Resurrec¬ 
tion,  and  give  the  “Peace  of  the  Resurrection”,  or  (recite)  a  Soghitha 1 . 
Since  Christ  has  risen,  and  we  with  Him  by  a  mystery,  and  we  have 
seen  how  the  angels  together  with  us  have  been  set  free  from  incon¬ 
stancy,  and  we  have  been  made  one  Church  with  them:  now  also  we 
shew  the  newness  of  the  resurrection  state.  The  cross  goes  forth,  and 
the  Gospel  and  the  bishop,  with  censers  and  lights,  into  the  court 
[ daretha]  without,  together  with  the  whole  congregation,  with  anthems 
[ onyatha ]  of  the  resurrection.  That  the  cross  and  the  Gospel  and  the 
bishop  go  forth,  (means)  that  Christ  came  to  us;  that  first  for  visited 
us  by  His  dispensation,  and  that  in  the  end  He  will  raise  us  up.  That 
they  go  out  to  the  court,  (means)  that  our  Lord  was  crucified  there; 
for  it  [the  court,  representing  the  place  of  crucifixion]  is  without  Jeru¬ 
salem;  and  the  Gospel  says  that  the  tomb  was  by  the  cross:  “Now 
there  was  in  that  place  wherein  Jesus  was  crucified  (fol.l59r°)  a  gar¬ 
den”,  it  says,  “and  in  the  same  garden  a  new  monument”,  and  the  rest 
[John  19:41].  Moreover  our  resurrection  also  takes  place  [or  “will  take 
place”]  in  the  same  place  in  which  Jesus  was  crucified.  And  the  Gos¬ 
pel  also  says  that  the  place  was  near  Jerusalem  [cf.  John  19:20].  And 
so  it  is  that  we  go  forth  without  to  the  court,  -  outside  Jerusalem  (which 
is)  the  nave2 . 

What  then?  The  whole  community,  gives  the  peace  one  to  another: 
that  is  to  say,  the  bishop  by  means  of  the  cross  and  the  gospel3  and 
(the  rest)  each  one  to  his  companion  -  the  priests  and  deacons  and 
people  being  all  together.  They  give  the  peace  because  thoughts  of 
carnal  things  [lit.  “bodily  thoughts”]  have  been  done  away,  and  the 
whole  Church  has  become  one,  of  spiritual  and  corporeal  beings  (to- 

1 A  soghitha  seems  to  have  been  a  poem  written  in  dialogue  form.  See  Liturgi¬ 
cal  Homilies  of  Narsai  p.ix.  See  also  p.145,  note  4. 

2With  George  Jerusalem  usually  =  the  bema;  but  the  bema  was,  he  tells  us  “in 
the  midst  of  the  nave”  (Tract  2  chap.2). 

3So  S. 


144 


gether):  and  there  [sc.  in  the  resurrection]  there  is  neither  head  nor 
tail,  neither  great  nor  little;  for  all  are  of  one  standing  [lit.  “age”:  Gr. 
atcpr|]  in  the  enjoyment  of  King  Messiah  [or  “of  the  King  Christ”]. 
And  Christ  in  His  humanity  shares  with  us;  (and)  as  He  was  with  our 
nature  here,  so  there  [=  in  the  resurrection]  He  will  share  in  our  things: 
and  He  is  the  head,  and  we  are  the  body.  And  when  everything  shall 
have  been  made  subject  to  the  Son,  and  the  Son  Himself  in  His  man¬ 
hood  shall  have  been  revealed,  united  with  the  Word,  in  the  judgment, 
then  all  men  shall  possess  one  mind,  and  the  wickedness  and  lust  of 
our  hearts  shall  be  uprooted;  and  everything  will  be  good;  and  there 
shall  not  be  there  the  rod  of  the  oppressor,  but  joy  and  peace  in  the 
Holy  spirit. 

And  herewith  what?  They  say  “the  peace  of  the  resurrection”  or 
a  Soghitha4 .  And  if  they  say  a  Soghitha ,  the  lesser  ones  say  it;  but  if 
they  say  the  “peace”,  the  bishop  says  (it);  for  when  they  say  a  Soghitha 
they  shew  that  they  are  standing  at  the  tomb  with  Mary  and  weeping 
and  enquiring  about  Christ5 ;  but  if  they  say  the  “peace”,  this  is  a  type 
of  Christ,  who  here  gives  His  teaching  to  Mary6 .  But  in  the  other  case 
he  gives  a  teaching  of  the  judgment,  to  the  sheep  who  are  on  the  right 
hand  and  the  goats  who  are  on  left.  And  so  the  lesser  ones  say  the 
soghitha ,  according  to  the  light  estimation  and  inferiority  of  the  na¬ 
ture  of  women7 .  But  if  (they  say)  the  peace,  the  bishop  says  it,  who 
fills  the  peace  of  Christ.  (fol.l59v°) 

Thus  then  concerning  these  things:  for  we  have  caused  the  fourth 
Treatise  to  rest  in  the  harbour  of  completeness;  wherein,  according  to 
the  extent  of  our  power,  we  have  brought  together  the  practises  which 
are  observed  in  the  Mysteries.  And  while  we  stood  in  the  contest  of 
the  explanation  of  the  Mysteries,  He  gave  strength  who  strengthens  the 
feeble,  and  encouraged  our  weakness. 

4See  p.144,  note  3. 

5This  is  quite  in  accord  with  the  idea  that  a  soghitha  was  a  dialogue,  see  note 
p.144. 

6I.e.  apparently  teaches  Mary  about  the  resurrection. 

7Sc.  the  women  at  the  tomb  signified  the  soghitha. 


145 


And  to  Christ  who  delivered  His  Mysteries  for  our  salvation,  and 
to  the  Father  with  Him,  who  sent  Him  to  our  race,  and  to  the  Holy 
Spirit  who  came  down  and  gave  us  wisdom,  and  made  known  to  us 
the  power  of  His  Majesty  [or  “Lordship”],  be  glory  and  honour  for 
ever  and  ever.  Amen. 

[By  the  help  of  our  Lord  and  your  prayers,  brother,  we  have  is- 

*  * 

sued  from  the  hard  contest  of  the  exposition  of  the  service  of  the  Mys¬ 
teries,  and  our  fear  in  this  matter  has  been  taken  away.  And  even  though 
the  expositions  be  not  apt:  yet  according  to  our  power  we  have  per¬ 
formed  what  we  promised.  Now  let  us  come  to  the  exposition  of  holy 
Baptism8  .The  forth  Treatise  is  ended.  And  to  Jah  [=  Jehovah]  be  eter¬ 
nal  glory.  Amen. 


8In  S  this  comes  at  the  beginning  of  Tract  4,  where  it  seems  properly  to  be¬ 
long. 


146 


Index 


A 

Addai  and  Mari  20,  21,  100,  122, 
127 

Altar  3,7,  14,  16,  17,  19,21,22, 

23,  24,  33,  35,  36>  37,  40,  42, 
52,  54,  55,  56,  60,  62,  66,  74, 

75,  76,  78,  79,  83,  84,  90,  106, 
108,  109,  118,  121,  124 

Anaphora  85,  87,  90,  121,  129 
Angels  3,  4,  7,  8,  9,  12,  14,  17,  19, 

24,  28,  32,  33,  35,  37,  40,  45, 
49,  50,  53,  54,  55,  64,  66,  73, 

76,  88,  89,  92,  95,  96,  97,  98, 
101,  103,  104,  111,  113,  114, 
121,  124,  126,  129,  130,  142, 
144 

Anthem  12,15,32,33,67,68,71, 
73,  74,  75,  86,  124,  132,  133, 
134,  144 

Apostle  3,  7,  9,  10,  11,  26,  27,  31, 
37,  38,  40,  42,  43,  44,  45,  46, 
49,  60,  65,71,75,  78,81,82, 
88,91,97;  104,  114,  121,  124, 
127,  130,  143 

Apse  2,  3,  4,  6,  7,  14,  16,21,22, 
23,  24,  32,  33,  34,  35,  36,  37, 
40,  42,  45,  48,  54,  55,  56,  62, 
65,  68,  69,  70,71,73,  74,  75, 
78,  85,  90,  94,  102,  108,  110, 
121,  122,  124, 130,  134,  136, 
137,  139,  140,  141,  143 
Archdeacon  33,  34,  36,  40,  43,  54, 
55,61,68,  70,71,73,  75 

B 

Baptistery  2,  5,  22,  23 


Bema  3,  4,  22,  23,  24,  32,  33,  34, 
35,  36,  37,38,  40,41,42,  43, 
44,  45,  46,  48,  52,  54,  55,  56, 
60,  65,  67,  68,  69,  70,  73,  74, 
75,81,94,  95,  100,  102,  108, 
110,  121,  124,  128,  129,  130, 
131,  133,  136,  144 
Bishop  3,  6,  8,  9,  10,  12,  14,  15, 
16,  19,  20,  22,  24,  32,  33,  34, 
35,  36,  37,  39,  43,  44,  46,  48, 
50,  52,  54,  55,  56,  62,  65,  67, 
68,  69,  70,  73,  74,  75,  76,  77, 
78,  79,  80,  82,  86,  90,  124, 
144,  145 
Bows  83,  96 

Bread  15,  17,  18,  19,29,71,  105, 
106,  107,  108,  111 


Canon  5,  10,  20,  32,  36,  61,  87, 

91,  94,  97,  98,  100,  103,  104, 
114,  121,  128,  130,  139,  143 

Catechumens  22,  34,  61,  66,  124, 
125 

Celebrant  20,  22,  24r  76,  86,  120 

Cephas  10,  24,  27,  58,  70,  75,  76, 
77,  79,  80,  82,  121 

Church  1,  2,  3,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10, 

12,  13,  14,  15,  16,  17,21,22, 
23 , 24,  26,  27,  29,  32,  33,  37, 
40,  49,  50,  52,  60,  64,  66,  68, 
71,  74,  73,  76,  77,  80,  82,  97, 
98,  103,  109,  112,  114,  118, 
121,  125,  126,  127,  137,  138, 
144 

Creed  75,  77 

D 

Diaconicon  21,  23,  37,  42,  44,  45, 
59,  69 

Diptychs  1 1,  20,  25,  80,  81,  82,  1 17 


147 


Dismissal  22,  34,  61,  66,  73,  124, 
125,  126,  127 

Door  2,  3,4,  5,  7,  15,  16,21,22, 
23,  24,  33,  35,  36,  37,  40,  42, 
43,  44,  45,  48,  55,61,62,  64, 
65,  66,  69,  70,  73,  78,  85,  90, 
109,  122,  123,  124,  133,  137, 

140 

E 

Ephraim  13,  19,  86,  133 

G 

Gabriel  13,24,33,34,38,39,40, 
41,43,  46,  60,  62,  64,  78,  80, 
81,82,  86,91,94,  95,  102, 
103,  104,  110,  113,  117,  121, 
122,  123,  124,  131,  137,  139, 

141 

Gangway  3,  4,  22,  23,  24,  34,  52 
Gehanta  79,  96,  97,  98,  99,  100, 
101 

Gospel  3,  7,  9,  17,  34,  35,  44,  45, 
46,  47,  48,  49,  50,51,52,  53, 
54,  55,  56,  58,  60,61,62,  66, 
67,  69,  90,  96,  105,  115,  121, 
124,  130,  131,  132,  135,  142, 
143,  144 

H 

Highest  church  9,  12,  14,  16,  24, 
33,  40,  49,  76 
Homily  58,  1 14 


Institution  20,  21,  63,  98,  99,  100, 
127 

Invocation  18,  20,  21,  99,  100, 
103,  104,  127 


J 

Jerusalem  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  14,  15, 
24,  27,31,33,  34,  35,  37,  38, 
41,42,  44,  45,  47,  48,  55,  68, 
70,  73,  94,  102,  108,  110, 
131,  136,  144 

Jordan  2,  6,  25,  32,  41,  43,  45, 

48,  55,  143 

K 

Karozutha  60,  142 
Kaxaarpcopa  3,  4,  5,  7,  15,  16, 
21,22,  23,  24,  35,  36 

L 

Lakhu  Mara  35,  36 
Lamps  2,  15,  16,  21,  23,  24,  35, 
48,  49,  71 

Law  5,9,29,31,34,37,38,39, 
41,42,  45,  47,81,93,  94,  96, 
118,  128,  131,  136,  142,  143 
Lecterns  22,  23 
Lessons  37,  46,  142,  143 
Litanies  54,  56,  60,  87,  142 
Litany  112,  114 
Lowest  church  3,9,  13,  14,  15, 

16,  24,  37 

M 

Mansions  24,  71,  72,  73,  74,  76, 
78,  90,  99,  121,  123,  124, 

126,  133,  134,  136 
Marmitha  29,  30,  31,  32,  47,  85 
Metropolitan  8,  9,  10,  12 
Michael  24,33,34,38,40,41, 

60,  63,  64,  80,  81,  82,  94,  95, 
96,  101,  102,  103,  104,  110, 
121,  124 

Middle  church  9,  14,  16,  24,  33, 
64,  66,  76,  121 


148 


Nave  2,3,4,5,7,21,22,24,38, 
41,42,61,65,  66,71,73,  122, 
123,  124,  130,  135,  144 
Nestorius  2,  11,  15,  18,  19,  20, 

100,  104,  120  • 


Onitha  33,67,74 


Passage  1,17,18,19,23,44,54, 
63,74,  98,  113,  114,  126 

Peace  9,  10,  34,  36,  37,  40,  41,  46, 
50,51,56,  60,  68,  78,  80,  87, 
88,  89,  90,91,94,  95,  96,  100, 
101,  102,  116,  117,  118,  121, 
123,  131,  132,  137,  139,  144, 
145 

Peter  24,  67,  74 

Preface  20,96,97,  119,  130 

Preparation  29,  37,  40,  49,  71,  72, 
95 

Procession  22,  32,  33,  34,  35,  45, 
48,  54,  73 

Proclamation  78,  85,  94,  95,  110, 
114,  142 

Prophet  3,  9,  12,  13,  15,  16,  34, 

37,  38,  39,  42,  45,  47,  63,  78, 
81,82,  85,  94,  96,  97,  98,  130, 
131,  132,  133,  142 

Q 

Qala  29,30 

Qestroma  21,  23,  24,  76 

Qinta  30,  31,39,47,  136 


Readers  3,8,9,11,13,15,16,21, 
24,33,37, 46,48,  54,55,60,  76 


Response  81,  82,  112,  131,  132, 
133,  134 

Rising  up  25,  68 

S 

Sanctus  32,  97,  98 

Shurraya  29,  30,  37,  39,  40 

Sitting  25,  43,  45,  51,  59,  68,  69, 
73,  76,  96,  103,  104,  124,  128, 
141 

Steps  4,  7,  21,  22,  23 

Subdeacon  2,  8,  9,  11,  13,  15,  16, 
17,21,24,  33,  34,  35,  48,  49, 
52,61,64,  65,  66,  76,  121, 

123 

Sursum  Corda  17,  20,  91,  92,  95, 
110 

Symbolism  1,  6,  24,  25,  28,  33,  34, 
90,  126 

T 

Theodore  104 

Throne  3,  7,  10,  13,  14,  15,  16,  22, 
23,  24,  33,  34,51,52,  62,  76, 
79,  84,  96,  108,  136 

Trisagion  36 

V 

Veil  35,  74,  90,  97 

W 

Washing  65,  69,  71 

Wine  15,17,18,29,71,105,107, 
108,  111 

Z 

Zummara  30,  45,  46,  48,  54,  143 


149 


O.I.R.S.I.  Publications,  Recent  Books 


217.  Dr.  Jacob  Kattackal,  Indian  Philosophy,  1999,  pp.  550, 
Rs.  250.00 

218.  Dr.  Jacob  Kattackal,  Incarnation  and  Resurrection  ir 
World  Religions,  1999,  pp.  120,  Rs.  50.00 

222.  Dr.  George  Mathew,  Eucharist  (Qurbana);  The 
Celebration  of  the  Economy  of  Salvation,  1999,  pp.  184 
Rs.  90.00 

225.  Dr.  Kizhakkearanjaniyil,  East  Syrian  Baptisma 
Theology. 

226.  Dr.  Johnson  Chittilappilly,  Mdabbranuta;  The  Divine 
Dispensation  of  Our  Lord  in  the  Holy  Qurbana  of  the  Eas 
Syrian  Tradition,  2000,  pp.  445,  Rs.  250 

227.  Dr.  Joseph  Kottackal,  Behold  Your  Mother,  1999,  pp 
100,  Rs.  45.00 

228.  Dr.  Joseph  Kallarangatt,  Pneumatocentric  Ecclesiolog\ 
in  Nikos  Nissiotis,  1999,  pp.  220,  Rs.  110 

234.  Dr.  Jacob  Kattackal,  Kathopanisad,  2000,  pp.  150 
Rs.  75.00 

240.  Fr.  Robert  Matheus,  The  Order  of  the  Thin 
Sanctification,  2000,  pp.360,  Rs.  140 


150